<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
<FictionBook xmlns="http://www.gribuser.ru/xml/fictionbook/2.0" xmlns:l="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"><description><title-info><author><first-name>Plato</first-name></author><book-title>Timaeus</book-title><lang>uk</lang></title-info></description><body><section><p>TIMAEUS</p><p>by Plato</p><p>Translated by Benjamin Jowett</p><p>Contents</p><p>INTRODUCTION AND ANALYSIS.&#13;
 Section 1.&#13;
 Section 2.&#13;
 Section 3.&#13;
 Section 4.&#13;
 Section 5.&#13;
 Section 6.&#13;
 Section 7.&#13;
 Section 8.</p><p>TIMAEUS</p><p>INTRODUCTION AND ANALYSIS.</p><p>Of all the writings of Plato the Timaeus is the most obscure and&#13;
      repulsive to the modern reader, and has nevertheless had the&#13;
      greatest influence over the ancient and mediaeval world. The&#13;
      obscurity arises in the infancy of physical science, out of the&#13;
      confusion of theological, mathematical, and physiological&#13;
      notions, out of the desire to conceive the whole of nature&#13;
      without any adequate knowledge of the parts, and from a greater&#13;
      perception of similarities which lie on the surface than of&#13;
      differences which are hidden from view. To bring sense under the&#13;
      control of reason; to find some way through the mist or labyrinth&#13;
      of appearances, either the highway of mathematics, or more&#13;
      devious paths suggested by the analogy of man with the world, and&#13;
      of the world with man; to see that all things have a cause and&#13;
      are tending towards an end—this is the spirit of the ancient&#13;
      physical philosopher. He has no notion of trying an experiment&#13;
      and is hardly capable of observing the curiosities of nature&#13;
      which are ‘tumbling out at his feet,’ or of interpreting even the&#13;
      most obvious of them. He is driven back from the nearer to the&#13;
      more distant, from particulars to generalities, from the earth to&#13;
      the stars. He lifts up his eyes to the heavens and seeks to guide&#13;
      by their motions his erring footsteps. But we neither appreciate&#13;
      the conditions of knowledge to which he was subjected, nor have&#13;
      the ideas which fastened upon his imagination the same hold upon&#13;
      us. For he is hanging between matter and mind; he is under the&#13;
      dominion at the same time both of sense and of abstractions; his&#13;
      impressions are taken almost at random from the outside of&#13;
      nature; he sees the light, but not the objects which are revealed&#13;
      by the light; and he brings into juxtaposition things which to us&#13;
      appear wide as the poles asunder, because he finds nothing&#13;
      between them. He passes abruptly from persons to ideas and&#13;
      numbers, and from ideas and numbers to persons,—from the heavens&#13;
      to man, from astronomy to physiology; he confuses, or rather does&#13;
      not distinguish, subject and object, first and final causes, and&#13;
      is dreaming of geometrical figures lost in a flux of sense. He&#13;
      contrasts the perfect movements of the heavenly bodies with the&#13;
      imperfect representation of them (Rep.), and he does not always&#13;
      require strict accuracy even in applications of number and figure&#13;
      (Rep.). His mind lingers around the forms of mythology, which he&#13;
      uses as symbols or translates into figures of speech. He has no&#13;
      implements of observation, such as the telescope or microscope;&#13;
      the great science of chemistry is a blank to him. It is only by&#13;
      an effort that the modern thinker can breathe the atmosphere of&#13;
      the ancient philosopher, or understand how, under such unequal&#13;
      conditions, he seems in many instances, by a sort of inspiration,&#13;
      to have anticipated the truth.</p><p>The influence with the Timaeus has exercised upon posterity is&#13;
      due partly to a misunderstanding. In the supposed depths of this&#13;
      dialogue the Neo-Platonists found hidden meanings and connections&#13;
      with the Jewish and Christian Scriptures, and out of them they&#13;
      elicited doctrines quite at variance with the spirit of Plato.&#13;
      Believing that he was inspired by the Holy Ghost, or had received&#13;
      his wisdom from Moses, they seemed to find in his writings the&#13;
      Christian Trinity, the Word, the Church, the creation of the&#13;
      world in a Jewish sense, as they really found the personality of&#13;
      God or of mind, and the immortality of the soul. All religions&#13;
      and philosophies met and mingled in the schools of Alexandria,&#13;
      and the Neo-Platonists had a method of interpretation which could&#13;
      elicit any meaning out of any words. They were really incapable&#13;
      of distinguishing between the opinions of one philosopher and&#13;
      another— between Aristotle and Plato, or between the serious&#13;
      thoughts of Plato and his passing fancies. They were absorbed in&#13;
      his theology and were under the dominion of his name, while that&#13;
      which was truly great and truly characteristic in him, his effort&#13;
      to realize and connect abstractions, was not understood by them&#13;
      at all. Yet the genius of Plato and Greek philosophy reacted upon&#13;
      the East, and a Greek element of thought and language overlaid&#13;
      and partly reduced to order the chaos of Orientalism. And kindred&#13;
      spirits, like St. Augustine, even though they were acquainted&#13;
      with his writings only through the medium of a Latin translation,&#13;
      were profoundly affected by them, seeming to find ‘God and his&#13;
      word everywhere insinuated’ in them (August. Confess.)</p><p>There is no danger of the modern commentators on the Timaeus&#13;
      falling into the absurdities of the Neo-Platonists. In the&#13;
      present day we are well aware that an ancient philosopher is to&#13;
      be interpreted from himself and by the contemporary history of&#13;
      thought. We know that mysticism is not criticism. The fancies of&#13;
      the Neo-Platonists are only interesting to us because they&#13;
      exhibit a phase of the human mind which prevailed widely in the&#13;
      first centuries of the Christian era, and is not wholly extinct&#13;
      in our own day. But they have nothing to do with the&#13;
      interpretation of Plato, and in spirit they are opposed to him.&#13;
      They are the feeble expression of an age which has lost the power&#13;
      not only of creating great works, but of understanding them. They&#13;
      are the spurious birth of a marriage between philosophy and&#13;
      tradition, between Hellas and the East—(Greek) (Rep.). Whereas&#13;
      the so-called mysticism of Plato is purely Greek, arising out of&#13;
      his imperfect knowledge and high aspirations, and is the growth&#13;
      of an age in which philosophy is not wholly separated from poetry&#13;
      and mythology.</p><p>A greater danger with modern interpreters of Plato is the&#13;
      tendency to regard the Timaeus as the centre of his system. We do&#13;
      not know how Plato would have arranged his own dialogues, or&#13;
      whether the thought of arranging any of them, besides the two&#13;
      ‘Trilogies’ which he has expressly connected; was ever present to&#13;
      his mind. But, if he had arranged them, there are many&#13;
      indications that this is not the place which he would have&#13;
      assigned to the Timaeus. We observe, first of all, that the&#13;
      dialogue is put into the mouth of a Pythagorean philosopher, and&#13;
      not of Socrates. And this is required by dramatic propriety; for&#13;
      the investigation of nature was expressly renounced by Socrates&#13;
      in the Phaedo. Nor does Plato himself attribute any importance to&#13;
      his guesses at science. He is not at all absorbed by them, as he&#13;
      is by the IDEA of good. He is modest and hesitating, and&#13;
      confesses that his words partake of the uncertainty of the&#13;
      subject (Tim.). The dialogue is primarily concerned with the&#13;
      animal creation, including under this term the heavenly bodies,&#13;
      and with man only as one among the animals. But we can hardly&#13;
      suppose that Plato would have preferred the study of nature to&#13;
      man, or that he would have deemed the formation of the world and&#13;
      the human frame to have the same interest which he ascribes to&#13;
      the mystery of being and not-being, or to the great political&#13;
      problems which he discusses in the Republic and the Laws. There&#13;
      are no speculations on physics in the other dialogues of Plato,&#13;
      and he himself regards the consideration of them as a rational&#13;
      pastime only. He is beginning to feel the need of further&#13;
      divisions of knowledge; and is becoming aware that besides&#13;
      dialectic, mathematics, and the arts, there is another field&#13;
      which has been hitherto unexplored by him. But he has not as yet&#13;
      defined this intermediate territory which lies somewhere between&#13;
      medicine and mathematics, and he would have felt that there was&#13;
      as great an impiety in ranking theories of physics first in the&#13;
      order of knowledge, as in placing the body before the soul.</p><p>It is true, however, that the Timaeus is by no means confined to&#13;
      speculations on physics. The deeper foundations of the Platonic&#13;
      philosophy, such as the nature of God, the distinction of the&#13;
      sensible and intellectual, the great original conceptions of time&#13;
      and space, also appear in it. They are found principally in the&#13;
      first half of the dialogue. The construction of the heavens is&#13;
      for the most part ideal; the cyclic year serves as the connection&#13;
      between the world of absolute being and of generation, just as&#13;
      the number of population in the Republic is the expression or&#13;
      symbol of the transition from the ideal to the actual state. In&#13;
      some passages we are uncertain whether we are reading a&#13;
      description of astronomical facts or contemplating processes of&#13;
      the human mind, or of that divine mind (Phil.) which in Plato is&#13;
      hardly separable from it. The characteristics of man are&#13;
      transferred to the world-animal, as for example when intelligence&#13;
      and knowledge are said to be perfected by the circle of the Same,&#13;
      and true opinion by the circle of the Other; and conversely the&#13;
      motions of the world-animal reappear in man; its amorphous state&#13;
      continues in the child, and in both disorder and chaos are&#13;
      gradually succeeded by stability and order. It is not however to&#13;
      passages like these that Plato is referring when he speaks of the&#13;
      uncertainty of his subject, but rather to the composition of&#13;
      bodies, to the relations of colours, the nature of diseases, and&#13;
      the like, about which he truly feels the lamentable ignorance&#13;
      prevailing in his own age.</p><p>We are led by Plato himself to regard the Timaeus, not as the&#13;
      centre or inmost shrine of the edifice, but as a detached&#13;
      building in a different style, framed, not after the Socratic,&#13;
      but after some Pythagorean model. As in the Cratylus and&#13;
      Parmenides, we are uncertain whether Plato is expressing his own&#13;
      opinions, or appropriating and perhaps improving the&#13;
      philosophical speculations of others. In all three dialogues he&#13;
      is exerting his dramatic and imitative power; in the Cratylus&#13;
      mingling a satirical and humorous purpose with true principles of&#13;
      language; in the Parmenides overthrowing Megarianism by a sort of&#13;
      ultra-Megarianism, which discovers contradictions in the one as&#13;
      great as those which have been previously shown to exist in the&#13;
      ideas. There is a similar uncertainty about the Timaeus; in the&#13;
      first part he scales the heights of transcendentalism, in the&#13;
      latter part he treats in a bald and superficial manner of the&#13;
      functions and diseases of the human frame. He uses the thoughts&#13;
      and almost the words of Parmenides when he discourses of being&#13;
      and of essence, adopting from old religion into philosophy the&#13;
      conception of God, and from the Megarians the IDEA of good. He&#13;
      agrees with Empedocles and the Atomists in attributing the&#13;
      greater differences of kinds to the figures of the elements and&#13;
      their movements into and out of one another. With Heracleitus, he&#13;
      acknowledges the perpetual flux; like Anaxagoras, he asserts the&#13;
      predominance of mind, although admitting an element of necessity&#13;
      which reason is incapable of subduing; like the Pythagoreans he&#13;
      supposes the mystery of the world to be contained in number.&#13;
      Many, if not all the elements of the Pre-Socratic philosophy are&#13;
      included in the Timaeus. It is a composite or eclectic work of&#13;
      imagination, in which Plato, without naming them, gathers up into&#13;
      a kind of system the various elements of philosophy which&#13;
      preceded him.</p><p>If we allow for the difference of subject, and for some growth in&#13;
      Plato’s own mind, the discrepancy between the Timaeus and the&#13;
      other dialogues will not appear to be great. It is probable that&#13;
      the relation of the ideas to God or of God to the world was&#13;
      differently conceived by him at different times of his life. In&#13;
      all his later dialogues we observe a tendency in him to personify&#13;
      mind or God, and he therefore naturally inclines to view creation&#13;
      as the work of design. The creator is like a human artist who&#13;
      frames in his mind a plan which he executes by the help of his&#13;
      servants. Thus the language of philosophy which speaks of first&#13;
      and second causes is crossed by another sort of phraseology: ‘God&#13;
      made the world because he was good, and the demons ministered to&#13;
      him.’ The Timaeus is cast in a more theological and less&#13;
      philosophical mould than the other dialogues, but the same&#13;
      general spirit is apparent; there is the same dualism or&#13;
      opposition between the ideal and actual—the soul is prior to the&#13;
      body, the intelligible and unseen to the visible and corporeal.&#13;
      There is the same distinction between knowledge and opinion which&#13;
      occurs in the Theaetetus and Republic, the same enmity to the&#13;
      poets, the same combination of music and gymnastics. The doctrine&#13;
      of transmigration is still held by him, as in the Phaedrus and&#13;
      Republic; and the soul has a view of the heavens in a prior state&#13;
      of being. The ideas also remain, but they have become types in&#13;
      nature, forms of men, animals, birds, fishes. And the attribution&#13;
      of evil to physical causes accords with the doctrine which he&#13;
      maintains in the Laws respecting the involuntariness of vice.</p><p>The style and plan of the Timaeus differ greatly from that of any&#13;
      other of the Platonic dialogues. The language is weighty, abrupt,&#13;
      and in some passages sublime. But Plato has not the same mastery&#13;
      over his instrument which he exhibits in the Phaedrus or&#13;
      Symposium. Nothing can exceed the beauty or art of the&#13;
      introduction, in which he is using words after his accustomed&#13;
      manner. But in the rest of the work the power of language seems&#13;
      to fail him, and the dramatic form is wholly given up. He could&#13;
      write in one style, but not in another, and the Greek language&#13;
      had not as yet been fashioned by any poet or philosopher to&#13;
      describe physical phenomena. The early physiologists had&#13;
      generally written in verse; the prose writers, like Democritus&#13;
      and Anaxagoras, as far as we can judge from their fragments,&#13;
      never attained to a periodic style. And hence we find the same&#13;
      sort of clumsiness in the Timaeus of Plato which characterizes&#13;
      the philosophical poem of Lucretius. There is a want of flow and&#13;
      often a defect of rhythm; the meaning is sometimes obscure, and&#13;
      there is a greater use of apposition and more of repetition than&#13;
      occurs in Plato’s earlier writings. The sentences are less&#13;
      closely connected and also more involved; the antecedents of&#13;
      demonstrative and relative pronouns are in some cases remote and&#13;
      perplexing. The greater frequency of participles and of absolute&#13;
      constructions gives the effect of heaviness. The descriptive&#13;
      portion of the Timaeus retains traces of the first Greek prose&#13;
      composition; for the great master of language was speaking on a&#13;
      theme with which he was imperfectly acquainted, and had no words&#13;
      in which to express his meaning. The rugged grandeur of the&#13;
      opening discourse of Timaeus may be compared with the more&#13;
      harmonious beauty of a similar passage in the Phaedrus.</p><p>To the same cause we may attribute the want of plan. Plato had&#13;
      not the command of his materials which would have enabled him to&#13;
      produce a perfect work of art. Hence there are several new&#13;
      beginnings and resumptions and formal or artificial connections;&#13;
      we miss the ‘callida junctura’ of the earlier dialogues. His&#13;
      speculations about the Eternal, his theories of creation, his&#13;
      mathematical anticipations, are supplemented by desultory remarks&#13;
      on the one immortal and the two mortal souls of man, on the&#13;
      functions of the bodily organs in health and disease, on sight,&#13;
      hearing, smell, taste, and touch. He soars into the heavens, and&#13;
      then, as if his wings were suddenly clipped, he walks&#13;
      ungracefully and with difficulty upon the earth. The greatest&#13;
      things in the world, and the least things in man, are brought&#13;
      within the compass of a short treatise. But the intermediate&#13;
      links are missing, and we cannot be surprised that there should&#13;
      be a want of unity in a work which embraces astronomy, theology,&#13;
      physiology, and natural philosophy in a few pages.</p><p>It is not easy to determine how Plato’s cosmos may be presented&#13;
      to the reader in a clearer and shorter form; or how we may supply&#13;
      a thread of connexion to his ideas without giving greater&#13;
      consistency to them than they possessed in his mind, or adding on&#13;
      consequences which would never have occurred to him. For he has&#13;
      glimpses of the truth, but no comprehensive or perfect vision.&#13;
      There are isolated expressions about the nature of God which have&#13;
      a wonderful depth and power; but we are not justified in assuming&#13;
      that these had any greater significance to the mind of Plato than&#13;
      language of a neutral and impersonal character... With a view to&#13;
      the illustration of the Timaeus I propose to divide this&#13;
      Introduction into sections, of which the first will contain an&#13;
      outline of the dialogue: (2) I shall consider the aspects of&#13;
      nature which presented themselves to Plato and his age, and the&#13;
      elements of philosophy which entered into the conception of them:&#13;
      (3) the theology and physics of the Timaeus, including the soul&#13;
      of the world, the conception of time and space, and the&#13;
      composition of the elements: (4) in the fourth section I shall&#13;
      consider the Platonic astronomy, and the position of the earth.&#13;
      There will remain, (5) the psychology, (6) the physiology of&#13;
      Plato, and (7) his analysis of the senses to be briefly commented&#13;
      upon: (8) lastly, we may examine in what points Plato approaches&#13;
      or anticipates the discoveries of modern science.</p><p>Section 1.</p><p>Socrates begins the Timaeus with a summary of the Republic. He&#13;
      lightly touches upon a few points,—the division of labour and&#13;
      distribution of the citizens into classes, the double nature and&#13;
      training of the guardians, the community of property and of women&#13;
      and children. But he makes no mention of the second education, or&#13;
      of the government of philosophers.</p><p>And now he desires to see the ideal State set in motion; he would&#13;
      like to know how she behaved in some great struggle. But he is&#13;
      unable to invent such a narrative himself; and he is afraid that&#13;
      the poets are equally incapable; for, although he pretends to&#13;
      have nothing to say against them, he remarks that they are a&#13;
      tribe of imitators, who can only describe what they have seen.&#13;
      And he fears that the Sophists, who are plentifully supplied with&#13;
      graces of speech, in their erratic way of life having never had a&#13;
      city or house of their own, may through want of experience err in&#13;
      their conception of philosophers and statesmen. ‘And therefore to&#13;
      you I turn, Timaeus, citizen of Locris, who are at once a&#13;
      philosopher and a statesman, and to you, Critias, whom all&#13;
      Athenians know to be similarly accomplished, and to Hermocrates,&#13;
      who is also fitted by nature and education to share in our&#13;
      discourse.’</p><p>HERMOCRATES: ‘We will do our best, and have been already&#13;
      preparing; for on our way home, Critias told us of an ancient&#13;
      tradition, which I wish, Critias, that you would repeat to&#13;
      Socrates.’ ‘I will, if Timaeus approves.’ ‘I approve.’ Listen&#13;
      then, Socrates, to a tale of Solon’s, who, being the friend of&#13;
      Dropidas my great-grandfather, told it to my grandfather Critias,&#13;
      and he told me. The narrative related to ancient famous actions&#13;
      of the Athenian people, and to one especially, which I will&#13;
      rehearse in honour of you and of the goddess. Critias when he&#13;
      told this tale of the olden time, was ninety years old, I being&#13;
      not more than ten. The occasion of the rehearsal was the day of&#13;
      the Apaturia called the Registration of Youth, at which our&#13;
      parents gave prizes for recitation. Some poems of Solon were&#13;
      recited by the boys. They had not at that time gone out of&#13;
      fashion, and the recital of them led some one to say, perhaps in&#13;
      compliment to Critias, that Solon was not only the wisest of men&#13;
      but also the best of poets. The old man brightened up at hearing&#13;
      this, and said: Had Solon only had the leisure which was required&#13;
      to complete the famous legend which he brought with him from&#13;
      Egypt he would have been as distinguished as Homer and Hesiod.&#13;
      ‘And what was the subject of the poem?’ said the person who made&#13;
      the remark. The subject was a very noble one; he described the&#13;
      most famous action in which the Athenian people were ever&#13;
      engaged. But the memory of their exploits has passed away owing&#13;
      to the lapse of time and the extinction of the actors. ‘Tell us,’&#13;
      said the other, ‘the whole story, and where Solon heard the&#13;
      story.’ He replied—There is at the head of the Egyptian Delta,&#13;
      where the river Nile divides, a city and district called Sais;&#13;
      the city was the birthplace of King Amasis, and is under the&#13;
      protection of the goddess Neith or Athene. The citizens have a&#13;
      friendly feeling towards the Athenians, believing themselves to&#13;
      be related to them. Hither came Solon, and was received with&#13;
      honour; and here he first learnt, by conversing with the Egyptian&#13;
      priests, how ignorant he and his countrymen were of antiquity.&#13;
      Perceiving this, and with the view of eliciting information from&#13;
      them, he told them the tales of Phoroneus and Niobe, and also of&#13;
      Deucalion and Pyrrha, and he endeavoured to count the generations&#13;
      which had since passed. Thereupon an aged priest said to him: ‘O&#13;
      Solon, Solon, you Hellenes are ever young, and there is no old&#13;
      man who is a Hellene.’ ‘What do you mean?’ he asked. ‘In mind,’&#13;
      replied the priest, ‘I mean to say that you are children; there&#13;
      is no opinion or tradition of knowledge among you which is white&#13;
      with age; and I will tell you why. Like the rest of mankind you&#13;
      have suffered from convulsions of nature, which are chiefly&#13;
      brought about by the two great agencies of fire and water. The&#13;
      former is symbolized in the Hellenic tale of young Phaethon who&#13;
      drove his father’s horses the wrong way, and having burnt up the&#13;
      earth was himself burnt up by a thunderbolt. For there occurs at&#13;
      long intervals a derangement of the heavenly bodies, and then the&#13;
      earth is destroyed by fire. At such times, and when fire is the&#13;
      agent, those who dwell by rivers or on the seashore are safer&#13;
      than those who dwell upon high and dry places, who in their turn&#13;
      are safer when the danger is from water. Now the Nile is our&#13;
      saviour from fire, and as there is little rain in Egypt, we are&#13;
      not harmed by water; whereas in other countries, when a deluge&#13;
      comes, the inhabitants are swept by the rivers into the sea. The&#13;
      memorials which your own and other nations have once had of the&#13;
      famous actions of mankind perish in the waters at certain&#13;
      periods; and the rude survivors in the mountains begin again,&#13;
      knowing nothing of the world before the flood. But in Egypt the&#13;
      traditions of our own and other lands are by us registered for&#13;
      ever in our temples. The genealogies which you have recited to us&#13;
      out of your own annals, Solon, are a mere children’s story. For&#13;
      in the first place, you remember one deluge only, and there were&#13;
      many of them, and you know nothing of that fairest and noblest&#13;
      race of which you are a seed or remnant. The memory of them was&#13;
      lost, because there was no written voice among you. For in the&#13;
      times before the great flood Athens was the greatest and best of&#13;
      cities and did the noblest deeds and had the best constitution of&#13;
      any under the face of heaven.’ Solon marvelled, and desired to be&#13;
      informed of the particulars. ‘You are welcome to hear them,’ said&#13;
      the priest, ‘both for your own sake and for that of the city, and&#13;
      above all for the sake of the goddess who is the common foundress&#13;
      of both our cities. Nine thousand years have elapsed since she&#13;
      founded yours, and eight thousand since she founded ours, as our&#13;
      annals record. Many laws exist among us which are the counterpart&#13;
      of yours as they were in the olden time. I will briefly describe&#13;
      them to you, and you shall read the account of them at your&#13;
      leisure in the sacred registers. In the first place, there was a&#13;
      caste of priests among the ancient Athenians, and another of&#13;
      artisans; also castes of shepherds, hunters, and husbandmen, and&#13;
      lastly of warriors, who, like the warriors of Egypt, were&#13;
      separated from the rest, and carried shields and spears, a custom&#13;
      which the goddess first taught you, and then the Asiatics, and we&#13;
      among Asiatics first received from her. Observe again, what care&#13;
      the law took in the pursuit of wisdom, searching out the deep&#13;
      things of the world, and applying them to the use of man. The&#13;
      spot of earth which the goddess chose had the best of climates,&#13;
      and produced the wisest men; in no other was she herself, the&#13;
      philosopher and warrior goddess, so likely to have votaries. And&#13;
      there you dwelt as became the children of the gods, excelling all&#13;
      men in virtue, and many famous actions are recorded of you. The&#13;
      most famous of them all was the overthrow of the island of&#13;
      Atlantis. This great island lay over against the Pillars of&#13;
      Heracles, in extent greater than Libya and Asia put together, and&#13;
      was the passage to other islands and to a great ocean of which&#13;
      the Mediterranean sea was only the harbour; and within the&#13;
      Pillars the empire of Atlantis reached in Europe to Tyrrhenia and&#13;
      in Libya to Egypt. This mighty power was arrayed against Egypt&#13;
      and Hellas and all the countries bordering on the Mediterranean.&#13;
      Then your city did bravely, and won renown over the whole earth.&#13;
      For at the peril of her own existence, and when the other&#13;
      Hellenes had deserted her, she repelled the invader, and of her&#13;
      own accord gave liberty to all the nations within the Pillars. A&#13;
      little while afterwards there were great earthquakes and floods,&#13;
      and your warrior race all sank into the earth; and the great&#13;
      island of Atlantis also disappeared in the sea. This is the&#13;
      explanation of the shallows which are found in that part of the&#13;
      Atlantic ocean.’</p><p>Such was the tale, Socrates, which Critias heard from Solon; and&#13;
      I noticed when listening to you yesterday, how close the&#13;
      resemblance was between your city and citizens and the ancient&#13;
      Athenian State. But I would not speak at the time, because I&#13;
      wanted to refresh my memory. I had heard the old man when I was a&#13;
      child, and though I could not remember the whole of our&#13;
      yesterday’s discourse, I was able to recall every word of this,&#13;
      which is branded into my mind; and I am prepared, Socrates, to&#13;
      rehearse to you the entire narrative. The imaginary State which&#13;
      you were describing may be identified with the reality of Solon,&#13;
      and our antediluvian ancestors may be your citizens. ‘That is&#13;
      excellent, Critias, and very appropriate to a Panathenaic&#13;
      festival; the truth of the story is a great advantage.’ Then now&#13;
      let me explain to you the order of our entertainment; first,&#13;
      Timaeus, who is a natural philosopher, will speak of the origin&#13;
      of the world, going down to the creation of man, and then I shall&#13;
      receive the men whom he has created, and some of whom will have&#13;
      been educated by you, and introduce them to you as the lost&#13;
      Athenian citizens of whom the Egyptian record spoke. As the law&#13;
      of Solon prescribes, we will bring them into court and&#13;
      acknowledge their claims to citizenship. ‘I see,’ replied&#13;
      Socrates, ‘that I shall be well entertained; and do you, Timaeus,&#13;
      offer up a prayer and begin.’</p><p>TIMAEUS: All men who have any right feeling, at the beginning of&#13;
      any enterprise, call upon the Gods; and he who is about to speak&#13;
      of the origin of the universe has a special need of their aid.&#13;
      May my words be acceptable to them, and may I speak in the manner&#13;
      which will be most intelligible to you and will best express my&#13;
      own meaning!</p><p>First, I must distinguish between that which always is and never&#13;
      becomes and which is apprehended by reason and reflection, and&#13;
      that which always becomes and never is and is conceived by&#13;
      opinion with the help of sense. All that becomes and is created&#13;
      is the work of a cause, and that is fair which the artificer&#13;
      makes after an eternal pattern, but whatever is fashioned after a&#13;
      created pattern is not fair. Is the world created or&#13;
      uncreated?—that is the first question. Created, I reply, being&#13;
      visible and tangible and having a body, and therefore sensible;&#13;
      and if sensible, then created; and if created, made by a cause,&#13;
      and the cause is the ineffable father of all things, who had&#13;
      before him an eternal archetype. For to imagine that the&#13;
      archetype was created would be blasphemy, seeing that the world&#13;
      is the noblest of creations, and God is the best of causes. And&#13;
      the world being thus created according to the eternal pattern is&#13;
      the copy of something; and we may assume that words are akin to&#13;
      the matter of which they speak. What is spoken of the unchanging&#13;
      or intelligible must be certain and true; but what is spoken of&#13;
      the created image can only be probable; being is to becoming what&#13;
      truth is to belief. And amid the variety of opinions which have&#13;
      arisen about God and the nature of the world we must be content&#13;
      to take probability for our rule, considering that I, who am the&#13;
      speaker, and you, who are the judges, are only men; to&#13;
      probability we may attain but no further.</p><p>SOCRATES: Excellent, Timaeus, I like your manner of approaching&#13;
      the subject—proceed.</p><p>TIMAEUS: Why did the Creator make the world?...He was good, and&#13;
      therefore not jealous, and being free from jealousy he desired&#13;
      that all things should be like himself. Wherefore he set in order&#13;
      the visible world, which he found in disorder. Now he who is the&#13;
      best could only create the fairest; and reflecting that of&#13;
      visible things the intelligent is superior to the unintelligent,&#13;
      he put intelligence in soul and soul in body, and framed the&#13;
      universe to be the best and fairest work in the order of nature,&#13;
      and the world became a living soul through the providence of God.</p><p>In the likeness of what animal was the world made?—that is the&#13;
      third question...The form of the perfect animal was a whole, and&#13;
      contained all intelligible beings, and the visible animal, made&#13;
      after the pattern of this, included all visible creatures.</p><p>Are there many worlds or one only?—that is the fourth&#13;
      question...One only. For if in the original there had been more&#13;
      than one they would have been the parts of a third, which would&#13;
      have been the true pattern of the world; and therefore there is,&#13;
      and will ever be, but one created world. Now that which is&#13;
      created is of necessity corporeal and visible and&#13;
      tangible,—visible and therefore made of fire,—tangible and&#13;
      therefore solid and made of earth. But two terms must be united&#13;
      by a third, which is a mean between them; and had the earth been&#13;
      a surface only, one mean would have sufficed, but two means are&#13;
      required to unite solid bodies. And as the world was composed of&#13;
      solids, between the elements of fire and earth God placed two&#13;
      other elements of air and water, and arranged them in a&#13;
      continuous proportion—</p><p>fire:air::air:water, and air:water::water:earth,</p><p>and so put together a visible and palpable heaven, having harmony&#13;
      and friendship in the union of the four elements; and being at&#13;
      unity with itself it was indissoluble except by the hand of the&#13;
      framer. Each of the elements was taken into the universe whole&#13;
      and entire; for he considered that the animal should be perfect&#13;
      and one, leaving no remnants out of which another animal could be&#13;
      created, and should also be free from old age and disease, which&#13;
      are produced by the action of external forces. And as he was to&#13;
      contain all things, he was made in the all-containing form of a&#13;
      sphere, round as from a lathe and every way equidistant from the&#13;
      centre, as was natural and suitable to him. He was finished and&#13;
      smooth, having neither eyes nor ears, for there was nothing&#13;
      without him which he could see or hear; and he had no need to&#13;
      carry food to his mouth, nor was there air for him to breathe;&#13;
      and he did not require hands, for there was nothing of which he&#13;
      could take hold, nor feet, with which to walk. All that he did&#13;
      was done rationally in and by himself, and he moved in a circle&#13;
      turning within himself, which is the most intellectual of&#13;
      motions; but the other six motions were wanting to him; wherefore&#13;
      the universe had no feet or legs.</p><p>And so the thought of God made a God in the image of a perfect&#13;
      body, having intercourse with himself and needing no other, but&#13;
      in every part harmonious and self-contained and truly blessed.&#13;
      The soul was first made by him—the elder to rule the younger; not&#13;
      in the order in which our wayward fancy has led us to describe&#13;
      them, but the soul first and afterwards the body. God took of the&#13;
      unchangeable and indivisible and also of the divisible and&#13;
      corporeal, and out of the two he made a third nature, essence,&#13;
      which was in a mean between them, and partook of the same and the&#13;
      other, the intractable nature of the other being compressed into&#13;
      the same. Having made a compound of all the three, he proceeded&#13;
      to divide the entire mass into portions related to one another in&#13;
      the ratios of 1, 2, 3, 4, 9, 8, 27, and proceeded to fill up the&#13;
      double and triple intervals thus—</p><p>- over 1, 4/3, 3/2, - over 2, 8/3, 3, - over 4, 16/3, 6,  - over 8:&#13;
  - over 1, 3/2, 2,   - over 3, 9/2, 6, - over 9, 27/2, 18, - over 27;</p><p>in which double series of numbers are two kinds of means; the one&#13;
      exceeds and is exceeded by equal parts of the extremes, e.g. 1,&#13;
      4/3, 2; the other kind of mean is one which is equidistant from&#13;
      the extremes—2, 4, 6. In this manner there were formed intervals&#13;
      of thirds, 3:2, of fourths, 4:3, and of ninths, 9:8. And next he&#13;
      filled up the intervals of a fourth with ninths, leaving a&#13;
      remnant which is in the ratio of 256:243. The entire compound was&#13;
      divided by him lengthways into two parts, which he united at the&#13;
      centre like the letter X, and bent into an inner and outer circle&#13;
      or sphere, cutting one another again at a point over against the&#13;
      point at which they cross. The outer circle or sphere was named&#13;
      the sphere of the same—the inner, the sphere of the other or&#13;
      diverse; and the one revolved horizontally to the right, the&#13;
      other diagonally to the left. To the sphere of the same which was&#13;
      undivided he gave dominion, but the sphere of the other or&#13;
      diverse was distributed into seven unequal orbits, having&#13;
      intervals in ratios of twos and threes, three of either sort, and&#13;
      he bade the orbits move in opposite directions to one&#13;
      another—three of them, the Sun, Mercury, Venus, with equal&#13;
      swiftness, and the remaining four—the Moon, Saturn, Mars,&#13;
      Jupiter, with unequal swiftness to the three and to one another,&#13;
      but all in due proportion.</p><p>When the Creator had made the soul he made the body within her;&#13;
      and the soul interfused everywhere from the centre to the&#13;
      circumference of heaven, herself turning in herself, began a&#13;
      divine life of rational and everlasting motion. The body of&#13;
      heaven is visible, but the soul is invisible, and partakes of&#13;
      reason and harmony, and is the best of creations, being the work&#13;
      of the best. And being composed of the same, the other, and the&#13;
      essence, these three, and also divided and bound in harmonical&#13;
      proportion, and revolving within herself—the soul when touching&#13;
      anything which has essence, whether divided or undivided, is&#13;
      stirred to utter the sameness or diversity of that and some other&#13;
      thing, and to tell how and when and where individuals are&#13;
      affected or related, whether in the world of change or of&#13;
      essence. When reason is in the neighbourhood of sense, and the&#13;
      circle of the other or diverse is moving truly, then arise true&#13;
      opinions and beliefs; when reason is in the sphere of thought,&#13;
      and the circle of the same runs smoothly, then intelligence is&#13;
      perfected.</p><p>When the Father who begat the world saw the image which he had&#13;
      made of the Eternal Gods moving and living, he rejoiced; and in&#13;
      his joy resolved, since the archetype was eternal, to make the&#13;
      creature eternal as far as this was possible. Wherefore he made&#13;
      an image of eternity which is time, having an uniform motion&#13;
      according to number, parted into months and days and years, and&#13;
      also having greater divisions of past, present, and future. These&#13;
      all apply to becoming in time, and have no meaning in relation to&#13;
      the eternal nature, which ever is and never was or will be; for&#13;
      the unchangeable is never older or younger, and when we say that&#13;
      he ‘was’ or ‘will be,’ we are mistaken, for these words are&#13;
      applicable only to becoming, and not to true being; and equally&#13;
      wrong are we in saying that what has become IS become and that&#13;
      what becomes IS becoming, and that the non-existent IS&#13;
      non-existent...These are the forms of time which imitate eternity&#13;
      and move in a circle measured by number.</p><p>Thus was time made in the image of the eternal nature; and it was&#13;
      created together with the heavens, in order that if they were&#13;
      dissolved, it might perish with them. And God made the sun and&#13;
      moon and five other wanderers, as they are called, seven in all,&#13;
      and to each of them he gave a body moving in an orbit, being one&#13;
      of the seven orbits into which the circle of the other was&#13;
      divided. He put the moon in the orbit which was nearest to the&#13;
      earth, the sun in that next, the morning star and Mercury in the&#13;
      orbits which move opposite to the sun but with equal&#13;
      swiftness—this being the reason why they overtake and are&#13;
      overtaken by one another. All these bodies became living&#13;
      creatures, and learnt their appointed tasks, and began to move,&#13;
      the nearer more swiftly, the remoter more slowly, according to&#13;
      the diagonal movement of the other. And since this was controlled&#13;
      by the movement of the same, the seven planets in their courses&#13;
      appeared to describe spirals; and that appeared fastest which was&#13;
      slowest, and that which overtook others appeared to be overtaken&#13;
      by them. And God lighted a fire in the second orbit from the&#13;
      earth which is called the sun, to give light over the whole&#13;
      heaven, and to teach intelligent beings that knowledge of number&#13;
      which is derived from the revolution of the same. Thus arose day&#13;
      and night, which are the periods of the most intelligent nature;&#13;
      a month is created by the revolution of the moon, a year by that&#13;
      of the sun. Other periods of wonderful length and complexity are&#13;
      not observed by men in general; there is moreover a cycle or&#13;
      perfect year at the completion of which they all meet and&#13;
      coincide...To this end the stars came into being, that the&#13;
      created heaven might imitate the eternal nature.</p><p>Thus far the universal animal was made in the divine image, but&#13;
      the other animals were not as yet included in him. And God&#13;
      created them according to the patterns or species of them which&#13;
      existed in the divine original. There are four of them: one of&#13;
      gods, another of birds, a third of fishes, and a fourth of&#13;
      animals. The gods were made in the form of a circle, which is the&#13;
      most perfect figure and the figure of the universe. They were&#13;
      created chiefly of fire, that they might be bright, and were made&#13;
      to know and follow the best, and to be scattered over the&#13;
      heavens, of which they were to be the glory. Two kinds of motion&#13;
      were assigned to them—first, the revolution in the same and&#13;
      around the same, in peaceful unchanging thought of the same; and&#13;
      to this was added a forward motion which was under the control of&#13;
      the same. Thus then the fixed stars were created, being divine&#13;
      and eternal animals, revolving on the same spot, and the&#13;
      wandering stars, in their courses, were created in the manner&#13;
      already described. The earth, which is our nurse, clinging around&#13;
      the pole extended through the universe, he made to be the&#13;
      guardian and artificer of night and day, first and eldest of gods&#13;
      that are in the interior of heaven. Vain would be the labour of&#13;
      telling all the figures of them, moving as in dance, and their&#13;
      juxta-positions and approximations, and when and where and behind&#13;
      what other stars they appear to disappear—to tell of all this&#13;
      without looking at a plan of them would be labour in vain.</p><p>The knowledge of the other gods is beyond us, and we can only&#13;
      accept the traditions of the ancients, who were the children of&#13;
      the gods, as they said; for surely they must have known their own&#13;
      ancestors. Although they give no proof, we must believe them as&#13;
      is customary. They tell us that Oceanus and Tethys were the&#13;
      children of Earth and Heaven; that Phoreys, Cronos, and Rhea came&#13;
      in the next generation, and were followed by Zeus and Here, whose&#13;
      brothers and children are known to everybody.</p><p>When all of them, both those who show themselves in the sky, and&#13;
      those who retire from view, had come into being, the Creator&#13;
      addressed them thus:—‘Gods, sons of gods, my works, if I will,&#13;
      are indissoluble. That which is bound may be dissolved, but only&#13;
      an evil being would dissolve that which is harmonious and happy.&#13;
      And although you are not immortal you shall not die, for I will&#13;
      hold you together. Hear me, then:—Three tribes of mortal beings&#13;
      have still to be created, but if created by me they would be like&#13;
      gods. Do ye therefore make them; I will implant in them the seed&#13;
      of immortality, and you shall weave together the mortal and&#13;
      immortal, and provide food for them, and receive them again in&#13;
      death.’ Thus he spake, and poured the remains of the elements&#13;
      into the cup in which he had mingled the soul of the universe.&#13;
      They were no longer pure as before, but diluted; and the mixture&#13;
      he distributed into souls equal in number to the stars, and&#13;
      assigned each to a star—then having mounted them, as in a&#13;
      chariot, he showed them the nature of the universe, and told them&#13;
      of their future birth and human lot. They were to be sown in the&#13;
      planets, and out of them was to come forth the most religious of&#13;
      animals, which would hereafter be called man. The souls were to&#13;
      be implanted in bodies, which were in a perpetual flux, whence,&#13;
      he said, would arise, first, sensation; secondly, love, which is&#13;
      a mixture of pleasure and pain; thirdly, fear and anger, and the&#13;
      opposite affections: and if they conquered these, they would live&#13;
      righteously, but if they were conquered by them, unrighteously.&#13;
      He who lived well would return to his native star, and would&#13;
      there have a blessed existence; but, if he lived ill, he would&#13;
      pass into the nature of a woman, and if he did not then alter his&#13;
      evil ways, into the likeness of some animal, until the reason&#13;
      which was in him reasserted her sway over the elements of fire,&#13;
      air, earth, water, which had engrossed her, and he regained his&#13;
      first and better nature. Having given this law to his creatures,&#13;
      that he might be guiltless of their future evil, he sowed them,&#13;
      some in the earth, some in the moon, and some in the other&#13;
      planets; and he ordered the younger gods to frame human bodies&#13;
      for them and to make the necessary additions to them, and to&#13;
      avert from them all but self-inflicted evil.</p><p>Having given these commands, the Creator remained in his own&#13;
      nature. And his children, receiving from him the immortal&#13;
      principle, borrowed from the world portions of earth, air, fire,&#13;
      water, hereafter to be returned, which they fastened together,&#13;
      not with the adamantine bonds which bound themselves, but by&#13;
      little invisible pegs, making each separate body out of all the&#13;
      elements, subject to influx and efflux, and containing the&#13;
      courses of the soul. These swelling and surging as in a river&#13;
      moved irregularly and irrationally in all the six possible ways,&#13;
      forwards, backwards, right, left, up and down. But violent as&#13;
      were the internal and alimentary fluids, the tide became still&#13;
      more violent when the body came into contact with flaming fire,&#13;
      or the solid earth, or gliding waters, or the stormy wind; the&#13;
      motions produced by these impulses pass through the body to the&#13;
      soul and have the name of sensations. Uniting with the&#13;
      ever-flowing current, they shake the courses of the soul,&#13;
      stopping the revolution of the same and twisting in all sorts of&#13;
      ways the nature of the other, and the harmonical ratios of twos&#13;
      and threes and the mean terms which connect them, until the&#13;
      circles are bent and disordered and their motion becomes&#13;
      irregular. You may imagine a position of the body in which the&#13;
      head is resting upon the ground, and the legs are in the air, and&#13;
      the top is bottom and the left right. And something similar&#13;
      happens when the disordered motions of the soul come into contact&#13;
      with any external thing; they say the same or the other in a&#13;
      manner which is the very opposite of the truth, and they are&#13;
      false and foolish, and have no guiding principle in them. And&#13;
      when external impressions enter in, they are really conquered,&#13;
      though they seem to conquer.</p><p>By reason of these affections the soul is at first without&#13;
      intelligence, but as time goes on the stream of nutriment abates,&#13;
      and the courses of the soul regain their proper motion, and&#13;
      apprehend the same and the other rightly, and become rational.&#13;
      The soul of him who has education is whole and perfect and&#13;
      escapes the worst disease, but, if a man’s education be&#13;
      neglected, he walks lamely through life and returns good for&#13;
      nothing to the world below. This, however, is an after-stage—at&#13;
      present, we are only concerned with the creation of the body and&#13;
      soul.</p><p>The two divine courses were encased by the gods in a sphere which&#13;
      is called the head, and is the god and lord of us. And to this&#13;
      they gave the body to be a vehicle, and the members to be&#13;
      instruments, having the power of flexion and extension. Such was&#13;
      the origin of legs and arms. In the next place, the gods gave a&#13;
      forward motion to the human body, because the front part of man&#13;
      was the more honourable and had authority. And they put in a face&#13;
      in which they inserted organs to minister in all things to the&#13;
      providence of the soul. They first contrived the eyes, into which&#13;
      they conveyed a light akin to the light of day, making it flow&#13;
      through the pupils. When the light of the eye is surrounded by&#13;
      the light of day, then like falls upon like, and they unite and&#13;
      form one body which conveys to the soul the motions of visible&#13;
      objects. But when the visual ray goes forth into the darkness,&#13;
      then unlike falls upon unlike—the eye no longer sees, and we go&#13;
      to sleep. The fire or light, when kept in by the eyelids,&#13;
      equalizes the inward motions, and there is rest accompanied by&#13;
      few dreams; only when the greater motions remain they engender in&#13;
      us corresponding visions of the night. And now we shall be able&#13;
      to understand the nature of reflections in mirrors. The fires&#13;
      from within and from without meet about the smooth and bright&#13;
      surface of the mirror; and because they meet in a manner contrary&#13;
      to the usual mode, the right and left sides of the object are&#13;
      transposed. In a concave mirror the top and bottom are inverted,&#13;
      but this is no transposition.</p><p>These are the second causes which God used as his ministers in&#13;
      fashioning the world. They are thought by many to be the prime&#13;
      causes, but they are not so; for they are destitute of mind and&#13;
      reason, and the lover of mind will not allow that there are any&#13;
      prime causes other than the rational and invisible ones—these he&#13;
      investigates first, and afterwards the causes of things which are&#13;
      moved by others, and which work by chance and without order. Of&#13;
      the second or concurrent causes of sight I have already spoken,&#13;
      and I will now speak of the higher purpose of God in giving us&#13;
      eyes. Sight is the source of the greatest benefits to us; for if&#13;
      our eyes had never seen the sun, stars, and heavens, the words&#13;
      which we have spoken would not have been uttered. The sight of&#13;
      them and their revolutions has given us the knowledge of number&#13;
      and time, the power of enquiry, and philosophy, which is the&#13;
      great blessing of human life; not to speak of the lesser benefits&#13;
      which even the vulgar can appreciate. God gave us the faculty of&#13;
      sight that we might behold the order of the heavens and create a&#13;
      corresponding order in our own erring minds. To the like end the&#13;
      gifts of speech and hearing were bestowed upon us; not for the&#13;
      sake of irrational pleasure, but in order that we might harmonize&#13;
      the courses of the soul by sympathy with the harmony of sound,&#13;
      and cure ourselves of our irregular and graceless ways.</p><p>Thus far we have spoken of the works of mind; and there are other&#13;
      works done from necessity, which we must now place beside them;&#13;
      for the creation is made up of both, mind persuading necessity as&#13;
      far as possible to work out good. Before the heavens there&#13;
      existed fire, air, water, earth, which we suppose men to know,&#13;
      though no one has explained their nature, and we erroneously&#13;
      maintain them to be the letters or elements of the whole,&#13;
      although they cannot reasonably be compared even to syllables or&#13;
      first compounds. I am not now speaking of the first principles of&#13;
      things, because I cannot discover them by our present mode of&#13;
      enquiry. But as I observed the rule of probability at first, I&#13;
      will begin anew, seeking by the grace of God to observe it still.</p><p>In our former discussion I distinguished two kinds of being—the&#13;
      unchanging or invisible, and the visible or changing. But now a&#13;
      third kind is required, which I shall call the receptacle or&#13;
      nurse of generation. There is a difficulty in arriving at an&#13;
      exact notion of this third kind, because the four elements&#13;
      themselves are of inexact natures and easily pass into one&#13;
      another, and are too transient to be detained by any one name;&#13;
      wherefore we are compelled to speak of water or fire, not as&#13;
      substances, but as qualities. They may be compared to images made&#13;
      of gold, which are continually assuming new forms. Somebody asks&#13;
      what they are; if you do not know, the safest answer is to reply&#13;
      that they are gold. In like manner there is a universal nature&#13;
      out of which all things are made, and which is like none of them;&#13;
      but they enter into and pass out of her, and are made after&#13;
      patterns of the true in a wonderful and inexplicable manner. The&#13;
      containing principle may be likened to a mother, the source or&#13;
      spring to a father, the intermediate nature to a child; and we&#13;
      may also remark that the matter which receives every variety of&#13;
      form must be formless, like the inodorous liquids which are&#13;
      prepared to receive scents, or the smooth and soft materials on&#13;
      which figures are impressed. In the same way space or matter is&#13;
      neither earth nor fire nor air nor water, but an invisible and&#13;
      formless being which receives all things, and in an&#13;
      incomprehensible manner partakes of the intelligible. But we may&#13;
      say, speaking generally, that fire is that part of this nature&#13;
      which is inflamed, water that which is moistened, and the like.</p><p>Let me ask a question in which a great principle is involved: Is&#13;
      there an essence of fire and the other elements, or are there&#13;
      only fires visible to sense? I answer in a word: If mind is one&#13;
      thing and true opinion another, then there are self-existent&#13;
      essences; but if mind is the same with opinion, then the visible&#13;
      and corporeal is most real. But they are not the same, and they&#13;
      have a different origin and nature. The one comes to us by&#13;
      instruction, the other by persuasion, the one is rational, the&#13;
      other is irrational; the one is movable by persuasion, the other&#13;
      immovable; the one is possessed by every man, the other by the&#13;
      gods and by very few men. And we must acknowledge that as there&#13;
      are two kinds of knowledge, so there are two kinds of being&#13;
      corresponding to them; the one uncreated, indestructible,&#13;
      immovable, which is seen by intelligence only; the other created,&#13;
      which is always becoming in place and vanishing out of place, and&#13;
      is apprehended by opinion and sense. There is also a third&#13;
      nature—that of space, which is indestructible, and is perceived&#13;
      by a kind of spurious reason without the help of sense. This is&#13;
      presented to us in a dreamy manner, and yet is said to be&#13;
      necessary, for we say that all things must be somewhere in space.&#13;
      For they are the images of other things and must therefore have a&#13;
      separate existence and exist in something (i.e. in space). But&#13;
      true reason assures us that while two things (i.e. the idea and&#13;
      the image) are different they cannot inhere in one another, so as&#13;
      to be one and two at the same time.</p><p>To sum up: Being and generation and space, these three, existed&#13;
      before the heavens, and the nurse or vessel of generation,&#13;
      moistened by water and inflamed by fire, and taking the forms of&#13;
      air and earth, assumed various shapes. By the motion of the&#13;
      vessel, the elements were divided, and like grain winnowed by&#13;
      fans, the close and heavy particles settled in one place, the&#13;
      light and airy ones in another. At first they were without reason&#13;
      and measure, and had only certain faint traces of themselves,&#13;
      until God fashioned them by figure and number. In this, as in&#13;
      every other part of creation, I suppose God to have made things,&#13;
      as far as was possible, fair and good, out of things not fair and&#13;
      good.</p><p>And now I will explain to you the generation of the world by a&#13;
      method with which your scientific training will have made you&#13;
      familiar. Fire, air, earth, and water are bodies and therefore&#13;
      solids, and solids are contained in planes, and plane rectilinear&#13;
      figures are made up of triangles. Of triangles there are two&#13;
      kinds; one having the opposite sides equal (isosceles), the other&#13;
      with unequal sides (scalene). These we may fairly assume to be&#13;
      the original elements of fire and the other bodies; what&#13;
      principles are prior to these God only knows, and he of men whom&#13;
      God loves. Next, we must determine what are the four most&#13;
      beautiful figures which are unlike one another and yet sometimes&#13;
      capable of resolution into one another...Of the two kinds of&#13;
      triangles the equal-sided has but one form, the unequal-sided has&#13;
      an infinite variety of forms; and there is none more beautiful&#13;
      than that which forms the half of an equilateral triangle. Let us&#13;
      then choose two triangles; one, the isosceles, the other, that&#13;
      form of scalene which has the square of the longer side three&#13;
      times as great as the square of the lesser side; and affirm that,&#13;
      out of these, fire and the other elements have been constructed.</p><p>I was wrong in imagining that all the four elements could be&#13;
      generated into and out of one another. For as they are formed,&#13;
      three of them from the triangle which has the sides unequal, the&#13;
      fourth from the triangle which has equal sides, three can be&#13;
      resolved into one another, but the fourth cannot be resolved into&#13;
      them nor they into it. So much for their passage into one&#13;
      another: I must now speak of their construction. From the&#13;
      triangle of which the hypotenuse is twice the lesser side the&#13;
      three first regular solids are formed—first, the equilateral&#13;
      pyramid or tetrahedron; secondly, the octahedron; thirdly, the&#13;
      icosahedron; and from the isosceles triangle is formed the cube.&#13;
      And there is a fifth figure (which is made out of twelve&#13;
      pentagons), the dodecahedron—this God used as a model for the&#13;
      twelvefold division of the Zodiac.</p><p>Let us now assign the geometrical forms to their respective&#13;
      elements. The cube is the most stable of them because resting on&#13;
      a quadrangular plane surface, and composed of isosceles&#13;
      triangles. To the earth then, which is the most stable of bodies&#13;
      and the most easily modelled of them, may be assigned the form of&#13;
      a cube; and the remaining forms to the other elements,—to fire&#13;
      the pyramid, to air the octahedron, and to water the&#13;
      icosahedron,—according to their degrees of lightness or heaviness&#13;
      or power, or want of power, of penetration. The single particles&#13;
      of any of the elements are not seen by reason of their smallness;&#13;
      they only become visible when collected. The ratios of their&#13;
      motions, numbers, and other properties, are ordered by the God,&#13;
      who harmonized them as far as necessity permitted.</p><p>The probable conclusion is as follows:—Earth, when dissolved by&#13;
      the more penetrating element of fire, whether acting immediately&#13;
      or through the medium of air or water, is decomposed but not&#13;
      transformed. Water, when divided by fire or air, becomes one part&#13;
      fire, and two parts air. A volume of air divided becomes two of&#13;
      fire. On the other hand, when condensed, two volumes of fire make&#13;
      a volume of air; and two and a half parts of air condense into&#13;
      one of water. Any element which is fastened upon by fire is cut&#13;
      by the sharpness of the triangles, until at length, coalescing&#13;
      with the fire, it is at rest; for similars are not affected by&#13;
      similars. When two kinds of bodies quarrel with one another, then&#13;
      the tendency to decomposition continues until the smaller either&#13;
      escapes to its kindred element or becomes one with its conqueror.&#13;
      And this tendency in bodies to condense or escape is a source of&#13;
      motion...Where there is motion there must be a mover, and where&#13;
      there is a mover there must be something to move. These cannot&#13;
      exist in what is uniform, and therefore motion is due to want of&#13;
      uniformity. But then why, when things are divided after their&#13;
      kinds, do they not cease from motion? The answer is, that the&#13;
      circular motion of all things compresses them, and as ‘nature&#13;
      abhors a vacuum,’ the finer and more subtle particles of the&#13;
      lighter elements, such as fire and air, are thrust into the&#13;
      interstices of the larger, each of them penetrating according to&#13;
      their rarity, and thus all the elements are on their way up and&#13;
      down everywhere and always into their own places. Hence there is&#13;
      a principle of inequality, and therefore of motion, in all time.</p><p>In the next place, we may observe that there are different kinds&#13;
      of fire—(1) flame, (2) light that burns not, (3) the red heat of&#13;
      the embers of fire. And there are varieties of air, as for&#13;
      example, the pure aether, the opaque mist, and other nameless&#13;
      forms. Water, again, is of two kinds, liquid and fusile. The&#13;
      liquid is composed of small and unequal particles, the fusile of&#13;
      large and uniform particles and is more solid, but nevertheless&#13;
      melts at the approach of fire, and then spreads upon the earth.&#13;
      When the substance cools, the fire passes into the air, which is&#13;
      displaced, and forces together and condenses the liquid mass.&#13;
      This process is called cooling and congealment. Of the fusile&#13;
      kinds the fairest and heaviest is gold; this is hardened by&#13;
      filtration through rock, and is of a bright yellow colour. A&#13;
      shoot of gold which is darker and denser than the rest is called&#13;
      adamant. Another kind is called copper, which is harder and yet&#13;
      lighter because the interstices are larger than in gold. There is&#13;
      mingled with it a fine and small portion of earth which comes out&#13;
      in the form of rust. These are a few of the conjectures which&#13;
      philosophy forms, when, leaving the eternal nature, she turns for&#13;
      innocent recreation to consider the truths of generation.</p><p>Water which is mingled with fire is called liquid because it&#13;
      rolls upon the earth, and soft because its bases give way. This&#13;
      becomes more equable when separated from fire and air, and then&#13;
      congeals into hail or ice, or the looser forms of hoar frost or&#13;
      snow. There are other waters which are called juices and are&#13;
      distilled through plants. Of these we may mention, first, wine,&#13;
      which warms the soul as well as the body; secondly, oily&#13;
      substances, as for example, oil or pitch; thirdly, honey, which&#13;
      relaxes the contracted parts of the mouth and so produces&#13;
      sweetness; fourthly, vegetable acid, which is frothy and has a&#13;
      burning quality and dissolves the flesh. Of the kinds of earth,&#13;
      that which is filtered through water passes into stone; the water&#13;
      is broken up by the earth and escapes in the form of air—this in&#13;
      turn presses upon the mass of earth, and the earth, compressed&#13;
      into an indissoluble union with the remaining water, becomes&#13;
      rock. Rock, when it is made up of equal particles, is fair and&#13;
      transparent, but the reverse when of unequal. Earth is converted&#13;
      into pottery when the watery part is suddenly drawn away; or if&#13;
      moisture remains, the earth, when fused by fire, becomes, on&#13;
      cooling, a stone of a black colour. When the earth is finer and&#13;
      of a briny nature then two half-solid bodies are formed by&#13;
      separating the water,—soda and salt. The strong compounds of&#13;
      earth and water are not soluble by water, but only by fire. Earth&#13;
      itself, when not consolidated, is dissolved by water; when&#13;
      consolidated, by fire only. The cohesion of water, when strong,&#13;
      is dissolved by fire only; when weak, either by air or fire, the&#13;
      former entering the interstices, the latter penetrating even the&#13;
      triangles. Air when strongly condensed is indissoluble by any&#13;
      power which does not reach the triangles, and even when not&#13;
      strongly condensed is only resolved by fire. Compounds of earth&#13;
      and water are unaffected by water while the water occupies the&#13;
      interstices in them, but begin to liquefy when fire enters into&#13;
      the interstices of the water. They are of two kinds, some of&#13;
      them, like glass, having more earth, others, like wax, having&#13;
      more water in them.</p><p>Having considered objects of sense, we now pass on to sensation.&#13;
      But we cannot explain sensation without explaining the nature of&#13;
      flesh and of the mortal soul; and as we cannot treat of both&#13;
      together, in order that we may proceed at once to the sensations&#13;
      we must assume the existence of body and soul.</p><p>What makes fire burn? The fineness of the sides, the sharpness of&#13;
      the angles, the smallness of the particles, the quickness of the&#13;
      motion. Moreover, the pyramid, which is the figure of fire, is&#13;
      more cutting than any other. The feeling of cold is produced by&#13;
      the larger particles of moisture outside the body trying to eject&#13;
      the smaller ones in the body which they compress. The struggle&#13;
      which arises between elements thus unnaturally brought together&#13;
      causes shivering. That is hard to which the flesh yields, and&#13;
      soft which yields to the flesh, and these two terms are also&#13;
      relative to one another. The yielding matter is that which has&#13;
      the slenderest base, whereas that which has a rectangular base is&#13;
      compact and repellent. Light and heavy are wrongly explained with&#13;
      reference to a lower and higher in place. For in the universe,&#13;
      which is a sphere, there is no opposition of above or below, and&#13;
      that which is to us above would be below to a man standing at the&#13;
      antipodes. The greater or less difficulty in detaching any&#13;
      element from its like is the real cause of heaviness or of&#13;
      lightness. If you draw the earth into the dissimilar air, the&#13;
      particles of earth cling to their native element, and you more&#13;
      easily detach a small portion than a large. There would be the&#13;
      same difficulty in moving any of the upper elements towards the&#13;
      lower. The smooth and the rough are severally produced by the&#13;
      union of evenness with compactness, and of hardness with&#13;
      inequality.</p><p>Pleasure and pain are the most important of the affections common&#13;
      to the whole body. According to our general doctrine of&#13;
      sensation, parts of the body which are easily moved readily&#13;
      transmit the motion to the mind; but parts which are not easily&#13;
      moved have no effect upon the patient. The bones and hair are of&#13;
      the latter kind, sight and hearing of the former. Ordinary&#13;
      affections are neither pleasant nor painful. The impressions of&#13;
      sight afford an example of these, and are neither violent nor&#13;
      sudden. But sudden replenishments of the body cause pleasure, and&#13;
      sudden disturbances, as for example cuttings and burnings, have&#13;
      the opposite effect.</p><p>&gt;From sensations common to the whole body, we proceed to those of&#13;
      particular parts. The affections of the tongue appear to be&#13;
      caused by contraction and dilation, but they have more of&#13;
      roughness or smoothness than is found in other affections. Earthy&#13;
      particles, entering into the small veins of the tongue which&#13;
      reach to the heart, when they melt into and dry up the little&#13;
      veins are astringent if they are rough; or if not so rough, they&#13;
      are only harsh, and if excessively abstergent, like potash and&#13;
      soda, bitter. Purgatives of a weaker sort are called salt and,&#13;
      having no bitterness, are rather agreeable. Inflammatory bodies,&#13;
      which by their lightness are carried up into the head, cutting&#13;
      all that comes in their way, are termed pungent. But when these&#13;
      are refined by putrefaction, and enter the narrow veins of the&#13;
      tongue, and meet there particles of earth and air, two kinds of&#13;
      globules are formed—one of earthy and impure liquid, which boils&#13;
      and ferments, the other of pure and transparent water, which are&#13;
      called bubbles; of all these affections the cause is termed acid.&#13;
      When, on the other hand, the composition of the deliquescent&#13;
      particles is congenial to the tongue, and disposes the parts&#13;
      according to their nature, this remedial power in them is called&#13;
      sweet.</p><p>Smells are not divided into kinds; all of them are transitional,&#13;
      and arise out of the decomposition of one element into another,&#13;
      for the simple air or water is without smell. They are vapours or&#13;
      mists, thinner than water and thicker than air: and hence in&#13;
      drawing in the breath, when there is an obstruction, the air&#13;
      passes, but there is no smell. They have no names, but are&#13;
      distinguished as pleasant and unpleasant, and their influence&#13;
      extends over the whole region from the head to the navel.</p><p>Hearing is the effect of a stroke which is transmitted through&#13;
      the ears by means of the air, brain, and blood to the soul,&#13;
      beginning at the head and extending to the liver. The sound which&#13;
      moves swiftly is acute; that which moves slowly is grave; that&#13;
      which is uniform is smooth, and the opposite is harsh. Loudness&#13;
      depends on the quantity of the sound. Of the harmony of sounds I&#13;
      will hereafter speak.</p><p>Colours are flames which emanate from all bodies, having&#13;
      particles corresponding to the sense of sight. Some of the&#13;
      particles are less and some larger, and some are equal to the&#13;
      parts of the sight. The equal particles appear transparent; the&#13;
      larger contract, and the lesser dilate the sight. White is&#13;
      produced by the dilation, black by the contraction, of the&#13;
      particles of sight. There is also a swifter motion of another&#13;
      sort of fire which forces a way through the passages of the eyes,&#13;
      and elicits from them a union of fire and water which we call&#13;
      tears. The inner fire flashes forth, and the outer finds a way in&#13;
      and is extinguished in the moisture, and all sorts of colours are&#13;
      generated by the mixture. This affection is termed by us&#13;
      dazzling, and the object which produces it is called bright.&#13;
      There is yet another sort of fire which mingles with the moisture&#13;
      of the eye without flashing, and produces a colour like blood—to&#13;
      this we give the name of red. A bright element mingling with red&#13;
      and white produces a colour which we call auburn. The law of&#13;
      proportion, however, according to which compound colours are&#13;
      formed, cannot be determined scientifically or even probably.&#13;
      Red, when mingled with black and white, gives a purple hue, which&#13;
      becomes umber when the colours are burnt and there is a larger&#13;
      admixture of black. Flame-colour is a mixture of auburn and dun;&#13;
      dun of white and black; yellow of white and auburn. White and&#13;
      bright meeting, and falling upon a full black, become dark blue;&#13;
      dark blue mingling with white becomes a light blue; the union of&#13;
      flame-colour and black makes leek-green. There is no difficulty&#13;
      in seeing how other colours are probably composed. But he who&#13;
      should attempt to test the truth of this by experiment, would&#13;
      forget the difference of the human and divine nature. God only is&#13;
      able to compound and resolve substances; such experiments are&#13;
      impossible to man.</p><p>These are the elements of necessity which the Creator received in&#13;
      the world of generation when he made the all-sufficient and&#13;
      perfect creature, using the secondary causes as his ministers,&#13;
      but himself fashioning the good in all things. For there are two&#13;
      sorts of causes, the one divine, the other necessary; and we&#13;
      should seek to discover the divine above all, and, for their&#13;
      sake, the necessary, because without them the higher cannot be&#13;
      attained by us.</p><p>Having now before us the causes out of which the rest of our&#13;
      discourse is to be framed, let us go back to the point at which&#13;
      we began, and add a fair ending to our tale. As I said at first,&#13;
      all things were originally a chaos in which there was no order or&#13;
      proportion. The elements of this chaos were arranged by the&#13;
      Creator, and out of them he made the world. Of the divine he&#13;
      himself was the author, but he committed to his offspring the&#13;
      creation of the mortal. From him they received the immortal soul,&#13;
      but themselves made the body to be its vehicle, and constructed&#13;
      within another soul which was mortal, and subject to terrible&#13;
      affections—pleasure, the inciter of evil; pain, which deters from&#13;
      good; rashness and fear, foolish counsellors; anger hard to be&#13;
      appeased; hope easily led astray. These they mingled with&#13;
      irrational sense and all-daring love according to necessary laws&#13;
      and so framed man. And, fearing to pollute the divine element,&#13;
      they gave the mortal soul a separate habitation in the breast,&#13;
      parted off from the head by a narrow isthmus. And as in a house&#13;
      the women’s apartments are divided from the men’s, the cavity of&#13;
      the thorax was divided into two parts, a higher and a lower. The&#13;
      higher of the two, which is the seat of courage and anger, lies&#13;
      nearer to the head, between the midriff and the neck, and assists&#13;
      reason in restraining the desires. The heart is the house of&#13;
      guard in which all the veins meet, and through them reason sends&#13;
      her commands to the extremity of her kingdom. When the passions&#13;
      are in revolt, or danger approaches from without, then the heart&#13;
      beats and swells; and the creating powers, knowing this,&#13;
      implanted in the body the soft and bloodless substance of the&#13;
      lung, having a porous and springy nature like a sponge, and being&#13;
      kept cool by drink and air which enters through the trachea.</p><p>The part of the soul which desires meat and drink was placed&#13;
      between the midriff and navel, where they made a sort of manger;&#13;
      and here they bound it down, like a wild animal, away from the&#13;
      council-chamber, and leaving the better principle undisturbed to&#13;
      advise quietly for the good of the whole. For the Creator knew&#13;
      that the belly would not listen to reason, and was under the&#13;
      power of idols and fancies. Wherefore he framed the liver to&#13;
      connect with the lower nature, contriving that it should be&#13;
      compact, and bright, and sweet, and also bitter and smooth, in&#13;
      order that the power of thought which originates in the mind&#13;
      might there be reflected, terrifying the belly with the elements&#13;
      of bitterness and gall, and a suffusion of bilious colours when&#13;
      the liver is contracted, and causing pain and misery by twisting&#13;
      out of its place the lobe and closing up the vessels and gates.&#13;
      And the converse happens when some gentle inspiration coming from&#13;
      intelligence mirrors the opposite fancies, giving rest and&#13;
      sweetness and freedom, and at night, moderation and peace&#13;
      accompanied with prophetic insight, when reason and sense are&#13;
      asleep. For the authors of our being, in obedience to their&#13;
      Father’s will and in order to make men as good as they could,&#13;
      gave to the liver the power of divination, which is never active&#13;
      when men are awake or in health; but when they are under the&#13;
      influence of some disorder or enthusiasm then they receive&#13;
      intimations, which have to be interpreted by others who are&#13;
      called prophets, but should rather be called interpreters of&#13;
      prophecy; after death these intimations become unintelligible.&#13;
      The spleen which is situated in the neighbourhood, on the left&#13;
      side, keeps the liver bright and clean, as a napkin does a&#13;
      mirror, and the evacuations of the liver are received into it;&#13;
      and being a hollow tissue it is for a time swollen with these&#13;
      impurities, but when the body is purged it returns to its natural&#13;
      size.</p><p>The truth concerning the soul can only be established by the word&#13;
      of God. Still, we may venture to assert what is probable both&#13;
      concerning soul and body.</p><p>The creative powers were aware of our tendency to excess. And so&#13;
      when they made the belly to be a receptacle for food, in order&#13;
      that men might not perish by insatiable gluttony, they formed the&#13;
      convolutions of the intestines, in this way retarding the passage&#13;
      of food through the body, lest mankind should be absorbed in&#13;
      eating and drinking, and the whole race become impervious to&#13;
      divine philosophy.</p><p>The creation of bones and flesh was on this wise. The foundation&#13;
      of these is the marrow which binds together body and soul, and&#13;
      the marrow is made out of such of the primary triangles as are&#13;
      adapted by their perfection to produce all the four elements.&#13;
      These God took and mingled them in due proportion, making as many&#13;
      kinds of marrow as there were hereafter to be kinds of souls. The&#13;
      receptacle of the divine soul he made round, and called that&#13;
      portion of the marrow brain, intending that the vessel containing&#13;
      this substance should be the head. The remaining part he divided&#13;
      into long and round figures, and to these as to anchors,&#13;
      fastening the mortal soul, he proceeded to make the rest of the&#13;
      body, first forming for both parts a covering of bone. The bone&#13;
      was formed by sifting pure smooth earth and wetting it with&#13;
      marrow. It was then thrust alternately into fire and water, and&#13;
      thus rendered insoluble by either. Of bone he made a globe which&#13;
      he placed around the brain, leaving a narrow opening, and around&#13;
      the marrow of the neck and spine he formed the vertebrae, like&#13;
      hinges, which extended from the head through the whole of the&#13;
      trunk. And as the bone was brittle and liable to mortify and&#13;
      destroy the marrow by too great rigidity and susceptibility to&#13;
      heat and cold, he contrived sinews and flesh—the first to give&#13;
      flexibility, the second to guard against heat and cold, and to be&#13;
      a protection against falls, containing a warm moisture, which in&#13;
      summer exudes and cools the body, and in winter is a defence&#13;
      against cold. Having this in view, the Creator mingled earth with&#13;
      fire and water and mixed with them a ferment of acid and salt, so&#13;
      as to form pulpy flesh. But the sinews he made of a mixture of&#13;
      bone and unfermented flesh, giving them a mean nature between the&#13;
      two, and a yellow colour. Hence they were more glutinous than&#13;
      flesh, but softer than bone. The bones which have most of the&#13;
      living soul within them he covered with the thinnest film of&#13;
      flesh, those which have least of it, he lodged deeper. At the&#13;
      joints he diminished the flesh in order not to impede the flexure&#13;
      of the limbs, and also to avoid clogging the perceptions of the&#13;
      mind. About the thighs and arms, which have no sense because&#13;
      there is little soul in the marrow, and about the inner bones, he&#13;
      laid the flesh thicker. For where the flesh is thicker there is&#13;
      less feeling, except in certain parts which the Creator has made&#13;
      solely of flesh, as for example, the tongue. Had the combination&#13;
      of solid bone and thick flesh been consistent with acute&#13;
      perceptions, the Creator would have given man a sinewy and fleshy&#13;
      head, and then he would have lived twice as long. But our&#13;
      creators were of opinion that a shorter life which was better was&#13;
      preferable to a longer which was worse, and therefore they&#13;
      covered the head with thin bone, and placed the sinews at the&#13;
      extremity of the head round the neck, and fastened the jawbones&#13;
      to them below the face. And they framed the mouth, having teeth&#13;
      and tongue and lips, with a view to the necessary and the good;&#13;
      for food is a necessity, and the river of speech is the best of&#13;
      rivers. Still, the head could not be left a bare globe of bone on&#13;
      account of the extremes of heat and cold, nor be allowed to&#13;
      become dull and senseless by an overgrowth of flesh. Wherefore it&#13;
      was covered by a peel or skin which met and grew by the help of&#13;
      the cerebral humour. The diversity of the sutures was caused by&#13;
      the struggle of the food against the courses of the soul. The&#13;
      skin of the head was pierced by fire, and out of the punctures&#13;
      came forth a moisture, part liquid, and part of a skinny nature,&#13;
      which was hardened by the pressure of the external cold and&#13;
      became hair. And God gave hair to the head of man to be a light&#13;
      covering, so that it might not interfere with his perceptions.&#13;
      Nails were formed by combining sinew, skin, and bone, and were&#13;
      made by the creators with a view to the future when, as they&#13;
      knew, women and other animals who would require them would be&#13;
      framed out of man.</p><p>The gods also mingled natures akin to that of man with other&#13;
      forms and perceptions. Thus trees and plants were created, which&#13;
      were originally wild and have been adapted by cultivation to our&#13;
      use. They partake of that third kind of life which is seated&#13;
      between the midriff and the navel, and is altogether passive and&#13;
      incapable of reflection.</p><p>When the creators had furnished all these natures for our&#13;
      sustenance, they cut channels through our bodies as in a garden,&#13;
      watering them with a perennial stream. Two were cut down the&#13;
      back, along the back bone, where the skin and flesh meet, one on&#13;
      the right and the other on the left, having the marrow of&#13;
      generation between them. In the next place, they divided the&#13;
      veins about the head and interlaced them with each other in order&#13;
      that they might form an additional link between the head and the&#13;
      body, and that the sensations from both sides might be diffused&#13;
      throughout the body. In the third place, they contrived the&#13;
      passage of liquids, which may be explained in this way:—Finer&#13;
      bodies retain coarser, but not the coarser the finer, and the&#13;
      belly is capable of retaining food, but not fire and air. God&#13;
      therefore formed a network of fire and air to irrigate the veins,&#13;
      having within it two lesser nets, and stretched cords reaching&#13;
      from both the lesser nets to the extremity of the outer net. The&#13;
      inner parts of the net were made by him of fire, the lesser nets&#13;
      and their cavities of air. The two latter he made to pass into&#13;
      the mouth; the one ascending by the air-pipes from the lungs, the&#13;
      other by the side of the air-pipes from the belly. The entrance&#13;
      to the first he divided into two parts, both of which he made to&#13;
      meet at the channels of the nose, that when the mouth was closed&#13;
      the passage connected with it might still be fed with air. The&#13;
      cavity of the network he spread around the hollows of the body,&#13;
      making the entire receptacle to flow into and out of the lesser&#13;
      nets and the lesser nets into and out of it, while the outer net&#13;
      found a way into and out of the pores of the body, and the&#13;
      internal heat followed the air to and fro. These, as we affirm,&#13;
      are the phenomena of respiration. And all this process takes&#13;
      place in order that the body may be watered and cooled and&#13;
      nourished, and the meat and drink digested and liquefied and&#13;
      carried into the veins.</p><p>The causes of respiration have now to be considered. The&#13;
      exhalation of the breath through the mouth and nostrils displaces&#13;
      the external air, and at the same time leaves a vacuum into which&#13;
      through the pores the air which is displaced enters. Also the&#13;
      vacuum which is made when the air is exhaled through the pores is&#13;
      filled up by the inhalation of breath through the mouth and&#13;
      nostrils. The explanation of this double phenomenon is as&#13;
      follows:—Elements move towards their natural places. Now as every&#13;
      animal has within him a fountain of fire, the air which is&#13;
      inhaled through the mouth and nostrils, on coming into contact&#13;
      with this, is heated; and when heated, in accordance with the law&#13;
      of attraction, it escapes by the way it entered toward the place&#13;
      of fire. On leaving the body it is cooled and drives round the&#13;
      air which it displaces through the pores into the empty lungs.&#13;
      This again is in turn heated by the internal fire and escapes, as&#13;
      it entered, through the pores.</p><p>The phenomena of medical cupping-glasses, of swallowing, and of&#13;
      the hurling of bodies, are to be explained on a similar&#13;
      principle; as also sounds, which are sometimes discordant on&#13;
      account of the inequality of them, and again harmonious by reason&#13;
      of equality. The slower sounds reaching the swifter, when they&#13;
      begin to pause, by degrees assimilate with them: whence arises a&#13;
      pleasure which even the unwise feel, and which to the wise&#13;
      becomes a higher sense of delight, being an imitation of divine&#13;
      harmony in mortal motions. Streams flow, lightnings play, amber&#13;
      and the magnet attract, not by reason of attraction, but because&#13;
      ‘nature abhors a vacuum,’ and because things, when compounded or&#13;
      dissolved, move different ways, each to its own place.</p><p>I will now return to the phenomena of respiration. The fire,&#13;
      entering the belly, minces the food, and as it escapes, fills the&#13;
      veins by drawing after it the divided portions, and thus the&#13;
      streams of nutriment are diffused through the body. The fruits or&#13;
      herbs which are our daily sustenance take all sorts of colours&#13;
      when intermixed, but the colour of red or fire predominates, and&#13;
      hence the liquid which we call blood is red, being the nurturing&#13;
      principle of the body, whence all parts are watered and empty&#13;
      places filled.</p><p>The process of repletion and depletion is produced by the&#13;
      attraction of like to like, after the manner of the universal&#13;
      motion. The external elements by their attraction are always&#13;
      diminishing the substance of the body: the particles of blood,&#13;
      too, formed out of the newly digested food, are attracted towards&#13;
      kindred elements within the body and so fill up the void. When&#13;
      more is taken away than flows in, then we decay; and when less,&#13;
      we grow and increase.</p><p>The young of every animal has the triangles new and closely&#13;
      locked together, and yet the entire frame is soft and delicate,&#13;
      being newly made of marrow and nurtured on milk. These triangles&#13;
      are sharper than those which enter the body from without in the&#13;
      shape of food, and therefore they cut them up. But as life&#13;
      advances, the triangles wear out and are no longer able to&#13;
      assimilate food; and at length, when the bonds which unite the&#13;
      triangles of the marrow become undone, they in turn unloose the&#13;
      bonds of the soul; and if the release be according to nature, she&#13;
      then flies away with joy. For the death which is natural is&#13;
      pleasant, but that which is caused by violence is painful.</p><p>Every one may understand the origin of diseases. They may be&#13;
      occasioned by the disarrangement or disproportion of the elements&#13;
      out of which the body is framed. This is the origin of many of&#13;
      them, but the worst of all owe their severity to the following&#13;
      causes: There is a natural order in the human frame according to&#13;
      which the flesh and sinews are made of blood, the sinews out of&#13;
      the fibres, and the flesh out of the congealed substance which is&#13;
      formed by separation from the fibres. The glutinous matter which&#13;
      comes away from the sinews and the flesh, not only binds the&#13;
      flesh to the bones, but nourishes the bones and waters the&#13;
      marrow. When these processes take place in regular order the body&#13;
      is in health.</p><p>But when the flesh wastes and returns into the veins there is&#13;
      discoloured blood as well as air in the veins, having acid and&#13;
      salt qualities, from which is generated every sort of phlegm and&#13;
      bile. All things go the wrong way and cease to give nourishment&#13;
      to the body, no longer preserving their natural courses, but at&#13;
      war with themselves and destructive to the constitution of the&#13;
      body. The oldest part of the flesh which is hard to decompose&#13;
      blackens from long burning, and from being corroded grows bitter,&#13;
      and as the bitter element refines away, becomes acid. When tinged&#13;
      with blood the bitter substance has a red colour, and this when&#13;
      mixed with black takes the hue of grass; or again, the bitter&#13;
      substance has an auburn colour, when new flesh is decomposed by&#13;
      the internal flame. To all which phenomena some physician or&#13;
      philosopher who was able to see the one in many has given the&#13;
      name of bile. The various kinds of bile have names answering to&#13;
      their colours. Lymph or serum is of two kinds: first, the whey of&#13;
      blood, which is gentle; secondly, the secretion of dark and&#13;
      bitter bile, which, when mingled under the influence of heat with&#13;
      salt, is malignant and is called acid phlegm. There is also white&#13;
      phlegm, formed by the decomposition of young and tender flesh,&#13;
      and covered with little bubbles, separately invisible, but&#13;
      becoming visible when collected. The water of tears and&#13;
      perspiration and similar substances is also the watery part of&#13;
      fresh phlegm. All these humours become sources of disease when&#13;
      the blood is replenished in irregular ways and not by food or&#13;
      drink. The danger, however, is not so great when the foundation&#13;
      remains, for then there is a possibility of recovery. But when&#13;
      the substance which unites the flesh and bones is diseased, and&#13;
      is no longer renewed from the muscles and sinews, and instead of&#13;
      being oily and smooth and glutinous becomes rough and salt and&#13;
      dry, then the fleshy parts fall away and leave the sinews bare&#13;
      and full of brine, and the flesh gets back again into the&#13;
      circulation of the blood, and makes the previously mentioned&#13;
      disorders still greater. There are other and worse diseases which&#13;
      are prior to these; as when the bone through the density of the&#13;
      flesh does not receive sufficient air, and becomes stagnant and&#13;
      gangrened, and crumbling away passes into the food, and the food&#13;
      into the flesh, and the flesh returns again into the blood. Worst&#13;
      of all and most fatal is the disease of the marrow, by which the&#13;
      whole course of the body is reversed. There is a third class of&#13;
      diseases which are produced, some by wind and some by phlegm and&#13;
      some by bile. When the lung, which is the steward of the air, is&#13;
      obstructed, by rheums, and in one part no air, and in another too&#13;
      much, enters in, then the parts which are unrefreshed by air&#13;
      corrode, and other parts are distorted by the excess of air; and&#13;
      in this manner painful diseases are produced. The most painful&#13;
      are caused by wind generated within the body, which gets about&#13;
      the great sinews of the shoulders—these are termed tetanus. The&#13;
      cure of them is difficult, and in most cases they are relieved&#13;
      only by fever. White phlegm, which is dangerous if kept in, by&#13;
      reason of the air bubbles, is not equally dangerous if able to&#13;
      escape through the pores, although it variegates the body,&#13;
      generating diverse kinds of leprosies. If, when mingled with&#13;
      black bile, it disturbs the courses of the head in sleep, there&#13;
      is not so much danger; but if it assails those who are awake,&#13;
      then the attack is far more dangerous, and is called epilepsy or&#13;
      the sacred disease. Acid and salt phlegm is the source of&#13;
      catarrh.</p><p>Inflammations originate in bile, which is sometimes relieved by&#13;
      boils and swellings, but when detained, and above all when&#13;
      mingled with pure blood, generates many inflammatory disorders,&#13;
      disturbing the position of the fibres which are scattered about&#13;
      in the blood in order to maintain the balance of rare and dense&#13;
      which is necessary to its regular circulation. If the bile, which&#13;
      is only stale blood, or liquefied flesh, comes in little by&#13;
      little, it is congealed by the fibres and produces internal cold&#13;
      and shuddering. But when it enters with more of a flood it&#13;
      overcomes the fibres by its heat and reaches the spinal marrow,&#13;
      and burning up the cables of the soul sets her free from the&#13;
      body. When on the other hand the body, though wasted, still holds&#13;
      out, then the bile is expelled, like an exile from a factious&#13;
      state, causing associating diarrhoeas and dysenteries and similar&#13;
      disorders. The body which is diseased from the effects of fire is&#13;
      in a continual fever; when air is the agent, the fever is&#13;
      quotidian; when water, the fever intermits a day; when earth,&#13;
      which is the most sluggish element, the fever intermits three&#13;
      days and is with difficulty shaken off.</p><p>Of mental disorders there are two sorts, one madness, the other&#13;
      ignorance, and they may be justly attributed to disease.&#13;
      Excessive pleasures or pains are among the greatest diseases, and&#13;
      deprive men of their senses. When the seed about the spinal&#13;
      marrow is too abundant, the body has too great pleasures and&#13;
      pains; and during a great part of his life he who is the subject&#13;
      of them is more or less mad. He is often thought bad, but this is&#13;
      a mistake; for the truth is that the intemperance of lust is due&#13;
      to the fluidity of the marrow produced by the loose consistency&#13;
      of the bones. And this is true of vice in general, which is&#13;
      commonly regarded as disgraceful, whereas it is really&#13;
      involuntary and arises from a bad habit of the body and evil&#13;
      education. In like manner the soul is often made vicious by the&#13;
      influence of bodily pain; the briny phlegm and other bitter and&#13;
      bilious humours wander over the body and find no exit, but are&#13;
      compressed within, and mingle their own vapours with the motions&#13;
      of the soul, and are carried to the three places of the soul,&#13;
      creating infinite varieties of trouble and melancholy, of&#13;
      rashness and cowardice, of forgetfulness and stupidity. When men&#13;
      are in this evil plight of body, and evil forms of government and&#13;
      evil discourses are superadded, and there is no education to save&#13;
      them, they are corrupted through two causes; but of neither of&#13;
      them are they really the authors. For the planters are to blame&#13;
      rather than the plants, the educators and not the educated.&#13;
      Still, we should endeavour to attain virtue and avoid vice; but&#13;
      this is part of another subject.</p><p>Enough of disease—I have now to speak of the means by which the&#13;
      mind and body are to be preserved, a higher theme than the other.&#13;
      The good is the beautiful, and the beautiful is the symmetrical,&#13;
      and there is no greater or fairer symmetry than that of body and&#13;
      soul, as the contrary is the greatest of deformities. A leg or an&#13;
      arm too long or too short is at once ugly and unserviceable, and&#13;
      the same is true if body and soul are disproportionate. For a&#13;
      strong and impassioned soul may ‘fret the pigmy body to decay,’&#13;
      and so produce convulsions and other evils. The violence of&#13;
      controversy, or the earnestness of enquiry, will often generate&#13;
      inflammations and rheums which are not understood, or assigned to&#13;
      their true cause by the professors of medicine. And in like&#13;
      manner the body may be too much for the soul, darkening the&#13;
      reason, and quickening the animal desires. The only security is&#13;
      to preserve the balance of the two, and to this end the&#13;
      mathematician or philosopher must practise gymnastics, and the&#13;
      gymnast must cultivate music. The parts of the body too must be&#13;
      treated in the same way—they should receive their appropriate&#13;
      exercise. For the body is set in motion when it is heated and&#13;
      cooled by the elements which enter in, or is dried up and&#13;
      moistened by external things; and, if given up to these processes&#13;
      when at rest, it is liable to destruction. But the natural&#13;
      motion, as in the world, so also in the human frame, produces&#13;
      harmony and divides hostile powers. The best exercise is the&#13;
      spontaneous motion of the body, as in gymnastics, because most&#13;
      akin to the motion of mind; not so good is the motion of which&#13;
      the source is in another, as in sailing or riding; least good&#13;
      when the body is at rest and the motion is in parts only, which&#13;
      is a species of motion imparted by physic. This should only be&#13;
      resorted to by men of sense in extreme cases; lesser diseases are&#13;
      not to be irritated by medicine. For every disease is akin to the&#13;
      living being and has an appointed term, just as life has, which&#13;
      depends on the form of the triangles, and cannot be protracted&#13;
      when they are worn out. And he who, instead of accepting his&#13;
      destiny, endeavours to prolong his life by medicine, is likely to&#13;
      multiply and magnify his diseases. Regimen and not medicine is&#13;
      the true cure, when a man has time at his disposal.</p><p>Enough of the nature of man and of the body, and of training and&#13;
      education. The subject is a great one and cannot be adequately&#13;
      treated as an appendage to another. To sum up all in a word:&#13;
      there are three kinds of soul located within us, and any one of&#13;
      them, if remaining inactive, becomes very weak; if exercised,&#13;
      very strong. Wherefore we should duly train and exercise all&#13;
      three kinds.</p><p>The divine soul God lodged in the head, to raise us, like plants&#13;
      which are not of earthly origin, to our kindred; for the head is&#13;
      nearest to heaven. He who is intent upon the gratification of his&#13;
      desires and cherishes the mortal soul, has all his ideas mortal,&#13;
      and is himself mortal in the truest sense. But he who seeks after&#13;
      knowledge and exercises the divine part of himself in godly and&#13;
      immortal thoughts, attains to truth and immortality, as far as is&#13;
      possible to man, and also to happiness, while he is training up&#13;
      within him the divine principle and indwelling power of order.&#13;
      There is only one way in which one person can benefit another;&#13;
      and that is by assigning to him his proper nurture and motion. To&#13;
      the motions of the soul answer the motions of the universe, and&#13;
      by the study of these the individual is restored to his original&#13;
      nature.</p><p>Thus we have finished the discussion of the universe, which,&#13;
      according to our original intention, has now been brought down to&#13;
      the creation of man. Completeness seems to require that something&#13;
      should be briefly said about other animals: first of women, who&#13;
      are probably degenerate and cowardly men. And when they&#13;
      degenerated, the gods implanted in men the desire of union with&#13;
      them, creating in man one animate substance and in woman another&#13;
      in the following manner:—The outlet for liquids they connected&#13;
      with the living principle of the spinal marrow, which the man has&#13;
      the desire to emit into the fruitful womb of the woman; this is&#13;
      like a fertile field in which the seed is quickened and matured,&#13;
      and at last brought to light. When this desire is unsatisfied the&#13;
      man is over-mastered by the power of the generative organs, and&#13;
      the woman is subjected to disorders from the obstruction of the&#13;
      passages of the breath, until the two meet and pluck the fruit of&#13;
      the tree.</p><p>The race of birds was created out of innocent, light-minded men,&#13;
      who thought to pursue the study of the heavens by sight; these&#13;
      were transformed into birds, and grew feathers instead of hair.&#13;
      The race of wild animals were men who had no philosophy, and&#13;
      never looked up to heaven or used the courses of the head, but&#13;
      followed only the influences of passion. Naturally they turned to&#13;
      their kindred earth, and put their forelegs to the ground, and&#13;
      their heads were crushed into strange oblong forms. Some of them&#13;
      have four feet, and some of them more than four,—the latter, who&#13;
      are the more senseless, drawing closer to their native element;&#13;
      the most senseless of all have no limbs and trail their whole&#13;
      body on the ground. The fourth kind are the inhabitants of the&#13;
      waters; these are made out of the most senseless and ignorant and&#13;
      impure of men, whom God placed in the uttermost parts of the&#13;
      world in return for their utter ignorance, and caused them to&#13;
      respire water instead of the pure element of air. Such are the&#13;
      laws by which animals pass into one another.</p><p>And so the world received animals, mortal and immortal, and was&#13;
      fulfilled with them, and became a visible God, comprehending the&#13;
      visible, made in the image of the Intellectual, being the one&#13;
      perfect only-begotten heaven.</p><p>Section 2.</p><p>Nature in the aspect which she presented to a Greek philosopher&#13;
      of the fourth century before Christ is not easily reproduced to&#13;
      modern eyes. The associations of mythology and poetry have to be&#13;
      added, and the unconscious influence of science has to be&#13;
      subtracted, before we can behold the heavens or the earth as they&#13;
      appeared to the Greek. The philosopher himself was a child and&#13;
      also a man—a child in the range of his attainments, but also a&#13;
      great intelligence having an insight into nature, and often&#13;
      anticipations of the truth. He was full of original thoughts, and&#13;
      yet liable to be imposed upon by the most obvious fallacies. He&#13;
      occasionally confused numbers with ideas, and atoms with numbers;&#13;
      his a priori notions were out of all proportion to his&#13;
      experience. He was ready to explain the phenomena of the heavens&#13;
      by the most trivial analogies of earth. The experiments which&#13;
      nature worked for him he sometimes accepted, but he never tried&#13;
      experiments for himself which would either prove or disprove his&#13;
      theories. His knowledge was unequal; while in some branches, such&#13;
      as medicine and astronomy, he had made considerable proficiency,&#13;
      there were others, such as chemistry, electricity, mechanics, of&#13;
      which the very names were unknown to him. He was the natural&#13;
      enemy of mythology, and yet mythological ideas still retained&#13;
      their hold over him. He was endeavouring to form a conception of&#13;
      principles, but these principles or ideas were regarded by him as&#13;
      real powers or entities, to which the world had been subjected.&#13;
      He was always tending to argue from what was near to what was&#13;
      remote, from what was known to what was unknown, from man to the&#13;
      universe, and back again from the universe to man. While he was&#13;
      arranging the world, he was arranging the forms of thought in his&#13;
      own mind; and the light from within and the light from without&#13;
      often crossed and helped to confuse one another. He might be&#13;
      compared to a builder engaged in some great design, who could&#13;
      only dig with his hands because he was unprovided with common&#13;
      tools; or to some poet or musician, like Tynnichus (Ion), obliged&#13;
      to accommodate his lyric raptures to the limits of the tetrachord&#13;
      or of the flute.</p><p>The Hesiodic and Orphic cosmogonies were a phase of thought&#13;
      intermediate between mythology and philosophy and had a great&#13;
      influence on the beginnings of knowledge. There was nothing&#13;
      behind them; they were to physical science what the poems of&#13;
      Homer were to early Greek history. They made men think of the&#13;
      world as a whole; they carried the mind back into the infinity of&#13;
      past time; they suggested the first observation of the effects of&#13;
      fire and water on the earth’s surface. To the ancient physics&#13;
      they stood much in the same relation which geology does to modern&#13;
      science. But the Greek was not, like the enquirer of the last&#13;
      generation, confined to a period of six thousand years; he was&#13;
      able to speculate freely on the effects of infinite ages in the&#13;
      production of physical phenomena. He could imagine cities which&#13;
      had existed time out of mind (States.; Laws), laws or forms of&#13;
      art and music which had lasted, ‘not in word only, but in very&#13;
      truth, for ten thousand years’ (Laws); he was aware that natural&#13;
      phenomena like the Delta of the Nile might have slowly&#13;
      accumulated in long periods of time (Hdt.). But he seems to have&#13;
      supposed that the course of events was recurring rather than&#13;
      progressive. To this he was probably led by the fixedness of&#13;
      Egyptian customs and the general observation that there were&#13;
      other civilisations in the world more ancient than that of&#13;
      Hellas.</p><p>The ancient philosophers found in mythology many ideas which, if&#13;
      not originally derived from nature, were easily transferred to&#13;
      her—such, for example, as love or hate, corresponding to&#13;
      attraction or repulsion; or the conception of necessity allied&#13;
      both to the regularity and irregularity of nature; or of chance,&#13;
      the nameless or unknown cause; or of justice, symbolizing the law&#13;
      of compensation; are of the Fates and Furies, typifying the fixed&#13;
      order or the extraordinary convulsions of nature. Their own&#13;
      interpretations of Homer and the poets were supposed by them to&#13;
      be the original meaning. Musing in themselves on the phenomena of&#13;
      nature, they were relieved at being able to utter the thoughts of&#13;
      their hearts in figures of speech which to them were not figures,&#13;
      and were already consecrated by tradition. Hesiod and the Orphic&#13;
      poets moved in a region of half-personification in which the&#13;
      meaning or principle appeared through the person. In their vaster&#13;
      conceptions of Chaos, Erebus, Aether, Night, and the like, the&#13;
      first rude attempts at generalization are dimly seen. The Gods&#13;
      themselves, especially the greater Gods, such as Zeus, Poseidon,&#13;
      Apollo, Athene, are universals as well as individuals. They were&#13;
      gradually becoming lost in a common conception of mind or God.&#13;
      They continued to exist for the purposes of ritual or of art; but&#13;
      from the sixth century onwards or even earlier there arose and&#13;
      gained strength in the minds of men the notion of ‘one God,&#13;
      greatest among Gods and men, who was all sight, all hearing, all&#13;
      knowing’ (Xenophanes).</p><p>Under the influence of such ideas, perhaps also deriving from the&#13;
      traditions of their own or of other nations scraps of medicine&#13;
      and astronomy, men came to the observation of nature. The Greek&#13;
      philosopher looked at the blue circle of the heavens and it&#13;
      flashed upon him that all things were one; the tumult of sense&#13;
      abated, and the mind found repose in the thought which former&#13;
      generations had been striving to realize. The first expression of&#13;
      this was some element, rarefied by degrees into a pure&#13;
      abstraction, and purged from any tincture of sense. Soon an inner&#13;
      world of ideas began to be unfolded, more absorbing, more&#13;
      overpowering, more abiding than the brightest of visible objects,&#13;
      which to the eye of the philosopher looking inward, seemed to&#13;
      pale before them, retaining only a faint and precarious&#13;
      existence. At the same time, the minds of men parted into the two&#13;
      great divisions of those who saw only a principle of motion, and&#13;
      of those who saw only a principle of rest, in nature and in&#13;
      themselves; there were born Heracliteans or Eleatics, as there&#13;
      have been in later ages born Aristotelians or Platonists. Like&#13;
      some philosophers in modern times, who are accused of making a&#13;
      theory first and finding their facts afterwards, the advocates of&#13;
      either opinion never thought of applying either to themselves or&#13;
      to their adversaries the criterion of fact. They were mastered by&#13;
      their ideas and not masters of them. Like the Heraclitean&#13;
      fanatics whom Plato has ridiculed in the Theaetetus, they were&#13;
      incapable of giving a reason of the faith that was in them, and&#13;
      had all the animosities of a religious sect. Yet, doubtless,&#13;
      there was some first impression derived from external nature,&#13;
      which, as in mythology, so also in philosophy, worked upon the&#13;
      minds of the first thinkers. Though incapable of induction or&#13;
      generalization in the modern sense, they caught an inspiration&#13;
      from the external world. The most general facts or appearances of&#13;
      nature, the circle of the universe, the nutritive power of water,&#13;
      the air which is the breath of life, the destructive force of&#13;
      fire, the seeming regularity of the greater part of nature and&#13;
      the irregularity of a remnant, the recurrence of day and night&#13;
      and of the seasons, the solid earth and the impalpable aether,&#13;
      were always present to them.</p><p>The great source of error and also the beginning of truth to them&#13;
      was reasoning from analogy; they could see resemblances, but not&#13;
      differences; and they were incapable of distinguishing&#13;
      illustration from argument. Analogy in modern times only points&#13;
      the way, and is immediately verified by experiment. The dreams&#13;
      and visions, which pass through the philosopher’s mind, of&#13;
      resemblances between different classes of substances, or between&#13;
      the animal and vegetable world, are put into the refiner’s fire,&#13;
      and the dross and other elements which adhere to them are purged&#13;
      away. But the contemporary of Plato and Socrates was incapable of&#13;
      resisting the power of any analogy which occurred to him, and was&#13;
      drawn into any consequences which seemed to follow. He had no&#13;
      methods of difference or of concomitant variations, by the use of&#13;
      which he could distinguish the accidental from the essential. He&#13;
      could not isolate phenomena, and he was helpless against the&#13;
      influence of any word which had an equivocal or double sense.</p><p>Yet without this crude use of analogy the ancient physical&#13;
      philosopher would have stood still; he could not have made even&#13;
      ‘one guess among many’ without comparison. The course of natural&#13;
      phenomena would have passed unheeded before his eyes, like fair&#13;
      sights or musical sounds before the eyes and ears of an animal.&#13;
      Even the fetichism of the savage is the beginning of reasoning;&#13;
      the assumption of the most fanciful of causes indicates a higher&#13;
      mental state than the absence of all enquiry about them. The&#13;
      tendency to argue from the higher to the lower, from man to the&#13;
      world, has led to many errors, but has also had an elevating&#13;
      influence on philosophy. The conception of the world as a whole,&#13;
      a person, an animal, has been the source of hasty&#13;
      generalizations; yet this general grasp of nature led also to a&#13;
      spirit of comprehensiveness in early philosophy, which has not&#13;
      increased, but rather diminished, as the fields of knowledge have&#13;
      become more divided. The modern physicist confines himself to one&#13;
      or perhaps two branches of science. But he comparatively seldom&#13;
      rises above his own department, and often falls under the&#13;
      narrowing influence which any single branch, when pursued to the&#13;
      exclusion of every other, has over the mind. Language, two,&#13;
      exercised a spell over the beginnings of physical philosophy,&#13;
      leading to error and sometimes to truth; for many thoughts were&#13;
      suggested by the double meanings of words (Greek), and the&#13;
      accidental distinctions of words sometimes led the ancient&#13;
      philosopher to make corresponding differences in things (Greek).&#13;
      ‘If they are the same, why have they different names; or if they&#13;
      are different, why have they the same name?’—is an argument not&#13;
      easily answered in the infancy of knowledge. The modern&#13;
      philosopher has always been taught the lesson which he still&#13;
      imperfectly learns, that he must disengage himself from the&#13;
      influence of words. Nor are there wanting in Plato, who was&#13;
      himself too often the victim of them, impressive admonitions that&#13;
      we should regard not words but things (States.). But upon the&#13;
      whole, the ancients, though not entirely dominated by them, were&#13;
      much more subject to the influence of words than the moderns.&#13;
      They had no clear divisions of colours or substances; even the&#13;
      four elements were undefined; the fields of knowledge were not&#13;
      parted off. They were bringing order out of disorder, having a&#13;
      small grain of experience mingled in a confused heap of a priori&#13;
      notions. And yet, probably, their first impressions, the&#13;
      illusions and mirages of their fancy, created a greater&#13;
      intellectual activity and made a nearer approach to the truth&#13;
      than any patient investigation of isolated facts, for which the&#13;
      time had not yet come, could have accomplished.</p><p>There was one more illusion to which the ancient philosophers&#13;
      were subject, and against which Plato in his later dialogues&#13;
      seems to be struggling—the tendency to mere abstractions; not&#13;
      perceiving that pure abstraction is only negation, they thought&#13;
      that the greater the abstraction the greater the truth. Behind&#13;
      any pair of ideas a new idea which comprehended them—the (Greek),&#13;
      as it was technically termed—began at once to appear. Two are&#13;
      truer than three, one than two. The words ‘being,’ or ‘unity,’ or&#13;
      essence,’ or ‘good,’ became sacred to them. They did not see that&#13;
      they had a word only, and in one sense the most unmeaning of&#13;
      words. They did not understand that the content of notions is in&#13;
      inverse proportion to their universality—the element which is the&#13;
      most widely diffused is also the thinnest; or, in the language of&#13;
      the common logic, the greater the extension the less the&#13;
      comprehension. But this vacant idea of a whole without parts, of&#13;
      a subject without predicates, a rest without motion, has been&#13;
      also the most fruitful of all ideas. It is the beginning of a&#13;
      priori thought, and indeed of thinking at all. Men were led to&#13;
      conceive it, not by a love of hasty generalization, but by a&#13;
      divine instinct, a dialectical enthusiasm, in which the human&#13;
      faculties seemed to yearn for enlargement. We know that ‘being’&#13;
      is only the verb of existence, the copula, the most general&#13;
      symbol of relation, the first and most meagre of abstractions;&#13;
      but to some of the ancient philosophers this little word appeared&#13;
      to attain divine proportions, and to comprehend all truth. Being&#13;
      or essence, and similar words, represented to them a supreme or&#13;
      divine being, in which they thought that they found the&#13;
      containing and continuing principle of the universe. In a few&#13;
      years the human mind was peopled with abstractions; a new world&#13;
      was called into existence to give law and order to the old. But&#13;
      between them there was still a gulf, and no one could pass from&#13;
      the one to the other.</p><p>Number and figure were the greatest instruments of thought which&#13;
      were possessed by the Greek philosopher; having the same power&#13;
      over the mind which was exerted by abstract ideas, they were also&#13;
      capable of practical application. Many curious and, to the early&#13;
      thinker, mysterious properties of them came to light when they&#13;
      were compared with one another. They admitted of infinite&#13;
      multiplication and construction; in Pythagorean triangles or in&#13;
      proportions of 1:2:4:8 and 1:3:9:27, or compounds of them, the&#13;
      laws of the world seemed to be more than half revealed. They were&#13;
      also capable of infinite subdivision—a wonder and also a puzzle&#13;
      to the ancient thinker (Rep.). They were not, like being or&#13;
      essence, mere vacant abstractions, but admitted of progress and&#13;
      growth, while at the same time they confirmed a higher sentiment&#13;
      of the mind, that there was order in the universe. And so there&#13;
      began to be a real sympathy between the world within and the&#13;
      world without. The numbers and figures which were present to the&#13;
      mind’s eye became visible to the eye of sense; the truth of&#13;
      nature was mathematics; the other properties of objects seemed to&#13;
      reappear only in the light of number. Law and morality also found&#13;
      a natural expression in number and figure. Instruments of such&#13;
      power and elasticity could not fail to be ‘a most gracious&#13;
      assistance’ to the first efforts of human intelligence.</p><p>There was another reason why numbers had so great an influence&#13;
      over the minds of early thinkers—they were verified by&#13;
      experience. Every use of them, even the most trivial, assured men&#13;
      of their truth; they were everywhere to be found, in the least&#13;
      things and the greatest alike. One, two, three, counted on the&#13;
      fingers was a ‘trivial matter (Rep.), a little instrument out of&#13;
      which to create a world; but from these and by the help of these&#13;
      all our knowledge of nature has been developed. They were the&#13;
      measure of all things, and seemed to give law to all things;&#13;
      nature was rescued from chaos and confusion by their power; the&#13;
      notes of music, the motions of the stars, the forms of atoms, the&#13;
      evolution and recurrence of days, months, years, the military&#13;
      divisions of an army, the civil divisions of a state, seemed to&#13;
      afford a ‘present witness’ of them—what would have become of man&#13;
      or of the world if deprived of number (Rep.)? The mystery of&#13;
      number and the mystery of music were akin. There was a music of&#13;
      rhythm and of harmonious motion everywhere; and to the real&#13;
      connexion which existed between music and number, a fanciful or&#13;
      imaginary relation was superadded. There was a music of the&#13;
      spheres as well as of the notes of the lyre. If in all things&#13;
      seen there was number and figure, why should they not also&#13;
      pervade the unseen world, with which by their wonderful and&#13;
      unchangeable nature they seemed to hold communion?</p><p>Two other points strike us in the use which the ancient&#13;
      philosophers made of numbers. First, they applied to external&#13;
      nature the relations of them which they found in their own minds;&#13;
      and where nature seemed to be at variance with number, as for&#13;
      example in the case of fractions, they protested against her&#13;
      (Rep.; Arist. Metaph.). Having long meditated on the properties&#13;
      of 1:2:4:8, or 1:3:9:27, or of 3, 4, 5, they discovered in them&#13;
      many curious correspondences and were disposed to find in them&#13;
      the secret of the universe. Secondly, they applied number and&#13;
      figure equally to those parts of physics, such as astronomy or&#13;
      mechanics, in which the modern philosopher expects to find them,&#13;
      and to those in which he would never think of looking for them,&#13;
      such as physiology and psychology. For the sciences were not yet&#13;
      divided, and there was nothing really irrational in arguing that&#13;
      the same laws which regulated the heavenly bodies were partially&#13;
      applied to the erring limbs or brain of man. Astrology was the&#13;
      form which the lively fancy of ancient thinkers almost&#13;
      necessarily gave to astronomy. The observation that the lower&#13;
      principle, e.g. mechanics, is always seen in the higher, e.g. in&#13;
      the phenomena of life, further tended to perplex them. Plato’s&#13;
      doctrine of the same and the other ruling the courses of the&#13;
      heavens and of the human body is not a mere vagary, but is a&#13;
      natural result of the state of knowledge and thought at which he&#13;
      had arrived.</p><p>When in modern times we contemplate the heavens, a certain amount&#13;
      of scientific truth imperceptibly blends, even with the cursory&#13;
      glance of an unscientific person. He knows that the earth is&#13;
      revolving round the sun, and not the sun around the earth. He&#13;
      does not imagine the earth to be the centre of the universe, and&#13;
      he has some conception of chemistry and the cognate sciences. A&#13;
      very different aspect of nature would have been present to the&#13;
      mind of the early Greek philosopher. He would have beheld the&#13;
      earth a surface only, not mirrored, however faintly, in the glass&#13;
      of science, but indissolubly connected with some theory of one,&#13;
      two, or more elements. He would have seen the world pervaded by&#13;
      number and figure, animated by a principle of motion, immanent in&#13;
      a principle of rest. He would have tried to construct the&#13;
      universe on a quantitative principle, seeming to find in endless&#13;
      combinations of geometrical figures or in the infinite variety of&#13;
      their sizes a sufficient account of the multiplicity of&#13;
      phenomena. To these a priori speculations he would add a rude&#13;
      conception of matter and his own immediate experience of health&#13;
      and disease. His cosmos would necessarily be imperfect and&#13;
      unequal, being the first attempt to impress form and order on the&#13;
      primaeval chaos of human knowledge. He would see all things as in&#13;
      a dream.</p><p>The ancient physical philosophers have been charged by Dr.&#13;
      Whewell and others with wasting their fine intelligences in wrong&#13;
      methods of enquiry; and their progress in moral and political&#13;
      philosophy has been sometimes contrasted with their supposed&#13;
      failure in physical investigations. ‘They had plenty of ideas,’&#13;
      says Dr. Whewell, ‘and plenty of facts; but their ideas did not&#13;
      accurately represent the facts with which they were acquainted.’&#13;
      This is a very crude and misleading way of describing ancient&#13;
      science. It is the mistake of an uneducated person—uneducated,&#13;
      that is, in the higher sense of the word—who imagines every one&#13;
      else to be like himself and explains every other age by his own.&#13;
      No doubt the ancients often fell into strange and fanciful&#13;
      errors: the time had not yet arrived for the slower and surer&#13;
      path of the modern inductive philosophy. But it remains to be&#13;
      shown that they could have done more in their age and country; or&#13;
      that the contributions which they made to the sciences with which&#13;
      they were acquainted are not as great upon the whole as those&#13;
      made by their successors. There is no single step in astronomy as&#13;
      great as that of the nameless Pythagorean who first conceived the&#13;
      world to be a body moving round the sun in space: there is no&#13;
      truer or more comprehensive principle than the application of&#13;
      mathematics alike to the heavenly bodies, and to the particles of&#13;
      matter. The ancients had not the instruments which would have&#13;
      enabled them to correct or verify their anticipations, and their&#13;
      opportunities of observation were limited. Plato probably did&#13;
      more for physical science by asserting the supremacy of&#13;
      mathematics than Aristotle or his disciples by their collections&#13;
      of facts. When the thinkers of modern times, following Bacon,&#13;
      undervalue or disparage the speculations of ancient philosophers,&#13;
      they seem wholly to forget the conditions of the world and of the&#13;
      human mind, under which they carried on their investigations.&#13;
      When we accuse them of being under the influence of words, do we&#13;
      suppose that we are altogether free from this illusion? When we&#13;
      remark that Greek physics soon became stationary or extinct, may&#13;
      we not observe also that there have been and may be again periods&#13;
      in the history of modern philosophy which have been barren and&#13;
      unproductive? We might as well maintain that Greek art was not&#13;
      real or great, because it had nihil simile aut secundum, as say&#13;
      that Greek physics were a failure because they admire no&#13;
      subsequent progress.</p><p>The charge of premature generalization which is often urged&#13;
      against ancient philosophers is really an anachronism. For they&#13;
      can hardly be said to have generalized at all. They may be said&#13;
      more truly to have cleared up and defined by the help of&#13;
      experience ideas which they already possessed. The beginnings of&#13;
      thought about nature must always have this character. A true&#13;
      method is the result of many ages of experiment and observation,&#13;
      and is ever going on and enlarging with the progress of science&#13;
      and knowledge. At first men personify nature, then they form&#13;
      impressions of nature, at last they conceive ‘measure’ or laws of&#13;
      nature. They pass out of mythology into philosophy. Early science&#13;
      is not a process of discovery in the modern sense; but rather a&#13;
      process of correcting by observation, and to a certain extent&#13;
      only, the first impressions of nature, which mankind, when they&#13;
      began to think, had received from poetry or language or&#13;
      unintelligent sense. Of all scientific truths the greatest and&#13;
      simplest is the uniformity of nature; this was expressed by the&#13;
      ancients in many ways, as fate, or necessity, or measure, or&#13;
      limit. Unexpected events, of which the cause was unknown to them,&#13;
      they attributed to chance (Thucyd.). But their conception of&#13;
      nature was never that of law interrupted by exceptions,—a&#13;
      somewhat unfortunate metaphysical invention of modern times,&#13;
      which is at variance with facts and has failed to satisfy the&#13;
      requirements of thought.</p><p>Section 3.</p><p>Plato’s account of the soul is partly mythical or figurative, and&#13;
      partly literal. Not that either he or we can draw a line between&#13;
      them, or say, ‘This is poetry, this is philosophy’; for the&#13;
      transition from the one to the other is imperceptible. Neither&#13;
      must we expect to find in him absolute consistency. He is apt to&#13;
      pass from one level or stage of thought to another without always&#13;
      making it apparent that he is changing his ground. In such&#13;
      passages we have to interpret his meaning by the general spirit&#13;
      of his writings. To reconcile his inconsistencies would be&#13;
      contrary to the first principles of criticism and fatal to any&#13;
      true understanding of him.</p><p>There is a further difficulty in explaining this part of the&#13;
      Timaeus—the natural order of thought is inverted. We begin with&#13;
      the most abstract, and proceed from the abstract to the concrete.&#13;
      We are searching into things which are upon the utmost limit of&#13;
      human intelligence, and then of a sudden we fall rather heavily&#13;
      to the earth. There are no intermediate steps which lead from one&#13;
      to the other. But the abstract is a vacant form to us until&#13;
      brought into relation with man and nature. God and the world are&#13;
      mere names, like the Being of the Eleatics, unless some human&#13;
      qualities are added on to them. Yet the negation has a kind of&#13;
      unknown meaning to us. The priority of God and of the world,&#13;
      which he is imagined to have created, to all other existences,&#13;
      gives a solemn awe to them. And as in other systems of theology&#13;
      and philosophy, that of which we know least has the greatest&#13;
      interest to us.</p><p>There is no use in attempting to define or explain the first God&#13;
      in the Platonic system, who has sometimes been thought to answer&#13;
      to God the Father; or the world, in whom the Fathers of the&#13;
      Church seemed to recognize ‘the firstborn of every creature.’ Nor&#13;
      need we discuss at length how far Plato agrees in the later&#13;
      Jewish idea of creation, according to which God made the world&#13;
      out of nothing. For his original conception of matter as&#13;
      something which has no qualities is really a negation. Moreover&#13;
      in the Hebrew Scriptures the creation of the world is described,&#13;
      even more explicitly than in the Timaeus, not as a single act,&#13;
      but as a work or process which occupied six days. There is a&#13;
      chaos in both, and it would be untrue to say that the Greek, any&#13;
      more than the Hebrew, had any definite belief in the eternal&#13;
      existence of matter. The beginning of things vanished into the&#13;
      distance. The real creation began, not with matter, but with&#13;
      ideas. According to Plato in the Timaeus, God took of the same&#13;
      and the other, of the divided and undivided, of the finite and&#13;
      infinite, and made essence, and out of the three combined created&#13;
      the soul of the world. To the soul he added a body formed out of&#13;
      the four elements. The general meaning of these words is that God&#13;
      imparted determinations of thought, or, as we might say, gave law&#13;
      and variety to the material universe. The elements are moving in&#13;
      a disorderly manner before the work of creation begins; and there&#13;
      is an eternal pattern of the world, which, like the ‘idea of&#13;
      good,’ is not the Creator himself, but not separable from him.&#13;
      The pattern too, though eternal, is a creation, a world of&#13;
      thought prior to the world of sense, which may be compared to the&#13;
      wisdom of God in the book of Ecclesiasticus, or to the ‘God in&#13;
      the form of a globe’ of the old Eleatic philosophers. The&#13;
      visible, which already exists, is fashioned in the likeness of&#13;
      this eternal pattern. On the other hand, there is no truth of&#13;
      which Plato is more firmly convinced than of the priority of the&#13;
      soul to the body, both in the universe and in man. So&#13;
      inconsistent are the forms in which he describes the works which&#13;
      no tongue can utter—his language, as he himself says, partaking&#13;
      of his own uncertainty about the things of which he is speaking.</p><p>We may remark in passing, that the Platonic compared with the&#13;
      Jewish description of the process of creation has less of freedom&#13;
      or spontaneity. The Creator in Plato is still subject to a&#13;
      remnant of necessity which he cannot wholly overcome. When his&#13;
      work is accomplished he remains in his own nature. Plato is more&#13;
      sensible than the Hebrew prophet of the existence of evil, which&#13;
      he seeks to put as far as possible out of the way of God. And he&#13;
      can only suppose this to be accomplished by God retiring into&#13;
      himself and committing the lesser works of creation to inferior&#13;
      powers. (Compare, however, Laws for another solution of the&#13;
      difficulty.)</p><p>Nor can we attach any intelligible meaning to his words when he&#13;
      speaks of the visible being in the image of the invisible. For&#13;
      how can that which is divided be like that which is undivided? Or&#13;
      that which is changing be the copy of that which is unchanging?&#13;
      All the old difficulties about the ideas come back upon us in an&#13;
      altered form. We can imagine two worlds, one of which is the mere&#13;
      double of the other, or one of which is an imperfect copy of the&#13;
      other, or one of which is the vanishing ideal of the other; but&#13;
      we cannot imagine an intellectual world which has no qualities—‘a&#13;
      thing in itself’—a point which has no parts or magnitude, which&#13;
      is nowhere, and nothing. This cannot be the archetype according&#13;
      to which God made the world, and is in reality, whether in Plato&#13;
      or in Kant, a mere negative residuum of human thought.</p><p>There is another aspect of the same difficulty which appears to&#13;
      have no satisfactory solution. In what relation does the&#13;
      archetype stand to the Creator himself? For the idea or pattern&#13;
      of the world is not the thought of God, but a separate,&#13;
      self-existent nature, of which creation is the copy. We can only&#13;
      reply, (1) that to the mind of Plato subject and object were not&#13;
      yet distinguished; (2) that he supposes the process of creation&#13;
      to take place in accordance with his own theory of ideas; and as&#13;
      we cannot give a consistent account of the one, neither can we of&#13;
      the other. He means (3) to say that the creation of the world is&#13;
      not a material process of working with legs and arms, but ideal&#13;
      and intellectual; according to his own fine expression, ‘the&#13;
      thought of God made the God that was to be.’ He means (4) to draw&#13;
      an absolute distinction between the invisible or unchangeable&#13;
      which is or is the place of mind or being, and the world of sense&#13;
      or becoming which is visible and changing. He means (5) that the&#13;
      idea of the world is prior to the world, just as the other ideas&#13;
      are prior to sensible objects; and like them may be regarded as&#13;
      eternal and self-existent, and also, like the IDEA of good, may&#13;
      be viewed apart from the divine mind.</p><p>There are several other questions which we might ask and which&#13;
      can receive no answer, or at least only an answer of the same&#13;
      kind as the preceding. How can matter be conceived to exist&#13;
      without form? Or, how can the essences or forms of things be&#13;
      distinguished from the eternal ideas, or essence itself from the&#13;
      soul? Or, how could there have been motion in the chaos when as&#13;
      yet time was not? Or, how did chaos come into existence, if not&#13;
      by the will of the Creator? Or, how could there have been a time&#13;
      when the world was not, if time was not? Or, how could the&#13;
      Creator have taken portions of an indivisible same? Or, how could&#13;
      space or anything else have been eternal when time is only&#13;
      created? Or, how could the surfaces of geometrical figures have&#13;
      formed solids? We must reply again that we cannot follow Plato in&#13;
      all his inconsistencies, but that the gaps of thought are&#13;
      probably more apparent to us than to him. He would, perhaps, have&#13;
      said that ‘the first things are known only to God and to him of&#13;
      men whom God loves.’ How often have the gaps in Theology been&#13;
      concealed from the eye of faith! And we may say that only by an&#13;
      effort of metaphysical imagination can we hope to understand&#13;
      Plato from his own point of view; we must not ask for&#13;
      consistency. Everywhere we find traces of the Platonic theory of&#13;
      knowledge expressed in an objective form, which by us has to be&#13;
      translated into the subjective, before we can attach any meaning&#13;
      to it. And this theory is exhibited in so many different points&#13;
      of view, that we cannot with any certainty interpret one dialogue&#13;
      by another; e.g. the Timaeus by the Parmenides or Phaedrus or&#13;
      Philebus.</p><p>The soul of the world may also be conceived as the&#13;
      personification of the numbers and figures in which the heavenly&#13;
      bodies move. Imagine these as in a Pythagorean dream, stripped of&#13;
      qualitative difference and reduced to mathematical abstractions.&#13;
      They too conform to the principle of the same, and may be&#13;
      compared with the modern conception of laws of nature. They are&#13;
      in space, but not in time, and they are the makers of time. They&#13;
      are represented as constantly thinking of the same; for thought&#13;
      in the view of Plato is equivalent to truth or law, and need not&#13;
      imply a human consciousness, a conception which is familiar&#13;
      enough to us, but has no place, hardly even a name, in ancient&#13;
      Greek philosophy. To this principle of the same is opposed the&#13;
      principle of the other—the principle of irregularity and&#13;
      disorder, of necessity and chance, which is only partially&#13;
      impressed by mathematical laws and figures. (We may observe by&#13;
      the way, that the principle of the other, which is the principle&#13;
      of plurality and variation in the Timaeus, has nothing in common&#13;
      with the ‘other’ of the Sophist, which is the principle of&#13;
      determination.) The element of the same dominates to a certain&#13;
      extent over the other—the fixed stars keep the ‘wanderers’ of the&#13;
      inner circle in their courses, and a similar principle of&#13;
      fixedness or order appears to regulate the bodily constitution of&#13;
      man. But there still remains a rebellious seed of evil derived&#13;
      from the original chaos, which is the source of disorder in the&#13;
      world, and of vice and disease in man.</p><p>But what did Plato mean by essence, (Greek), which is the&#13;
      intermediate nature compounded of the Same and the Other, and out&#13;
      of which, together with these two, the soul of the world is&#13;
      created? It is difficult to explain a process of thought so&#13;
      strange and unaccustomed to us, in which modern distinctions run&#13;
      into one another and are lost sight of. First, let us consider&#13;
      once more the meaning of the Same and the Other. The Same is the&#13;
      unchanging and indivisible, the heaven of the fixed stars,&#13;
      partaking of the divine nature, which, having law in itself,&#13;
      gives law to all besides and is the element of order and&#13;
      permanence in man and on the earth. It is the rational principle,&#13;
      mind regarded as a work, as creation—not as the creator. The old&#13;
      tradition of Parmenides and of the Eleatic Being, the foundation&#13;
      of so much in the philosophy of Greece and of the world, was&#13;
      lingering in Plato’s mind. The Other is the variable or changing&#13;
      element, the residuum of disorder or chaos, which cannot be&#13;
      reduced to order, nor altogether banished, the source of evil,&#13;
      seen in the errors of man and also in the wanderings of the&#13;
      planets, a necessity which protrudes through nature. Of this too&#13;
      there was a shadow in the Eleatic philosophy in the realm of&#13;
      opinion, which, like a mist, seemed to darken the purity of truth&#13;
      in itself.—So far the words of Plato may perhaps find an&#13;
      intelligible meaning. But when he goes on to speak of the Essence&#13;
      which is compounded out of both, the track becomes fainter and we&#13;
      can only follow him with hesitating steps. But still we find a&#13;
      trace reappearing of the teaching of Anaxagoras: ‘All was&#13;
      confusion, and then mind came and arranged things.’ We have&#13;
      already remarked that Plato was not acquainted with the modern&#13;
      distinction of subject and object, and therefore he sometimes&#13;
      confuses mind and the things of mind—(Greek) and (Greek). By&#13;
      (Greek) he clearly means some conception of the intelligible and&#13;
      the intelligent; it belongs to the class of (Greek). Matter,&#13;
      being, the Same, the eternal,—for any of these terms, being&#13;
      almost vacant of meaning, is equally suitable to express&#13;
      indefinite existence,—are compared or united with the Other or&#13;
      Diverse, and out of the union or comparison is elicited the idea&#13;
      of intelligence, the ‘One in many,’ brighter than any Promethean&#13;
      fire (Phil.), which co-existing with them and so forming a new&#13;
      existence, is or becomes the intelligible world...So we may&#13;
      perhaps venture to paraphrase or interpret or put into other&#13;
      words the parable in which Plato has wrapped up his conception of&#13;
      the creation of the world. The explanation may help to fill up&#13;
      with figures of speech the void of knowledge.</p><p>The entire compound was divided by the Creator in certain&#13;
      proportions and reunited; it was then cut into two strips, which&#13;
      were bent into an inner circle and an outer, both moving with an&#13;
      uniform motion around a centre, the outer circle containing the&#13;
      fixed, the inner the wandering stars. The soul of the world was&#13;
      diffused everywhere from the centre to the circumference. To this&#13;
      God gave a body, consisting at first of fire and earth, and&#13;
      afterwards receiving an addition of air and water; because solid&#13;
      bodies, like the world, are always connected by two middle terms&#13;
      and not by one. The world was made in the form of a globe, and&#13;
      all the material elements were exhausted in the work of creation.</p><p>The proportions in which the soul of the world as well as the&#13;
      human soul is divided answer to a series of numbers 1, 2, 3, 4,&#13;
      9, 8, 27, composed of the two Pythagorean progressions 1, 2, 4, 8&#13;
      and 1, 3, 9, 27, of which the number 1 represents a point, 2 and&#13;
      3 lines, 4 and 8, 9 and 27 the squares and cubes respectively of&#13;
      2 and 3. This series, of which the intervals are afterwards&#13;
      filled up, probably represents (1) the diatonic scale according&#13;
      to the Pythagoreans and Plato; (2) the order and distances of the&#13;
      heavenly bodies; and (3) may possibly contain an allusion to the&#13;
      music of the spheres, which is referred to in the myth at the end&#13;
      of the Republic. The meaning of the words that ‘solid bodies are&#13;
      always connected by two middle terms’ or mean proportionals has&#13;
      been much disputed. The most received explanation is that of&#13;
      Martin, who supposes that Plato is only speaking of surfaces and&#13;
      solids compounded of prime numbers (i.e. of numbers not made up&#13;
      of two factors, or, in other words, only measurable by unity).&#13;
      The square of any such number represents a surface, the cube a&#13;
      solid. The squares of any two such numbers (e.g. 2 squared, 3&#13;
      squared = 4, 9), have always a single mean proportional (e.g. 4&#13;
      and 9 have the single mean 6), whereas the cubes of primes (e.g.&#13;
      3 cubed and 5 cubed) have always two mean proportionals (e.g.&#13;
      27:45:75:125). But to this explanation of Martin’s it may be&#13;
      objected, (1) that Plato nowhere says that his proportion is to&#13;
      be limited to prime numbers; (2) that the limitation of surfaces&#13;
      to squares is also not to be found in his words; nor (3) is there&#13;
      any evidence to show that the distinction of prime from other&#13;
      numbers was known to him. What Plato chiefly intends to express&#13;
      is that a solid requires a stronger bond than a surface; and that&#13;
      the double bond which is given by two means is stronger than the&#13;
      single bond given by one. Having reflected on the singular&#13;
      numerical phenomena of the existence of one mean proportional&#13;
      between two square numbers are rather perhaps only between the&#13;
      two lowest squares; and of two mean proportionals between two&#13;
      cubes, perhaps again confining his attention to the two lowest&#13;
      cubes, he finds in the latter symbol an expression of the&#13;
      relation of the elements, as in the former an image of the&#13;
      combination of two surfaces. Between fire and earth, the two&#13;
      extremes, he remarks that there are introduced, not one, but two&#13;
      elements, air and water, which are compared to the two mean&#13;
      proportionals between two cube numbers. The vagueness of his&#13;
      language does not allow us to determine whether anything more&#13;
      than this was intended by him.</p><p>Leaving the further explanation of details, which the reader will&#13;
      find discussed at length in Boeckh and Martin, we may now return&#13;
      to the main argument: Why did God make the world? Like man, he&#13;
      must have a purpose; and his purpose is the diffusion of that&#13;
      goodness or good which he himself is. The term ‘goodness’ is not&#13;
      to be understood in this passage as meaning benevolence or love,&#13;
      in the Christian sense of the term, but rather law, order,&#13;
      harmony, like the idea of good in the Republic. The ancient&#13;
      mythologers, and even the Hebrew prophets, had spoken of the&#13;
      jealousy of God; and the Greek had imagined that there was a&#13;
      Nemesis always attending the prosperity of mortals. But Plato&#13;
      delights to think of God as the author of order in his works,&#13;
      who, like a father, lives over again in his children, and can&#13;
      never have too much of good or friendship among his creatures.&#13;
      Only, as there is a certain remnant of evil inherent in matter&#13;
      which he cannot get rid of, he detaches himself from them and&#13;
      leaves them to themselves, that he may be guiltless of their&#13;
      faults and sufferings.</p><p>Between the ideal and the sensible Plato interposes the two&#13;
      natures of time and space. Time is conceived by him to be only&#13;
      the shadow or image of eternity which ever is and never has been&#13;
      or will be, but is described in a figure only as past or future.&#13;
      This is one of the great thoughts of early philosophy, which are&#13;
      still as difficult to our minds as they were to the early&#13;
      thinkers; or perhaps more difficult, because we more distinctly&#13;
      see the consequences which are involved in such an hypothesis.&#13;
      All the objections which may be urged against Kant’s doctrine of&#13;
      the ideality of space and time at once press upon us. If time is&#13;
      unreal, then all which is contained in time is unreal—the&#13;
      succession of human thoughts as well as the flux of sensations;&#13;
      there is no connecting link between (Greek) and (Greek). Yet, on&#13;
      the other hand, we are conscious that knowledge is independent of&#13;
      time, that truth is not a thing of yesterday or tomorrow, but an&#13;
      ‘eternal now.’ To the ‘spectator of all time and all existence’&#13;
      the universe remains at rest. The truths of geometry and&#13;
      arithmetic in all their combinations are always the same. The&#13;
      generations of men, like the leaves of the forest, come and go,&#13;
      but the mathematical laws by which the world is governed remain,&#13;
      and seem as if they could never change. The ever-present image of&#13;
      space is transferred to time—succession is conceived as&#13;
      extension. (We remark that Plato does away with the above and&#13;
      below in space, as he has done away with the absolute existence&#13;
      of past and future.) The course of time, unless regularly marked&#13;
      by divisions of number, partakes of the indefiniteness of the&#13;
      Heraclitean flux. By such reflections we may conceive the Greek&#13;
      to have attained the metaphysical conception of eternity, which&#13;
      to the Hebrew was gained by meditation on the Divine Being. No&#13;
      one saw that this objective was really a subjective, and involved&#13;
      the subjectivity of all knowledge. ‘Non in tempore sed cum&#13;
      tempore finxit Deus mundum,’ says St. Augustine, repeating a&#13;
      thought derived from the Timaeus, but apparently unconscious of&#13;
      the results to which his doctrine would have led.</p><p>The contradictions involved in the conception of time or motion,&#13;
      like the infinitesimal in space, were a source of perplexity to&#13;
      the mind of the Greek, who was driven to find a point of view&#13;
      above or beyond them. They had sprung up in the decline of the&#13;
      Eleatic philosophy and were very familiar to Plato, as we gather&#13;
      from the Parmenides. The consciousness of them had led the great&#13;
      Eleatic philosopher to describe the nature of God or Being under&#13;
      negatives. He sings of ‘Being unbegotten and imperishable,&#13;
      unmoved and never-ending, which never was nor will be, but always&#13;
      is, one and continuous, which cannot spring from any other; for&#13;
      it cannot be said or imagined not to be.’ The idea of eternity&#13;
      was for a great part a negation. There are regions of speculation&#13;
      in which the negative is hardly separable from the positive, and&#13;
      even seems to pass into it. Not only Buddhism, but Greek as well&#13;
      as Christian philosophy, show that it is quite possible that the&#13;
      human mind should retain an enthusiasm for mere negations. In&#13;
      different ages and countries there have been forms of light in&#13;
      which nothing could be discerned and which have nevertheless&#13;
      exercised a life-giving and illumining power. For the higher&#13;
      intelligence of man seems to require, not only something above&#13;
      sense, but above knowledge, which can only be described as Mind&#13;
      or Being or Truth or God or the unchangeable and eternal element,&#13;
      in the expression of which all predicates fail and fall short.&#13;
      Eternity or the eternal is not merely the unlimited in time but&#13;
      the truest of all Being, the most real of all realities, the most&#13;
      certain of all knowledge, which we nevertheless only see through&#13;
      a glass darkly. The passionate earnestness of Parmenides&#13;
      contrasts with the vacuity of the thought which he is revolving&#13;
      in his mind.</p><p>Space is said by Plato to be the ‘containing vessel or nurse of&#13;
      generation.’ Reflecting on the simplest kinds of external&#13;
      objects, which to the ancients were the four elements, he was led&#13;
      to a more general notion of a substance, more or less like&#13;
      themselves, out of which they were fashioned. He would not have&#13;
      them too precisely distinguished. Thus seems to have arisen the&#13;
      first dim perception of (Greek) or matter, which has played so&#13;
      great a part in the metaphysical philosophy of Aristotle and his&#13;
      followers. But besides the material out of which the elements are&#13;
      made, there is also a space in which they are contained. There&#13;
      arises thus a second nature which the senses are incapable of&#13;
      discerning and which can hardly be referred to the intelligible&#13;
      class. For it is and it is not, it is nowhere when filled, it is&#13;
      nothing when empty. Hence it is said to be discerned by a kind of&#13;
      spurious or analogous reason, partaking so feebly of existence as&#13;
      to be hardly perceivable, yet always reappearing as the&#13;
      containing mother or nurse of all things. It had not that sort of&#13;
      consistency to Plato which has been given to it in modern times&#13;
      by geometry and metaphysics. Neither of the Greek words by which&#13;
      it is described are so purely abstract as the English word&#13;
      ‘space’ or the Latin ‘spatium.’ Neither Plato nor any other Greek&#13;
      would have spoken of (Greek) or (Greek) in the same manner as we&#13;
      speak of ‘time’ and ‘space.’</p><p>Yet space is also of a very permanent or even eternal nature; and&#13;
      Plato seems more willing to admit of the unreality of time than&#13;
      of the unreality of space; because, as he says, all things must&#13;
      necessarily exist in space. We, on the other hand, are disposed&#13;
      to fancy that even if space were annihilated time might still&#13;
      survive. He admits indeed that our knowledge of space is of a&#13;
      dreamy kind, and is given by a spurious reason without the help&#13;
      of sense. (Compare the hypotheses and images of Rep.) It is true&#13;
      that it does not attain to the clearness of ideas. But like them&#13;
      it seems to remain, even if all the objects contained in it are&#13;
      supposed to have vanished away. Hence it was natural for Plato to&#13;
      conceive of it as eternal. We must remember further that in his&#13;
      attempt to realize either space or matter the two abstract ideas&#13;
      of weight and extension, which are familiar to us, had never&#13;
      passed before his mind.</p><p>Thus far God, working according to an eternal pattern, out of his&#13;
      goodness has created the same, the other, and the essence&#13;
      (compare the three principles of the Philebus—the finite, the&#13;
      infinite, and the union of the two), and out of them has formed&#13;
      the outer circle of the fixed stars and the inner circle of the&#13;
      planets, divided according to certain musical intervals; he has&#13;
      also created time, the moving image of eternity, and space,&#13;
      existing by a sort of necessity and hardly distinguishable from&#13;
      matter. The matter out of which the world is formed is not&#13;
      absolutely void, but retains in the chaos certain germs or traces&#13;
      of the elements. These Plato, like Empedocles, supposed to be&#13;
      four in number—fire, air, earth, and water. They were at first&#13;
      mixed together; but already in the chaos, before God fashioned&#13;
      them by form and number, the greater masses of the elements had&#13;
      an appointed place. Into the confusion (Greek) which preceded&#13;
      Plato does not attempt further to penetrate. They are called&#13;
      elements, but they are so far from being elements (Greek) or&#13;
      letters in the higher sense that they are not even syllables or&#13;
      first compounds. The real elements are two triangles, the&#13;
      rectangular isosceles which has but one form, and the most&#13;
      beautiful of the many forms of scalene, which is half of an&#13;
      equilateral triangle. By the combination of these triangles which&#13;
      exist in an infinite variety of sizes, the surfaces of the four&#13;
      elements are constructed.</p><p>That there were only five regular solids was already known to the&#13;
      ancients, and out of the surfaces which he has formed Plato&#13;
      proceeds to generate the four first of the five. He perhaps&#13;
      forgets that he is only putting together surfaces and has not&#13;
      provided for their transformation into solids. The first solid is&#13;
      a regular pyramid, of which the base and sides are formed by four&#13;
      equilateral or twenty-four scalene triangles. Each of the four&#13;
      solid angles in this figure is a little larger than the largest&#13;
      of obtuse angles. The second solid is composed of the same&#13;
      triangles, which unite as eight equilateral triangles, and make&#13;
      one solid angle out of four plane angles—six of these angles form&#13;
      a regular octahedron. The third solid is a regular icosahedron,&#13;
      having twenty triangular equilateral bases, and therefore 120&#13;
      rectangular scalene triangles. The fourth regular solid, or cube,&#13;
      is formed by the combination of four isosceles triangles into one&#13;
      square and of six squares into a cube. The fifth regular solid,&#13;
      or dodecahedron, cannot be formed by a combination of either of&#13;
      these triangles, but each of its faces may be regarded as&#13;
      composed of thirty triangles of another kind. Probably Plato&#13;
      notices this as the only remaining regular polyhedron, which from&#13;
      its approximation to a globe, and possibly because, as Plutarch&#13;
      remarks, it is composed of 12 x 30 = 360 scalene triangles&#13;
      (Platon. Quaest.), representing thus the signs and degrees of the&#13;
      Zodiac, as well as the months and days of the year, God may be&#13;
      said to have ‘used in the delineation of the universe.’ According&#13;
      to Plato earth was composed of cubes, fire of regular pyramids,&#13;
      air of regular octahedrons, water of regular icosahedrons. The&#13;
      stability of the last three increases with the number of their&#13;
      sides.</p><p>The elements are supposed to pass into one another, but we must&#13;
      remember that these transformations are not the transformations&#13;
      of real solids, but of imaginary geometrical figures; in other&#13;
      words, we are composing and decomposing the faces of substances&#13;
      and not the substances themselves—it is a house of cards which we&#13;
      are pulling to pieces and putting together again (compare however&#13;
      Laws). Yet perhaps Plato may regard these sides or faces as only&#13;
      the forms which are impressed on pre-existent matter. It is&#13;
      remarkable that he should speak of each of these solids as a&#13;
      possible world in itself, though upon the whole he inclines to&#13;
      the opinion that they form one world and not five. To suppose&#13;
      that there is an infinite number of worlds, as Democritus&#13;
      (Hippolyt. Ref. Haer. I.) had said, would be, as he satirically&#13;
      observes, ‘the characteristic of a very indefinite and ignorant&#13;
      mind.’</p><p>The twenty triangular faces of an icosahedron form the faces or&#13;
      sides of two regular octahedrons and of a regular pyramid (20 = 8&#13;
      x 2 + 4); and therefore, according to Plato, a particle of water&#13;
      when decomposed is supposed to give two particles of air and one&#13;
      of fire. So because an octahedron gives the sides of two pyramids&#13;
      (8 = 4 x 2), a particle of air is resolved into two particles of&#13;
      fire.</p><p>The transformation is effected by the superior power or number of&#13;
      the conquering elements. The manner of the change is (1) a&#13;
      separation of portions of the elements from the masses in which&#13;
      they are collected; (2) a resolution of them into their original&#13;
      triangles; and (3) a reunion of them in new forms. Plato himself&#13;
      proposes the question, Why does motion continue at all when the&#13;
      elements are settled in their places? He answers that although&#13;
      the force of attraction is continually drawing similar elements&#13;
      to the same spot, still the revolution of the universe exercises&#13;
      a condensing power, and thrusts them again out of their natural&#13;
      places. Thus want of uniformity, the condition of motion, is&#13;
      produced. In all such disturbances of matter there is an&#13;
      alternative for the weaker element: it may escape to its kindred,&#13;
      or take the form of the stronger—becoming denser, if it be&#13;
      denser, or rarer if rarer. This is true of fire, air, and water,&#13;
      which, being composed of similar triangles, are interchangeable;&#13;
      earth, however, which has triangles peculiar to itself, is&#13;
      capable of dissolution, but not of change. Of the interchangeable&#13;
      elements, fire, the rarest, can only become a denser, and water,&#13;
      the densest, only a rarer: but air may become a denser or a&#13;
      rarer. No single particle of the elements is visible, but only&#13;
      the aggregates of them are seen. The subordinate species depend,&#13;
      not upon differences of form in the original triangles, but upon&#13;
      differences of size. The obvious physical phenomena from which&#13;
      Plato has gathered his views of the relations of the elements&#13;
      seem to be the effect of fire upon air, water, and earth, and the&#13;
      effect of water upon earth. The particles are supposed by him to&#13;
      be in a perpetual process of circulation caused by inequality.&#13;
      This process of circulation does not admit of a vacuum, as he&#13;
      tells us in his strange account of respiration.</p><p>Of the phenomena of light and heavy he speaks afterwards, when&#13;
      treating of sensation, but they may be more conveniently&#13;
      considered by us in this place. They are not, he says, to be&#13;
      explained by ‘above’ and ‘below,’ which in the universal globe&#13;
      have no existence, but by the attraction of similars towards the&#13;
      great masses of similar substances; fire to fire, air to air,&#13;
      water to water, earth to earth. Plato’s doctrine of attraction&#13;
      implies not only (1) the attraction of similar elements to one&#13;
      another, but also (2) of smaller bodies to larger ones. Had he&#13;
      confined himself to the latter he would have arrived, though,&#13;
      perhaps, without any further result or any sense of the greatness&#13;
      of the discovery, at the modern doctrine of gravitation. He does&#13;
      not observe that water has an equal tendency towards both water&#13;
      and earth. So easily did the most obvious facts which were&#13;
      inconsistent with his theories escape him.</p><p>The general physical doctrines of the Timaeus may be summed up as&#13;
      follows: (1) Plato supposes the greater masses of the elements to&#13;
      have been already settled in their places at the creation: (2)&#13;
      they are four in number, and are formed of rectangular triangles&#13;
      variously combined into regular solid figures: (3) three of them,&#13;
      fire, air, and water, admit of transformation into one another;&#13;
      the fourth, earth, cannot be similarly transformed: (4) different&#13;
      sizes of the same triangles form the lesser species of each&#13;
      element: (5) there is an attraction of like to like—smaller&#13;
      masses of the same kind being drawn towards greater: (6) there is&#13;
      no void, but the particles of matter are ever pushing one another&#13;
      round and round (Greek). Like the atomists, Plato attributes the&#13;
      differences between the elements to differences in geometrical&#13;
      figures. But he does not explain the process by which surfaces&#13;
      become solids; and he characteristically ridicules Democritus for&#13;
      not seeing that the worlds are finite and not infinite.</p><p>Section 4.</p><p>The astronomy of Plato is based on the two principles of the same&#13;
      and the other, which God combined in the creation of the world.&#13;
      The soul, which is compounded of the same, the other, and the&#13;
      essence, is diffused from the centre to the circumference of the&#13;
      heavens. We speak of a soul of the universe; but more truly&#13;
      regarded, the universe of the Timaeus is a soul, governed by&#13;
      mind, and holding in solution a residuum of matter or evil, which&#13;
      the author of the world is unable to expel, and of which Plato&#13;
      cannot tell us the origin. The creation, in Plato’s sense, is&#13;
      really the creation of order; and the first step in giving order&#13;
      is the division of the heavens into an inner and outer circle of&#13;
      the other and the same, of the divisible and the indivisible,&#13;
      answering to the two spheres, of the planets and of the world&#13;
      beyond them, all together moving around the earth, which is their&#13;
      centre. To us there is a difficulty in apprehending how that&#13;
      which is at rest can also be in motion, or that which is&#13;
      indivisible exist in space. But the whole description is so ideal&#13;
      and imaginative, that we can hardly venture to attribute to many&#13;
      of Plato’s words in the Timaeus any more meaning than to his&#13;
      mythical account of the heavens in the Republic and in the&#13;
      Phaedrus. (Compare his denial of the ‘blasphemous opinion’ that&#13;
      there are planets or wandering stars; all alike move in&#13;
      circles—Laws.) The stars are the habitations of the souls of men,&#13;
      from which they come and to which they return. In attributing to&#13;
      the fixed stars only the most perfect motion—that which is on the&#13;
      same spot or circulating around the same—he might perhaps have&#13;
      said that to ‘the spectator of all time and all existence,’ to&#13;
      borrow once more his own grand expression, or viewed, in the&#13;
      language of Spinoza, ‘sub specie aeternitatis,’ they were still&#13;
      at rest, but appeared to move in order to teach men the periods&#13;
      of time. Although absolutely in motion, they are relatively at&#13;
      rest; or we may conceive of them as resting, while the space in&#13;
      which they are contained, or the whole anima mundi, revolves.</p><p>The universe revolves around a centre once in twenty-four hours,&#13;
      but the orbits of the fixed stars take a different direction from&#13;
      those of the planets. The outer and the inner sphere cross one&#13;
      another and meet again at a point opposite to that of their first&#13;
      contact; the first moving in a circle from left to right along&#13;
      the side of a parallelogram which is supposed to be inscribed in&#13;
      it, the second also moving in a circle along the diagonal of the&#13;
      same parallelogram from right to left; or, in other words, the&#13;
      first describing the path of the equator, the second, the path of&#13;
      the ecliptic. The motion of the second is controlled by the&#13;
      first, and hence the oblique line in which the planets are&#13;
      supposed to move becomes a spiral. The motion of the same is said&#13;
      to be undivided, whereas the inner motion is split into seven&#13;
      unequal orbits—the intervals between them being in the ratio of&#13;
      two and three, three of either:—the Sun, moving in the opposite&#13;
      direction to Mercury and Venus, but with equal swiftness; the&#13;
      remaining four, Moon, Saturn, Mars, Jupiter, with unequal&#13;
      swiftness to the former three and to one another. Thus arises the&#13;
      following progression:—Moon 1, Sun 2, Venus 3, Mercury 4, Mars 8,&#13;
      Jupiter 9, Saturn 27. This series of numbers is the compound of&#13;
      the two Pythagorean ratios, having the same intervals, though not&#13;
      in the same order, as the mixture which was originally divided in&#13;
      forming the soul of the world.</p><p>Plato was struck by the phenomenon of Mercury, Venus, and the Sun&#13;
      appearing to overtake and be overtaken by one another. The true&#13;
      reason of this, namely, that they lie within the circle of the&#13;
      earth’s orbit, was unknown to him, and the reason which he&#13;
      gives—that the two former move in an opposite direction to the&#13;
      latter—is far from explaining the appearance of them in the&#13;
      heavens. All the planets, including the sun, are carried round in&#13;
      the daily motion of the circle of the fixed stars, and they have&#13;
      a second or oblique motion which gives the explanation of the&#13;
      different lengths of the sun’s course in different parts of the&#13;
      earth. The fixed stars have also two movements—a forward movement&#13;
      in their orbit which is common to the whole circle; and a&#13;
      movement on the same spot around an axis, which Plato calls the&#13;
      movement of thought about the same. In this latter respect they&#13;
      are more perfect than the wandering stars, as Plato himself terms&#13;
      them in the Timaeus, although in the Laws he condemns the&#13;
      appellation as blasphemous.</p><p>The revolution of the world around earth, which is accomplished&#13;
      in a single day and night, is described as being the most perfect&#13;
      or intelligent. Yet Plato also speaks of an ‘annus magnus’ or&#13;
      cyclical year, in which periods wonderful for their complexity&#13;
      are found to coincide in a perfect number, i.e. a number which&#13;
      equals the sum of its factors, as 6 = 1 + 2 + 3. This, although&#13;
      not literally contradictory, is in spirit irreconcilable with the&#13;
      perfect revolution of twenty-four hours. The same remark may be&#13;
      applied to the complexity of the appearances and occultations of&#13;
      the stars, which, if the outer heaven is supposed to be moving&#13;
      around the centre once in twenty-four hours, must be confined to&#13;
      the effects produced by the seven planets. Plato seems to confuse&#13;
      the actual observation of the heavens with his desire to find in&#13;
      them mathematical perfection. The same spirit is carried yet&#13;
      further by him in the passage already quoted from the Laws, in&#13;
      which he affirms their wanderings to be an appearance only, which&#13;
      a little knowledge of mathematics would enable men to correct.</p><p>We have now to consider the much discussed question of the&#13;
      rotation or immobility of the earth. Plato’s doctrine on this&#13;
      subject is contained in the following words:—‘The earth, which is&#13;
      our nurse, compacted (OR revolving) around the pole which is&#13;
      extended through the universe, he made to be the guardian and&#13;
      artificer of night and day, first and eldest of gods that are in&#13;
      the interior of heaven’. There is an unfortunate doubt in this&#13;
      passage (1) about the meaning of the word (Greek), which is&#13;
      translated either ‘compacted’ or ‘revolving,’ and is equally&#13;
      capable of both explanations. A doubt (2) may also be raised as&#13;
      to whether the words ‘artificer of day and night’ are consistent&#13;
      with the mere passive causation of them, produced by the&#13;
      immobility of the earth in the midst of the circling universe. We&#13;
      must admit, further, (3) that Aristotle attributed to Plato the&#13;
      doctrine of the rotation of the earth on its axis. On the other&#13;
      hand it has been urged that if the earth goes round with the&#13;
      outer heaven and sun in twenty-four hours, there is no way of&#13;
      accounting for the alternation of day and night; since the equal&#13;
      motion of the earth and sun would have the effect of absolute&#13;
      immobility. To which it may be replied that Plato never says that&#13;
      the earth goes round with the outer heaven and sun; although the&#13;
      whole question depends on the relation of earth and sun, their&#13;
      movements are nowhere precisely described. But if we suppose,&#13;
      with Mr. Grote, that the diurnal rotation of the earth on its&#13;
      axis and the revolution of the sun and outer heaven precisely&#13;
      coincide, it would be difficult to imagine that Plato was unaware&#13;
      of the consequence. For though he was ignorant of many things&#13;
      which are familiar to us, and often confused in his ideas where&#13;
      we have become clear, we have no right to attribute to him a&#13;
      childish want of reasoning about very simple facts, or an&#13;
      inability to understand the necessary and obvious deductions from&#13;
      geometrical figures or movements. Of the causes of day and night&#13;
      the pre-Socratic philosophers, and especially the Pythagoreans,&#13;
      gave various accounts, and therefore the question can hardly be&#13;
      imagined to have escaped him. On the other hand it may be urged&#13;
      that the further step, however simple and obvious, is just what&#13;
      Plato often seems to be ignorant of, and that as there is no&#13;
      limit to his insight, there is also no limit to the blindness&#13;
      which sometimes obscures his intelligence (compare the&#13;
      construction of solids out of surfaces in his account of the&#13;
      creation of the world, or the attraction of similars to&#13;
      similars). Further, Mr. Grote supposes, not that (Greek) means&#13;
      ‘revolving,’ or that this is the sense in which Aristotle&#13;
      understood the word, but that the rotation of the earth is&#13;
      necessarily implied in its adherence to the cosmical axis. But&#13;
      (a) if, as Mr Grote assumes, Plato did not see that the rotation&#13;
      of the earth on its axis and of the sun and outer heavens around&#13;
      the earth in equal times was inconsistent with the alternation of&#13;
      day and night, neither need we suppose that he would have seen&#13;
      the immobility of the earth to be inconsistent with the rotation&#13;
      of the axis. And (b) what proof is there that the axis of the&#13;
      world revolves at all? (c) The comparison of the two passages&#13;
      quoted by Mr Grote (see his pamphlet on ‘The Rotation of the&#13;
      Earth’) from Aristotle De Coelo, Book II (Greek) clearly shows,&#13;
      although this is a matter of minor importance, that Aristotle, as&#13;
      Proclus and Simplicius supposed, understood (Greek) in the&#13;
      Timaeus to mean ‘revolving.’ For the second passage, in which&#13;
      motion on an axis is expressly mentioned, refers to the first,&#13;
      but this would be unmeaning unless (Greek) in the first passage&#13;
      meant rotation on an axis. (4) The immobility of the earth is&#13;
      more in accordance with Plato’s other writings than the opposite&#13;
      hypothesis. For in the Phaedo the earth is described as the&#13;
      centre of the world, and is not said to be in motion. In the&#13;
      Republic the pilgrims appear to be looking out from the earth&#13;
      upon the motions of the heavenly bodies; in the Phaedrus, Hestia,&#13;
      who remains immovable in the house of Zeus while the other gods&#13;
      go in procession, is called the first and eldest of the gods, and&#13;
      is probably the symbol of the earth. The silence of Plato in&#13;
      these and in some other passages (Laws) in which he might be&#13;
      expected to speak of the rotation of the earth, is more&#13;
      favourable to the doctrine of its immobility than to the&#13;
      opposite. If he had meant to say that the earth revolves on its&#13;
      axis, he would have said so in distinct words, and have explained&#13;
      the relation of its movements to those of the other heavenly&#13;
      bodies. (5) The meaning of the words ‘artificer of day and night’&#13;
      is literally true according to Plato’s view. For the alternation&#13;
      of day and night is not produced by the motion of the heavens&#13;
      alone, or by the immobility of the earth alone, but by both&#13;
      together; and that which has the inherent force or energy to&#13;
      remain at rest when all other bodies are moving, may be truly&#13;
      said to act, equally with them. (6) We should not lay too much&#13;
      stress on Aristotle or the writer De Caelo having adopted the&#13;
      other interpretation of the words, although Alexander of&#13;
      Aphrodisias thinks that he could not have been ignorant either of&#13;
      the doctrine of Plato or of the sense which he intended to give&#13;
      to the word (Greek). For the citations of Plato in Aristotle are&#13;
      frequently misinterpreted by him; and he seems hardly ever to&#13;
      have had in his mind the connection in which they occur. In this&#13;
      instance the allusion is very slight, and there is no reason to&#13;
      suppose that the diurnal revolution of the heavens was present to&#13;
      his mind. Hence we need not attribute to him the error from which&#13;
      we are defending Plato.</p><p>After weighing one against the other all these complicated&#13;
      probabilities, the final conclusion at which we arrive is that&#13;
      there is nearly as much to be said on the one side of the&#13;
      question as on the other, and that we are not perfectly certain,&#13;
      whether, as Bockh and the majority of commentators, ancient as&#13;
      well as modern, are inclined to believe, Plato thought that the&#13;
      earth was at rest in the centre of the universe, or, as Aristotle&#13;
      and Mr. Grote suppose, that it revolved on its axis. Whether we&#13;
      assume the earth to be stationary in the centre of the universe,&#13;
      or to revolve with the heavens, no explanation is given of the&#13;
      variation in the length of days and nights at different times of&#13;
      the year. The relations of the earth and heavens are so&#13;
      indistinct in the Timaeus and so figurative in the Phaedo,&#13;
      Phaedrus and Republic, that we must give up the hope of&#13;
      ascertaining how they were imagined by Plato, if he had any fixed&#13;
      or scientific conception of them at all.</p><p>Section 5.</p><p>The soul of the world is framed on the analogy of the soul of&#13;
      man, and many traces of anthropomorphism blend with Plato’s&#13;
      highest flights of idealism. The heavenly bodies are endowed with&#13;
      thought; the principles of the same and other exist in the&#13;
      universe as well as in the human mind. The soul of man is made&#13;
      out of the remains of the elements which had been used in&#13;
      creating the soul of the world; these remains, however, are&#13;
      diluted to the third degree; by this Plato expresses the measure&#13;
      of the difference between the soul human and divine. The human&#13;
      soul, like the cosmical, is framed before the body, as the mind&#13;
      is before the soul of either—this is the order of the divine&#13;
      work—and the finer parts of the body, which are more akin to the&#13;
      soul, such as the spinal marrow, are prior to the bones and&#13;
      flesh. The brain, the containing vessel of the divine part of the&#13;
      soul, is (nearly) in the form of a globe, which is the image of&#13;
      the gods, who are the stars, and of the universe.</p><p>There is, however, an inconsistency in Plato’s manner of&#13;
      conceiving the soul of man; he cannot get rid of the element of&#13;
      necessity which is allowed to enter. He does not, like Kant,&#13;
      attempt to vindicate for men a freedom out of space and time; but&#13;
      he acknowledges him to be subject to the influence of external&#13;
      causes, and leaves hardly any place for freedom of the will. The&#13;
      lusts of men are caused by their bodily constitution, though they&#13;
      may be increased by bad education and bad laws, which implies&#13;
      that they may be decreased by good education and good laws. He&#13;
      appears to have an inkling of the truth that to the higher nature&#13;
      of man evil is involuntary. This is mixed up with the view which,&#13;
      while apparently agreeing with it, is in reality the opposite of&#13;
      it, that vice is due to physical causes. In the Timaeus, as well&#13;
      as in the Laws, he also regards vices and crimes as simply&#13;
      involuntary; they are diseases analogous to the diseases of the&#13;
      body, and arising out of the same causes. If we draw together the&#13;
      opposite poles of Plato’s system, we find that, like Spinoza, he&#13;
      combines idealism with fatalism.</p><p>The soul of man is divided by him into three parts, answering&#13;
      roughly to the charioteer and steeds of the Phaedrus, and to the&#13;
      (Greek) of the Republic and Nicomachean Ethics. First, there is&#13;
      the immortal nature of which the brain is the seat, and which is&#13;
      akin to the soul of the universe. This alone thinks and knows and&#13;
      is the ruler of the whole. Secondly, there is the higher mortal&#13;
      soul which, though liable to perturbations of her own, takes the&#13;
      side of reason against the lower appetites. The seat of this is&#13;
      the heart, in which courage, anger, and all the nobler affections&#13;
      are supposed to reside. There the veins all meet; it is their&#13;
      centre or house of guard whence they carry the orders of the&#13;
      thinking being to the extremities of his kingdom. There is also a&#13;
      third or appetitive soul, which receives the commands of the&#13;
      immortal part, not immediately but mediately, through the liver,&#13;
      which reflects on its surface the admonitions and threats of the&#13;
      reason.</p><p>The liver is imagined by Plato to be a smooth and bright&#13;
      substance, having a store of sweetness and also of bitterness,&#13;
      which reason freely uses in the execution of her mandates. In&#13;
      this region, as ancient superstition told, were to be found&#13;
      intimations of the future. But Plato is careful to observe that&#13;
      although such knowledge is given to the inferior parts of man, it&#13;
      requires to be interpreted by the superior. Reason, and not&#13;
      enthusiasm, is the true guide of man; he is only inspired when he&#13;
      is demented by some distemper or possession. The ancient saying,&#13;
      that ‘only a man in his senses can judge of his own actions,’ is&#13;
      approved by modern philosophy too. The same irony which appears&#13;
      in Plato’s remark, that ‘the men of old time must surely have&#13;
      known the gods who were their ancestors, and we should believe&#13;
      them as custom requires,’ is also manifest in his account of&#13;
      divination.</p><p>The appetitive soul is seated in the belly, and there imprisoned&#13;
      like a wild beast, far away from the council chamber, as Plato&#13;
      graphically calls the head, in order that the animal passions may&#13;
      not interfere with the deliberations of reason. Though the soul&#13;
      is said by him to be prior to the body, yet we cannot help seeing&#13;
      that it is constructed on the model of the body—the threefold&#13;
      division into the rational, passionate, and appetitive&#13;
      corresponding to the head, heart and belly. The human soul&#13;
      differs from the soul of the world in this respect, that it is&#13;
      enveloped and finds its expression in matter, whereas the soul of&#13;
      the world is not only enveloped or diffused in matter, but is the&#13;
      element in which matter moves. The breath of man is within him,&#13;
      but the air or aether of heaven is the element which surrounds&#13;
      him and all things.</p><p>Pleasure and pain are attributed in the Timaeus to the suddenness&#13;
      of our sensations—the first being a sudden restoration, the&#13;
      second a sudden violation, of nature (Phileb.). The sensations&#13;
      become conscious to us when they are exceptional. Sight is not&#13;
      attended either by pleasure or pain, but hunger and the appeasing&#13;
      of hunger are pleasant and painful because they are&#13;
      extraordinary.</p><p>Section 6.</p><p>I shall not attempt to connect the physiological speculations of&#13;
      Plato either with ancient or modern medicine. What light I can&#13;
      throw upon them will be derived from the comparison of them with&#13;
      his general system.</p><p>There is no principle so apparent in the physics of the Timaeus,&#13;
      or in ancient physics generally, as that of continuity. The world&#13;
      is conceived of as a whole, and the elements are formed into and&#13;
      out of one another; the varieties of substances and processes are&#13;
      hardly known or noticed. And in a similar manner the human body&#13;
      is conceived of as a whole, and the different substances of&#13;
      which, to a superficial observer, it appears to be composed—the&#13;
      blood, flesh, sinews—like the elements out of which they are&#13;
      formed, are supposed to pass into one another in regular order,&#13;
      while the infinite complexity of the human frame remains&#13;
      unobserved. And diseases arise from the opposite process—when the&#13;
      natural proportions of the four elements are disturbed, and the&#13;
      secondary substances which are formed out of them, namely, blood,&#13;
      flesh, sinews, are generated in an inverse order.</p><p>Plato found heat and air within the human frame, and the blood&#13;
      circulating in every part. He assumes in language almost&#13;
      unintelligible to us that a network of fire and air envelopes the&#13;
      greater part of the body. This outer net contains two lesser&#13;
      nets, one corresponding to the stomach, the other to the lungs;&#13;
      and the entrance to the latter is forked or divided into two&#13;
      passages which lead to the nostrils and to the mouth. In the&#13;
      process of respiration the external net is said to find a way in&#13;
      and out of the pores of the skin: while the interior of it and&#13;
      the lesser nets move alternately into each other. The whole&#13;
      description is figurative, as Plato himself implies when he&#13;
      speaks of a ‘fountain of fire which we compare to the network of&#13;
      a creel.’ He really means by this what we should describe as a&#13;
      state of heat or temperature in the interior of the body. The&#13;
      ‘fountain of fire’ or heat is also in a figure the circulation of&#13;
      the blood. The passage is partly imagination, partly fact.</p><p>He has a singular theory of respiration for which he accounts&#13;
      solely by the movement of the air in and out of the body; he does&#13;
      not attribute any part of the process to the action of the body&#13;
      itself. The air has a double ingress and a double exit, through&#13;
      the mouth or nostrils, and through the skin. When exhaled through&#13;
      the mouth or nostrils, it leaves a vacuum which is filled up by&#13;
      other air finding a way in through the pores, this air being&#13;
      thrust out of its place by the exhalation from the mouth and&#13;
      nostrils. There is also a corresponding process of inhalation&#13;
      through the mouth or nostrils, and of exhalation through the&#13;
      pores. The inhalation through the pores appears to take place&#13;
      nearly at the same time as the exhalation through the mouth; and&#13;
      conversely. The internal fire is in either case the propelling&#13;
      cause outwards—the inhaled air, when heated by it, having a&#13;
      natural tendency to move out of the body to the place of fire;&#13;
      while the impossibility of a vacuum is the propelling cause&#13;
      inwards.</p><p>Thus we see that this singular theory is dependent on two&#13;
      principles largely employed by Plato in explaining the operations&#13;
      of nature, the impossibility of a vacuum and the attraction of&#13;
      like to like. To these there has to be added a third principle,&#13;
      which is the condition of the action of the other two,—the&#13;
      interpenetration of particles in proportion to their density or&#13;
      rarity. It is this which enables fire and air to permeate the&#13;
      flesh.</p><p>Plato’s account of digestion and the circulation of the blood is&#13;
      closely connected with his theory of respiration. Digestion is&#13;
      supposed to be effected by the action of the internal fire, which&#13;
      in the process of respiration moves into the stomach and minces&#13;
      the food. As the fire returns to its place, it takes with it the&#13;
      minced food or blood; and in this way the veins are replenished.&#13;
      Plato does not enquire how the blood is separated from the&#13;
      faeces.</p><p>Of the anatomy and functions of the body he knew very&#13;
      little,—e.g. of the uses of the nerves in conveying motion and&#13;
      sensation, which he supposed to be communicated by the bones and&#13;
      veins; he was also ignorant of the distinction between veins and&#13;
      arteries;—the latter term he applies to the vessels which conduct&#13;
      air from the mouth to the lungs;—he supposes the lung to be&#13;
      hollow and bloodless; the spinal marrow he conceives to be the&#13;
      seed of generation; he confuses the parts of the body with the&#13;
      states of the body—the network of fire and air is spoken of as a&#13;
      bodily organ; he has absolutely no idea of the phenomena of&#13;
      respiration, which he attributes to a law of equalization in&#13;
      nature, the air which is breathed out displacing other air which&#13;
      finds a way in; he is wholly unacquainted with the process of&#13;
      digestion. Except the general divisions into the spleen, the&#13;
      liver, the belly, and the lungs, and the obvious distinctions of&#13;
      flesh, bones, and the limbs of the body, we find nothing that&#13;
      reminds us of anatomical facts. But we find much which is derived&#13;
      from his theory of the universe, and transferred to man, as there&#13;
      is much also in his theory of the universe which is suggested by&#13;
      man. The microcosm of the human body is the lesser image of the&#13;
      macrocosm. The courses of the same and the other affect both;&#13;
      they are made of the same elements and therefore in the same&#13;
      proportions. Both are intelligent natures endued with the power&#13;
      of self-motion, and the same equipoise is maintained in both. The&#13;
      animal is a sort of ‘world’ to the particles of the blood which&#13;
      circulate in it. All the four elements entered into the original&#13;
      composition of the human frame; the bone was formed out of smooth&#13;
      earth; liquids of various kinds pass to and fro; the network of&#13;
      fire and air irrigates the veins. Infancy and childhood is the&#13;
      chaos or first turbid flux of sense prior to the establishment of&#13;
      order; the intervals of time which may be observed in some&#13;
      intermittent fevers correspond to the density of the elements.&#13;
      The spinal marrow, including the brain, is formed out of the&#13;
      finest sorts of triangles, and is the connecting link between&#13;
      body and mind. Health is only to be preserved by imitating the&#13;
      motions of the world in space, which is the mother and nurse of&#13;
      generation. The work of digestion is carried on by the superior&#13;
      sharpness of the triangles forming the substances of the human&#13;
      body to those which are introduced into it in the shape of food.&#13;
      The freshest and acutest forms of triangles are those that are&#13;
      found in children, but they become more obtuse with advancing&#13;
      years; and when they finally wear out and fall to pieces, old age&#13;
      and death supervene.</p><p>As in the Republic, Plato is still the enemy of the purgative&#13;
      treatment of physicians, which, except in extreme cases, no man&#13;
      of sense will ever adopt. For, as he adds, with an insight into&#13;
      the truth, ‘every disease is akin to the nature of the living&#13;
      being and is only irritated by stimulants.’ He is of opinion that&#13;
      nature should be left to herself, and is inclined to think that&#13;
      physicians are in vain (Laws—where he says that warm baths would&#13;
      be more beneficial to the limbs of the aged rustic than the&#13;
      prescriptions of a not over-wise doctor). If he seems to be&#13;
      extreme in his condemnation of medicine and to rely too much on&#13;
      diet and exercise, he might appeal to nearly all the best&#13;
      physicians of our own age in support of his opinions, who often&#13;
      speak to their patients of the worthlessness of drugs. For we&#13;
      ourselves are sceptical about medicine, and very unwilling to&#13;
      submit to the purgative treatment of physicians. May we not claim&#13;
      for Plato an anticipation of modern ideas as about some questions&#13;
      of astronomy and physics, so also about medicine? As in the&#13;
      Charmides he tells us that the body cannot be cured without the&#13;
      soul, so in the Timaeus he strongly asserts the sympathy of soul&#13;
      and body; any defect of either is the occasion of the greatest&#13;
      discord and disproportion in the other. Here too may be a&#13;
      presentiment that in the medicine of the future the&#13;
      interdependence of mind and body will be more fully recognized,&#13;
      and that the influence of the one over the other may be exerted&#13;
      in a manner which is not now thought possible.</p><p>Section 7.</p><p>In Plato’s explanation of sensation we are struck by the fact&#13;
      that he has not the same distinct conception of organs of sense&#13;
      which is familiar to ourselves. The senses are not instruments,&#13;
      but rather passages, through which external objects strike upon&#13;
      the mind. The eye is the aperture through which the stream of&#13;
      vision passes, the ear is the aperture through which the&#13;
      vibrations of sound pass. But that the complex structure of the&#13;
      eye or the ear is in any sense the cause of sight and hearing he&#13;
      seems hardly to be aware.</p><p>The process of sight is the most complicated (Rep.), and consists&#13;
      of three elements—the light which is supposed to reside within&#13;
      the eye, the light of the sun, and the light emitted from&#13;
      external objects. When the light of the eye meets the light of&#13;
      the sun, and both together meet the light issuing from an&#13;
      external object, this is the simple act of sight. When the&#13;
      particles of light which proceed from the object are exactly&#13;
      equal to the particles of the visual ray which meet them from&#13;
      within, then the body is transparent. If they are larger and&#13;
      contract the visual ray, a black colour is produced; if they are&#13;
      smaller and dilate it, a white. Other phenomena are produced by&#13;
      the variety and motion of light. A sudden flash of fire at once&#13;
      elicits light and moisture from the eye, and causes a bright&#13;
      colour. A more subdued light, on mingling with the moisture of&#13;
      the eye, produces a red colour. Out of these elements all other&#13;
      colours are derived. All of them are combinations of bright and&#13;
      red with white and black. Plato himself tells us that he does not&#13;
      know in what proportions they combine, and he is of opinion that&#13;
      such knowledge is granted to the gods only. To have seen the&#13;
      affinity of them to each other and their connection with light,&#13;
      is not a bad basis for a theory of colours. We must remember that&#13;
      they were not distinctly defined to his, as they are to our eyes;&#13;
      he saw them, not as they are divided in the prism, or&#13;
      artificially manufactured for the painter’s use, but as they&#13;
      exist in nature, blended and confused with one another.</p><p>We can hardly agree with him when he tells us that smells do not&#13;
      admit of kinds. He seems to think that no definite qualities can&#13;
      attach to bodies which are in a state of transition or&#13;
      evaporation; he also makes the subtle observation that smells&#13;
      must be denser than air, though thinner than water, because when&#13;
      there is an obstruction to the breathing, air can penetrate, but&#13;
      not smell.</p><p>The affections peculiar to the tongue are of various kinds, and,&#13;
      like many other affections, are caused by contraction and&#13;
      dilation. Some of them are produced by rough, others by&#13;
      abstergent, others by inflammatory substances,—these act upon the&#13;
      testing instruments of the tongue, and produce a more or less&#13;
      disagreeable sensation, while other particles congenial to the&#13;
      tongue soften and harmonize them. The instruments of taste reach&#13;
      from the tongue to the heart. Plato has a lively sense of the&#13;
      manner in which sensation and motion are communicated from one&#13;
      part of the body to the other, though he confuses the affections&#13;
      with the organs. Hearing is a blow which passes through the ear&#13;
      and ends in the region of the liver, being transmitted by means&#13;
      of the air, the brain, and the blood to the soul. The swifter&#13;
      sound is acute, the sound which moves slowly is grave. A great&#13;
      body of sound is loud, the opposite is low. Discord is produced&#13;
      by the swifter and slower motions of two sounds, and is converted&#13;
      into harmony when the swifter motions begin to pause and are&#13;
      overtaken by the slower.</p><p>The general phenomena of sensation are partly internal, but the&#13;
      more violent are caused by conflict with external objects.&#13;
      Proceeding by a method of superficial observation, Plato remarks&#13;
      that the more sensitive parts of the human frame are those which&#13;
      are least covered by flesh, as is the case with the head and the&#13;
      elbows. Man, if his head had been covered with a thicker pulp of&#13;
      flesh, might have been a longer-lived animal than he is, but&#13;
      could not have had as quick perceptions. On the other hand, the&#13;
      tongue is one of the most sensitive of organs; but then this is&#13;
      made, not to be a covering to the bones which contain the marrow&#13;
      or source of life, but with an express purpose, and in a separate&#13;
      mass.</p><p>Section 8.</p><p>We have now to consider how far in any of these speculations&#13;
      Plato approximated to the discoveries of modern science. The&#13;
      modern physical philosopher is apt to dwell exclusively on the&#13;
      absurdities of ancient ideas about science, on the haphazard&#13;
      fancies and a priori assumptions of ancient teachers, on their&#13;
      confusion of facts and ideas, on their inconsistency and&#13;
      blindness to the most obvious phenomena. He measures them not by&#13;
      what preceded them, but by what has followed them. He does not&#13;
      consider that ancient physical philosophy was not a free enquiry,&#13;
      but a growth, in which the mind was passive rather than active,&#13;
      and was incapable of resisting the impressions which flowed in&#13;
      upon it. He hardly allows to the notions of the ancients the&#13;
      merit of being the stepping-stones by which he has himself risen&#13;
      to a higher knowledge. He never reflects, how great a thing it&#13;
      was to have formed a conception, however imperfect, either of the&#13;
      human frame as a whole, or of the world as a whole. According to&#13;
      the view taken in these volumes the errors of ancient physicists&#13;
      were not separable from the intellectual conditions under which&#13;
      they lived. Their genius was their own; and they were not the&#13;
      rash and hasty generalizers which, since the days of Bacon, we&#13;
      have been apt to suppose them. The thoughts of men widened to&#13;
      receive experience; at first they seemed to know all things as in&#13;
      a dream: after a while they look at them closely and hold them in&#13;
      their hands. They begin to arrange them in classes and to connect&#13;
      causes with effects. General notions are necessary to the&#13;
      apprehension of particular facts, the metaphysical to the&#13;
      physical. Before men can observe the world, they must be able to&#13;
      conceive it.</p><p>To do justice to the subject, we should consider the physical&#13;
      philosophy of the ancients as a whole; we should remember, (1)&#13;
      that the nebular theory was the received belief of several of the&#13;
      early physicists; (2) that the development of animals out of&#13;
      fishes who came to land, and of man out of the animals, was held&#13;
      by Anaximander in the sixth century before Christ (Plut. Symp.&#13;
      Quaest; Plac. Phil.); (3) that even by Philolaus and the early&#13;
      Pythagoreans, the earth was held to be a body like the other&#13;
      stars revolving in space around the sun or a central fire; (4)&#13;
      that the beginnings of chemistry are discernible in the ‘similar&#13;
      particles’ of Anaxagoras. Also they knew or thought (5) that&#13;
      there was a sex in plants as well as in animals; (6) they were&#13;
      aware that musical notes depended on the relative length or&#13;
      tension of the strings from which they were emitted, and were&#13;
      measured by ratios of number; (7) that mathematical laws pervaded&#13;
      the world; and even qualitative differences were supposed to have&#13;
      their origin in number and figure; (8) the annihilation of matter&#13;
      was denied by several of them, and the seeming disappearance of&#13;
      it held to be a transformation only. For, although one of these&#13;
      discoveries might have been supposed to be a happy guess, taken&#13;
      together they seem to imply a great advance and almost maturity&#13;
      of natural knowledge.</p><p>We should also remember, when we attribute to the ancients hasty&#13;
      generalizations and delusions of language, that physical&#13;
      philosophy and metaphysical too have been guilty of similar&#13;
      fallacies in quite recent times. We by no means distinguish&#13;
      clearly between mind and body, between ideas and facts. Have not&#13;
      many discussions arisen about the Atomic theory in which a point&#13;
      has been confused with a material atom? Have not the natures of&#13;
      things been explained by imaginary entities, such as life or&#13;
      phlogiston, which exist in the mind only? Has not disease been&#13;
      regarded, like sin, sometimes as a negative and necessary,&#13;
      sometimes as a positive or malignant principle? The ‘idols’ of&#13;
      Bacon are nearly as common now as ever; they are inherent in the&#13;
      human mind, and when they have the most complete dominion over&#13;
      us, we are least able to perceive them. We recognize them in the&#13;
      ancients, but we fail to see them in ourselves.</p><p>Such reflections, although this is not the place in which to&#13;
      dwell upon them at length, lead us to take a favourable view of&#13;
      the speculations of the Timaeus. We should consider not how much&#13;
      Plato actually knew, but how far he has contributed to the&#13;
      general ideas of physics, or supplied the notions which, whether&#13;
      true or false, have stimulated the minds of later generations in&#13;
      the path of discovery. Some of them may seem old-fashioned, but&#13;
      may nevertheless have had a great influence in promoting system&#13;
      and assisting enquiry, while in others we hear the latest word of&#13;
      physical or metaphysical philosophy. There is also an&#13;
      intermediate class, in which Plato falls short of the truths of&#13;
      modern science, though he is not wholly unacquainted with them.&#13;
      (1) To the first class belongs the teleological theory of&#13;
      creation. Whether all things in the world can be explained as the&#13;
      result of natural laws, or whether we must not admit of&#13;
      tendencies and marks of design also, has been a question much&#13;
      disputed of late years. Even if all phenomena are the result of&#13;
      natural forces, we must admit that there are many things in&#13;
      heaven and earth which are as well expressed under the image of&#13;
      mind or design as under any other. At any rate, the language of&#13;
      Plato has been the language of natural theology down to our own&#13;
      time, nor can any description of the world wholly dispense with&#13;
      it. The notion of first and second or co-operative causes, which&#13;
      originally appears in the Timaeus, has likewise survived to our&#13;
      own day, and has been a great peace-maker between theology and&#13;
      science. Plato also approaches very near to our doctrine of the&#13;
      primary and secondary qualities of matter. (2) Another popular&#13;
      notion which is found in the Timaeus, is the feebleness of the&#13;
      human intellect—‘God knows the original qualities of things; man&#13;
      can only hope to attain to probability.’ We speak in almost the&#13;
      same words of human intelligence, but not in the same manner of&#13;
      the uncertainty of our knowledge of nature. The reason is that&#13;
      the latter is assured to us by experiment, and is not contrasted&#13;
      with the certainty of ideal or mathematical knowledge. But the&#13;
      ancient philosopher never experimented: in the Timaeus Plato&#13;
      seems to have thought that there would be impiety in making the&#13;
      attempt; he, for example, who tried experiments in colours would&#13;
      ‘forget the difference of the human and divine natures.’ Their&#13;
      indefiniteness is probably the reason why he singles them out, as&#13;
      especially incapable of being tested by experiment. (Compare the&#13;
      saying of Anaxagoras—Sext. Pyrrh.—that since snow is made of&#13;
      water and water is black, snow ought to be black.)</p><p>The greatest ‘divination’ of the ancients was the supremacy which&#13;
      they assigned to mathematics in all the realms of nature; for in&#13;
      all of them there is a foundation of mechanics. Even physiology&#13;
      partakes of figure and number; and Plato is not wrong in&#13;
      attributing them to the human frame, but in the omission to&#13;
      observe how little could be explained by them. Thus we may remark&#13;
      in passing that the most fanciful of ancient philosophies is also&#13;
      the most nearly verified in fact. The fortunate guess that the&#13;
      world is a sum of numbers and figures has been the most fruitful&#13;
      of anticipations. The ‘diatonic’ scale of the Pythagoreans and&#13;
      Plato suggested to Kepler that the secret of the distances of the&#13;
      planets from one another was to be found in mathematical&#13;
      proportions. The doctrine that the heavenly bodies all move in a&#13;
      circle is known by us to be erroneous; but without such an error&#13;
      how could the human mind have comprehended the heavens?&#13;
      Astronomy, even in modern times, has made far greater progress by&#13;
      the high a priori road than could have been attained by any&#13;
      other. Yet, strictly speaking—and the remark applies to ancient&#13;
      physics generally—this high a priori road was based upon a&#13;
      posteriori grounds. For there were no facts of which the ancients&#13;
      were so well assured by experience as facts of number. Having&#13;
      observed that they held good in a few instances, they applied&#13;
      them everywhere; and in the complexity, of which they were&#13;
      capable, found the explanation of the equally complex phenomena&#13;
      of the universe. They seemed to see them in the least things as&#13;
      well as in the greatest; in atoms, as well as in suns and stars;&#13;
      in the human body as well as in external nature. And now a&#13;
      favourite speculation of modern chemistry is the explanation of&#13;
      qualitative difference by quantitative, which is at present&#13;
      verified to a certain extent and may hereafter be of far more&#13;
      universal application. What is this but the atoms of Democritus&#13;
      and the triangles of Plato? The ancients should not be wholly&#13;
      deprived of the credit of their guesses because they were unable&#13;
      to prove them. May they not have had, like the animals, an&#13;
      instinct of something more than they knew?</p><p>Besides general notions we seem to find in the Timaeus some more&#13;
      precise approximations to the discoveries of modern physical&#13;
      science. First, the doctrine of equipoise. Plato affirms, almost&#13;
      in so many words, that nature abhors a vacuum. Whenever a&#13;
      particle is displaced, the rest push and thrust one another until&#13;
      equality is restored. We must remember that these ideas were not&#13;
      derived from any definite experiment, but were the original&#13;
      reflections of man, fresh from the first observation of nature.&#13;
      The latest word of modern philosophy is continuity and&#13;
      development, but to Plato this is the beginning and foundation of&#13;
      science; there is nothing that he is so strongly persuaded of as&#13;
      that the world is one, and that all the various existences which&#13;
      are contained in it are only the transformations of the same soul&#13;
      of the world acting on the same matter. He would have readily&#13;
      admitted that out of the protoplasm all things were formed by the&#13;
      gradual process of creation; but he would have insisted that mind&#13;
      and intelligence—not meaning by this, however, a conscious mind&#13;
      or person—were prior to them, and could alone have created them.&#13;
      Into the workings of this eternal mind or intelligence he does&#13;
      not enter further; nor would there have been any use in&#13;
      attempting to investigate the things which no eye has seen nor&#13;
      any human language can express.</p><p>Lastly, there remain two points in which he seems to touch great&#13;
      discoveries of modern times—the law of gravitation, and the&#13;
      circulation of the blood.</p><p>(1) The law of gravitation, according to Plato, is a law, not&#13;
      only of the attraction of lesser bodies to larger ones, but of&#13;
      similar bodies to similar, having a magnetic power as well as a&#13;
      principle of gravitation. He observed that earth, water, and air&#13;
      had settled down to their places, and he imagined fire or the&#13;
      exterior aether to have a place beyond air. When air seemed to go&#13;
      upwards and fire to pierce through air—when water and earth fell&#13;
      downward, they were seeking their native elements. He did not&#13;
      remark that his own explanation did not suit all phenomena; and&#13;
      the simpler explanation, which assigns to bodies degrees of&#13;
      heaviness and lightness proportioned to the mass and distance of&#13;
      the bodies which attract them, never occurred to him. Yet the&#13;
      affinities of similar substances have some effect upon the&#13;
      composition of the world, and of this Plato may be thought to&#13;
      have had an anticipation. He may be described as confusing the&#13;
      attraction of gravitation with the attraction of cohesion. The&#13;
      influence of such affinities and the chemical action of one body&#13;
      upon another in long periods of time have become a recognized&#13;
      principle of geology.</p><p>(2) Plato is perfectly aware—and he could hardly be ignorant—that&#13;
      blood is a fluid in constant motion. He also knew that blood is&#13;
      partly a solid substance consisting of several elements, which,&#13;
      as he might have observed in the use of ‘cupping-glasses’,&#13;
      decompose and die, when no longer in motion. But the specific&#13;
      discovery that the blood flows out on one side of the heart&#13;
      through the arteries and returns through the veins on the other,&#13;
      which is commonly called the circulation of the blood, was&#13;
      absolutely unknown to him.</p><p>A further study of the Timaeus suggests some after-thoughts which&#13;
      may be conveniently brought together in this place. The topics&#13;
      which I propose briefly to reconsider are (a) the relation of the&#13;
      Timaeus to the other dialogues of Plato and to the previous&#13;
      philosophy; (b) the nature of God and of creation (c) the&#13;
      morality of the Timaeus:—</p><p>(a) The Timaeus is more imaginative and less scientific than any&#13;
      other of the Platonic dialogues. It is conjectural astronomy,&#13;
      conjectural natural philosophy, conjectural medicine. The writer&#13;
      himself is constantly repeating that he is speaking what is&#13;
      probable only. The dialogue is put into the mouth of Timaeus, a&#13;
      Pythagorean philosopher, and therefore here, as in the&#13;
      Parmenides, we are in doubt how far Plato is expressing his own&#13;
      sentiments. Hence the connexion with the other dialogues is&#13;
      comparatively slight. We may fill up the lacunae of the Timaeus&#13;
      by the help of the Republic or Phaedrus: we may identify the same&#13;
      and other with the (Greek) of the Philebus. We may find in the&#13;
      Laws or in the Statesman parallels with the account of creation&#13;
      and of the first origin of man. It would be possible to frame a&#13;
      scheme in which all these various elements might have a place.&#13;
      But such a mode of proceeding would be unsatisfactory, because we&#13;
      have no reason to suppose that Plato intended his scattered&#13;
      thoughts to be collected in a system. There is a common spirit in&#13;
      his writings, and there are certain general principles, such as&#13;
      the opposition of the sensible and intellectual, and the priority&#13;
      of mind, which run through all of them; but he has no definite&#13;
      forms of words in which he consistently expresses himself. While&#13;
      the determinations of human thought are in process of creation he&#13;
      is necessarily tentative and uncertain. And there is least of&#13;
      definiteness, whenever either in describing the beginning or the&#13;
      end of the world, he has recourse to myths. These are not the&#13;
      fixed modes in which spiritual truths are revealed to him, but&#13;
      the efforts of imagination, by which at different times and in&#13;
      various manners he seeks to embody his conceptions. The clouds of&#13;
      mythology are still resting upon him, and he has not yet pierced&#13;
      ‘to the heaven of the fixed stars’ which is beyond them. It is&#13;
      safer then to admit the inconsistencies of the Timaeus, or to&#13;
      endeavour to fill up what is wanting from our own imagination,&#13;
      inspired by a study of the dialogue, than to refer to other&#13;
      Platonic writings,—and still less should we refer to the&#13;
      successors of Plato,—for the elucidation of it.</p><p>More light is thrown upon the Timaeus by a comparison of the&#13;
      previous philosophies. For the physical science of the ancients&#13;
      was traditional, descending through many generations of Ionian&#13;
      and Pythagorean philosophers. Plato does not look out upon the&#13;
      heavens and describe what he sees in them, but he builds upon the&#13;
      foundations of others, adding something out of the ‘depths of his&#13;
      own self-consciousness.’ Socrates had already spoken of God the&#13;
      creator, who made all things for the best. While he ridiculed the&#13;
      superficial explanations of phenomena which were current in his&#13;
      age, he recognised the marks both of benevolence and of design in&#13;
      the frame of man and in the world. The apparatus of winds and&#13;
      waters is contemptuously rejected by him in the Phaedo, but he&#13;
      thinks that there is a power greater than that of any Atlas in&#13;
      the ‘Best’ (Phaedo; Arist. Met.). Plato, following his master,&#13;
      affirms this principle of the best, but he acknowledges that the&#13;
      best is limited by the conditions of matter. In the generation&#13;
      before Socrates, Anaxagoras had brought together ‘Chaos’ and&#13;
      ‘Mind’; and these are connected by Plato in the Timaeus, but in&#13;
      accordance with his own mode of thinking he has interposed&#13;
      between them the idea or pattern according to which mind worked.&#13;
      The circular impulse (Greek) of the one philosopher answers to&#13;
      the circular movement (Greek) of the other. But unlike&#13;
      Anaxagoras, Plato made the sun and stars living beings and not&#13;
      masses of earth or metal. The Pythagoreans again had framed a&#13;
      world out of numbers, which they constructed into figures. Plato&#13;
      adopted their speculations and improved upon them by a more exact&#13;
      knowledge of geometry. The Atomists too made the world, if not&#13;
      out of geometrical figures, at least out of different forms of&#13;
      atoms, and these atoms resembled the triangles of Plato in being&#13;
      too small to be visible. But though the physiology of the Timaeus&#13;
      is partly borrowed from them, they are either ignored by Plato or&#13;
      referred to with a secret contempt and dislike. He looks with&#13;
      more favour on the Pythagoreans, whose intervals of number&#13;
      applied to the distances of the planets reappear in the Timaeus.&#13;
      It is probable that among the Pythagoreans living in the fourth&#13;
      century B.C., there were already some who, like Plato, made the&#13;
      earth their centre. Whether he obtained his circles of the Same&#13;
      and Other from any previous thinker is uncertain. The four&#13;
      elements are taken from Empedocles; the interstices of the&#13;
      Timaeus may also be compared with his (Greek). The passage of one&#13;
      element into another is common to Heracleitus and several of the&#13;
      Ionian philosophers. So much of a syncretist is Plato, though not&#13;
      after the manner of the Neoplatonists. For the elements which he&#13;
      borrows from others are fused and transformed by his own genius.&#13;
      On the other hand we find fewer traces in Plato of early Ionic or&#13;
      Eleatic speculation. He does not imagine the world of sense to be&#13;
      made up of opposites or to be in a perpetual flux, but to vary&#13;
      within certain limits which are controlled by what he calls the&#13;
      principle of the same. Unlike the Eleatics, who relegated the&#13;
      world to the sphere of not-being, he admits creation to have an&#13;
      existence which is real and even eternal, although dependent on&#13;
      the will of the creator. Instead of maintaining the doctrine that&#13;
      the void has a necessary place in the existence of the world, he&#13;
      rather affirms the modern thesis that nature abhors a vacuum, as&#13;
      in the Sophist he also denies the reality of not-being (Aristot.&#13;
      Metaph.). But though in these respects he differs from them, he&#13;
      is deeply penetrated by the spirit of their philosophy; he&#13;
      differs from them with reluctance, and gladly recognizes the&#13;
      ‘generous depth’ of Parmenides (Theaet.).</p><p>There is a similarity between the Timaeus and the fragments of&#13;
      Philolaus, which by some has been thought to be so great as to&#13;
      create a suspicion that they are derived from it. Philolaus is&#13;
      known to us from the Phaedo of Plato as a Pythagorean philosopher&#13;
      residing at Thebes in the latter half of the fifth century B.C.,&#13;
      after the dispersion of the original Pythagorean society. He was&#13;
      the teacher of Simmias and Cebes, who became disciples of&#13;
      Socrates. We have hardly any other information about him. The&#13;
      story that Plato had purchased three books of his writings from a&#13;
      relation is not worth repeating; it is only a fanciful way in&#13;
      which an ancient biographer dresses up the fact that there was&#13;
      supposed to be a resemblance between the two writers. Similar&#13;
      gossiping stories are told about the sources of the Republic and&#13;
      the Phaedo. That there really existed in antiquity a work passing&#13;
      under the name of Philolaus there can be no doubt. Fragments of&#13;
      this work are preserved to us, chiefly in Stobaeus, a few in&#13;
      Boethius and other writers. They remind us of the Timaeus, as&#13;
      well as of the Phaedrus and Philebus. When the writer says (Stob.&#13;
      Eclog.) that all things are either finite (definite) or infinite&#13;
      (indefinite), or a union of the two, and that this antithesis and&#13;
      synthesis pervades all art and nature, we are reminded of the&#13;
      Philebus. When he calls the centre of the world (Greek), we have&#13;
      a parallel to the Phaedrus. His distinction between the world of&#13;
      order, to which the sun and moon and the stars belong, and the&#13;
      world of disorder, which lies in the region between the moon and&#13;
      the earth, approximates to Plato’s sphere of the Same and of the&#13;
      Other. Like Plato (Tim.), he denied the above and below in space,&#13;
      and said that all things were the same in relation to a centre.&#13;
      He speaks also of the world as one and indestructible: ‘for&#13;
      neither from within nor from without does it admit of&#13;
      destruction’ (Tim). He mentions ten heavenly bodies, including&#13;
      the sun and moon, the earth and the counter-earth (Greek), and in&#13;
      the midst of them all he places the central fire, around which&#13;
      they are moving—this is hidden from the earth by the&#13;
      counter-earth. Of neither is there any trace in Plato, who makes&#13;
      the earth the centre of his system. Philolaus magnifies the&#13;
      virtues of particular numbers, especially of the number 10 (Stob.&#13;
      Eclog.), and descants upon odd and even numbers, after the manner&#13;
      of the later Pythagoreans. It is worthy of remark that these&#13;
      mystical fancies are nowhere to be found in the writings of&#13;
      Plato, although the importance of number as a form and also an&#13;
      instrument of thought is ever present to his mind. Both Philolaus&#13;
      and Plato agree in making the world move in certain numerical&#13;
      ratios according to a musical scale: though Bockh is of opinion&#13;
      that the two scales, of Philolaus and of the Timaeus, do not&#13;
      correspond...We appear not to be sufficiently acquainted with the&#13;
      early Pythagoreans to know how far the statements contained in&#13;
      these fragments corresponded with their doctrines; and we&#13;
      therefore cannot pronounce, either in favour of the genuineness&#13;
      of the fragments, with Bockh and Zeller, or, with Valentine Rose&#13;
      and Schaarschmidt, against them. But it is clear that they throw&#13;
      but little light upon the Timaeus, and that their resemblance to&#13;
      it has been exaggerated.</p><p>That there is a degree of confusion and indistinctness in Plato’s&#13;
      account both of man and of the universe has been already&#13;
      acknowledged. We cannot tell (nor could Plato himself have told)&#13;
      where the figure or myth ends and the philosophical truth begins;&#13;
      we cannot explain (nor could Plato himself have explained to us)&#13;
      the relation of the ideas to appearance, of which one is the copy&#13;
      of the other, and yet of all things in the world they are the&#13;
      most opposed and unlike. This opposition is presented to us in&#13;
      many forms, as the antithesis of the one and many, of the finite&#13;
      and infinite, of the intelligible and sensible, of the&#13;
      unchangeable and the changing, of the indivisible and the&#13;
      divisible, of the fixed stars and the planets, of the creative&#13;
      mind and the primeval chaos. These pairs of opposites are so many&#13;
      aspects of the great opposition between ideas and phenomena—they&#13;
      easily pass into one another; and sometimes the two members of&#13;
      the relation differ in kind, sometimes only in degree. As in&#13;
      Aristotle’s matter and form the connexion between them is really&#13;
      inseparable; for if we attempt to separate them they become&#13;
      devoid of content and therefore indistinguishable; there is no&#13;
      difference between the idea of which nothing can be predicated,&#13;
      and the chaos or matter which has no perceptible&#13;
      qualities—between Being in the abstract and Nothing. Yet we are&#13;
      frequently told that the one class of them is the reality and the&#13;
      other appearance; and one is often spoken of as the double or&#13;
      reflection of the other. For Plato never clearly saw that both&#13;
      elements had an equal place in mind and in nature; and hence,&#13;
      especially when we argue from isolated passages in his writings,&#13;
      or attempt to draw what appear to us to be the natural inferences&#13;
      from them, we are full of perplexity. There is a similar&#13;
      confusion about necessity and free-will, and about the state of&#13;
      the soul after death. Also he sometimes supposes that God is&#13;
      immanent in the world, sometimes that he is transcendent. And&#13;
      having no distinction of objective and subjective, he passes&#13;
      imperceptibly from one to the other; from intelligence to soul,&#13;
      from eternity to time. These contradictions may be softened or&#13;
      concealed by a judicious use of language, but they cannot be&#13;
      wholly got rid of. That an age of intellectual transition must&#13;
      also be one of inconsistency; that the creative is opposed to the&#13;
      critical or defining habit of mind or time, has been often&#13;
      repeated by us. But, as Plato would say, ‘there is no harm in&#13;
      repeating twice or thrice’ (Laws) what is important for the&#13;
      understanding of a great author.</p><p>It has not, however, been observed, that the confusion partly&#13;
      arises out of the elements of opposing philosophies which are&#13;
      preserved in him. He holds these in solution, he brings them into&#13;
      relation with one another, but he does not perfectly harmonize&#13;
      them. They are part of his own mind, and he is incapable of&#13;
      placing himself outside of them and criticizing them. They grow&#13;
      as he grows; they are a kind of composition with which his own&#13;
      philosophy is overlaid. In early life he fancies that he has&#13;
      mastered them: but he is also mastered by them; and in language&#13;
      (Sophist) which may be compared with the hesitating tone of the&#13;
      Timaeus, he confesses in his later years that they are full of&#13;
      obscurity to him. He attributes new meanings to the words of&#13;
      Parmenides and Heracleitus; but at times the old Eleatic&#13;
      philosophy appears to go beyond him; then the world of phenomena&#13;
      disappears, but the doctrine of ideas is also reduced to&#13;
      nothingness. All of them are nearer to one another than they&#13;
      themselves supposed, and nearer to him than he supposed. All of&#13;
      them are antagonistic to sense and have an affinity to number and&#13;
      measure and a presentiment of ideas. Even in Plato they still&#13;
      retain their contentious or controversial character, which was&#13;
      developed by the growth of dialectic. He is never able to&#13;
      reconcile the first causes of the pre-Socratic philosophers with&#13;
      the final causes of Socrates himself. There is no intelligible&#13;
      account of the relation of numbers to the universal ideas, or of&#13;
      universals to the idea of good. He found them all three, in the&#13;
      Pythagorean philosophy and in the teaching of Socrates and of the&#13;
      Megarians respectively; and, because they all furnished modes of&#13;
      explaining and arranging phenomena, he is unwilling to give up&#13;
      any of them, though he is unable to unite them in a consistent&#13;
      whole.</p><p>Lastly, Plato, though an idealist philosopher, is Greek and not&#13;
      Oriental in spirit and feeling. He is no mystic or ascetic; he is&#13;
      not seeking in vain to get rid of matter or to find absorption in&#13;
      the divine nature, or in the Soul of the universe. And therefore&#13;
      we are not surprised to find that his philosophy in the Timaeus&#13;
      returns at last to a worship of the heavens, and that to him, as&#13;
      to other Greeks, nature, though containing a remnant of evil, is&#13;
      still glorious and divine. He takes away or drops the veil of&#13;
      mythology, and presents her to us in what appears to him to be&#13;
      the form-fairer and truer far—of mathematical figures. It is this&#13;
      element in the Timaeus, no less than its affinity to certain&#13;
      Pythagorean speculations, which gives it a character not wholly&#13;
      in accordance with the other dialogues of Plato.</p><p>(b) The Timaeus contains an assertion perhaps more distinct than&#13;
      is found in any of the other dialogues (Rep.; Laws) of the&#13;
      goodness of God. ‘He was good himself, and he fashioned the good&#13;
      everywhere.’ He was not ‘a jealous God,’ and therefore he desired&#13;
      that all other things should be equally good. He is the IDEA of&#13;
      good who has now become a person, and speaks and is spoken of as&#13;
      God. Yet his personality seems to appear only in the act of&#13;
      creation. In so far as he works with his eye fixed upon an&#13;
      eternal pattern he is like the human artificer in the Republic.&#13;
      Here the theory of Platonic ideas intrudes upon us. God, like&#13;
      man, is supposed to have an ideal of which Plato is unable to&#13;
      tell us the origin. He may be said, in the language of modern&#13;
      philosophy, to resolve the divine mind into subject and object.</p><p>The first work of creation is perfected, the second begins under&#13;
      the direction of inferior ministers. The supreme God is withdrawn&#13;
      from the world and returns to his own accustomed nature (Tim.).&#13;
      As in the Statesman, he retires to his place of view. So early&#13;
      did the Epicurean doctrine take possession of the Greek mind, and&#13;
      so natural is it to the heart of man, when he has once passed out&#13;
      of the stage of mythology into that of rational religion. For he&#13;
      sees the marks of design in the world; but he no longer sees or&#13;
      fancies that he sees God walking in the garden or haunting stream&#13;
      or mountain. He feels also that he must put God as far as&#13;
      possible out of the way of evil, and therefore he banishes him&#13;
      from an evil world. Plato is sensible of the difficulty; and he&#13;
      often shows that he is desirous of justifying the ways of God to&#13;
      man. Yet on the other hand, in the Tenth Book of the Laws he&#13;
      passes a censure on those who say that the Gods have no care of&#13;
      human things.</p><p>The creation of the world is the impression of order on a&#13;
      previously existing chaos. The formula of Anaxagoras—‘all things&#13;
      were in chaos or confusion, and then mind came and disposed&#13;
      them’—is a summary of the first part of the Timaeus. It is true&#13;
      that of a chaos without differences no idea could be formed. All&#13;
      was not mixed but one; and therefore it was not difficult for the&#13;
      later Platonists to draw inferences by which they were enabled to&#13;
      reconcile the narrative of the Timaeus with the Mosaic account of&#13;
      the creation. Neither when we speak of mind or intelligence, do&#13;
      we seem to get much further in our conception than circular&#13;
      motion, which was deemed to be the most perfect. Plato, like&#13;
      Anaxagoras, while commencing his theory of the universe with&#13;
      ideas of mind and of the best, is compelled in the execution of&#13;
      his design to condescend to the crudest physics.</p><p>(c) The morality of the Timaeus is singular, and it is difficult&#13;
      to adjust the balance between the two elements of it. The&#13;
      difficulty which Plato feels, is that which all of us feel, and&#13;
      which is increased in our own day by the progress of physical&#13;
      science, how the responsibility of man is to be reconciled with&#13;
      his dependence on natural causes. And sometimes, like other men,&#13;
      he is more impressed by one aspect of human life, sometimes by&#13;
      the other. In the Republic he represents man as freely choosing&#13;
      his own lot in a state prior to birth—a conception which, if&#13;
      taken literally, would still leave him subject to the dominion of&#13;
      necessity in his after life; in the Statesman he supposes the&#13;
      human race to be preserved in the world only by a divine&#13;
      interposition; while in the Timaeus the supreme God commissions&#13;
      the inferior deities to avert from him all but self-inflicted&#13;
      evils—words which imply that all the evils of men are really&#13;
      self-inflicted. And here, like Plato (the insertion of a note in&#13;
      the text of an ancient writer is a literary curiosity worthy of&#13;
      remark), we may take occasion to correct an error. For we too&#13;
      hastily said that Plato in the Timaeus regarded all ‘vices and&#13;
      crimes as involuntary.’ But the fact is that he is inconsistent&#13;
      with himself; in one and the same passage vice is attributed to&#13;
      the relaxation of the bodily frame, and yet we are exhorted to&#13;
      avoid it and pursue virtue. It is also admitted that good and&#13;
      evil conduct are to be attributed respectively to good and evil&#13;
      laws and institutions. These cannot be given by individuals to&#13;
      themselves; and therefore human actions, in so far as they are&#13;
      dependent upon them, are regarded by Plato as involuntary rather&#13;
      than voluntary. Like other writers on this subject, he is unable&#13;
      to escape from some degree of self-contradiction. He had learned&#13;
      from Socrates that vice is ignorance, and suddenly the doctrine&#13;
      seems to him to be confirmed by observing how much of the good&#13;
      and bad in human character depends on the bodily constitution. So&#13;
      in modern times the speculative doctrine of necessity has often&#13;
      been supported by physical facts.</p><p>The Timaeus also contains an anticipation of the stoical life&#13;
      according to nature. Man contemplating the heavens is to regulate&#13;
      his erring life according to them. He is to partake of the repose&#13;
      of nature and of the order of nature, to bring the variable&#13;
      principle in himself into harmony with the principle of the same.&#13;
      The ethics of the Timaeus may be summed up in the single idea of&#13;
      ‘law.’ To feel habitually that he is part of the order of the&#13;
      universe, is one of the highest ethical motives of which man is&#13;
      capable. Something like this is what Plato means when he speaks&#13;
      of the soul ‘moving about the same in unchanging thought of the&#13;
      same.’ He does not explain how man is acted upon by the lesser&#13;
      influences of custom or of opinion; or how the commands of the&#13;
      soul watching in the citadel are conveyed to the bodily organs.&#13;
      But this perhaps, to use once more expressions of his own, ‘is&#13;
      part of another subject’ or ‘may be more suitably discussed on&#13;
      some other occasion.’</p><p>There is no difficulty, by the help of Aristotle and later&#13;
      writers, in criticizing the Timaeus of Plato, in pointing out the&#13;
      inconsistencies of the work, in dwelling on the ignorance of&#13;
      anatomy displayed by the author, in showing the fancifulness or&#13;
      unmeaningness of some of his reasons. But the Timaeus still&#13;
      remains the greatest effort of the human mind to conceive the&#13;
      world as a whole which the genius of antiquity has bequeathed to&#13;
      us.</p><p>One more aspect of the Timaeus remains to be considered—the&#13;
      mythological or geographical. Is it not a wonderful thing that a&#13;
      few pages of one of Plato’s dialogues have grown into a great&#13;
      legend, not confined to Greece only, but spreading far and wide&#13;
      over the nations of Europe and reaching even to Egypt and Asia?&#13;
      Like the tale of Troy, or the legend of the Ten Tribes (Ewald,&#13;
      Hist. of Isr.), which perhaps originated in a few verses of II&#13;
      Esdras, it has become famous, because it has coincided with a&#13;
      great historical fact. Like the romance of King Arthur, which has&#13;
      had so great a charm, it has found a way over the seas from one&#13;
      country and language to another. It inspired the navigators of&#13;
      the fifteenth and sixteenth centuries; it foreshadowed the&#13;
      discovery of America. It realized the fiction so natural to the&#13;
      human mind, because it answered the enquiry about the origin of&#13;
      the arts, that there had somewhere existed an ancient primitive&#13;
      civilization. It might find a place wherever men chose to look&#13;
      for it; in North, South, East, or West; in the Islands of the&#13;
      Blest; before the entrance of the Straits of Gibraltar, in Sweden&#13;
      or in Palestine. It mattered little whether the description in&#13;
      Plato agreed with the locality assigned to it or not. It was a&#13;
      legend so adapted to the human mind that it made a habitation for&#13;
      itself in any country. It was an island in the clouds, which&#13;
      might be seen anywhere by the eye of faith. It was a subject&#13;
      especially congenial to the ponderous industry of certain French&#13;
      and Swedish writers, who delighted in heaping up learning of all&#13;
      sorts but were incapable of using it.</p><p>M. Martin has written a valuable dissertation on the opinions&#13;
      entertained respecting the Island of Atlantis in ancient and&#13;
      modern times. It is a curious chapter in the history of the human&#13;
      mind. The tale of Atlantis is the fabric of a vision, but it has&#13;
      never ceased to interest mankind. It was variously regarded by&#13;
      the ancients themselves. The stronger heads among them, like&#13;
      Strabo and Longinus, were as little disposed to believe in the&#13;
      truth of it as the modern reader in Gulliver or Robinson Crusoe.&#13;
      On the other hand there is no kind or degree of absurdity or&#13;
      fancy in which the more foolish writers, both of antiquity and of&#13;
      modern times, have not indulged respecting it. The&#13;
      Neo-Platonists, loyal to their master, like some commentators on&#13;
      the Christian Scriptures, sought to give an allegorical meaning&#13;
      to what they also believed to be an historical fact. It was as if&#13;
      some one in our own day were to convert the poems of Homer into&#13;
      an allegory of the Christian religion, at the same time&#13;
      maintaining them to be an exact and veritable history. In the&#13;
      Middle Ages the legend seems to have been half-forgotten until&#13;
      revived by the discovery of America. It helped to form the Utopia&#13;
      of Sir Thomas More and the New Atlantis of Bacon, although&#13;
      probably neither of those great men were at all imposed upon by&#13;
      the fiction. It was most prolific in the seventeenth or in the&#13;
      early part of the eighteenth century, when the human mind,&#13;
      seeking for Utopias or inventing them, was glad to escape out of&#13;
      the dulness of the present into the romance of the past or some&#13;
      ideal of the future. The later forms of such narratives contained&#13;
      features taken from the Edda, as well as from the Old and New&#13;
      Testament; also from the tales of missionaries and the&#13;
      experiences of travellers and of colonists.</p><p>The various opinions respecting the Island of Atlantis have no&#13;
      interest for us except in so far as they illustrate the&#13;
      extravagances of which men are capable. But this is a real&#13;
      interest and a serious lesson, if we remember that now as&#13;
      formerly the human mind is liable to be imposed upon by the&#13;
      illusions of the past, which are ever assuming some new form.</p><p>When we have shaken off the rubbish of ages, there remain one or&#13;
      two questions of which the investigation has a permanent value:—</p><p>1. Did Plato derive the legend of Atlantis from an Egyptian&#13;
      source? It may be replied that there is no such legend in any&#13;
      writer previous to Plato; neither in Homer, nor in Pindar, nor in&#13;
      Herodotus is there any mention of an Island of Atlantis, nor any&#13;
      reference to it in Aristotle, nor any citation of an earlier&#13;
      writer by a later one in which it is to be found. Nor have any&#13;
      traces been discovered hitherto in Egyptian monuments of a&#13;
      connexion between Greece and Egypt older than the eighth or ninth&#13;
      century B.C. It is true that Proclus, writing in the fifth&#13;
      century after Christ, tells us of stones and columns in Egypt on&#13;
      which the history of the Island of Atlantis was engraved. The&#13;
      statement may be false—there are similar tales about columns set&#13;
      up ‘by the Canaanites whom Joshua drove out’ (Procop.); but even&#13;
      if true, it would only show that the legend, 800 years after the&#13;
      time of Plato, had been transferred to Egypt, and inscribed, not,&#13;
      like other forgeries, in books, but on stone. Probably in the&#13;
      Alexandrian age, when Egypt had ceased to have a history and&#13;
      began to appropriate the legends of other nations, many such&#13;
      monuments were to be found of events which had become famous in&#13;
      that or other countries. The oldest witness to the story is said&#13;
      to be Crantor, a Stoic philosopher who lived a generation later&#13;
      than Plato, and therefore may have borrowed it from him. The&#13;
      statement is found in Proclus; but we require better assurance&#13;
      than Proclus can give us before we accept this or any other&#13;
      statement which he makes.</p><p>Secondly, passing from the external to the internal evidence, we&#13;
      may remark that the story is far more likely to have been&#13;
      invented by Plato than to have been brought by Solon from Egypt.&#13;
      That is another part of his legend which Plato also seeks to&#13;
      impose upon us. The verisimilitude which he has given to the tale&#13;
      is a further reason for suspecting it; for he could easily&#13;
      ‘invent Egyptian or any other tales’ (Phaedrus). Are not the&#13;
      words, ‘The truth of the story is a great advantage,’ if we read&#13;
      between the lines, an indication of the fiction? It is only a&#13;
      legend that Solon went to Egypt, and if he did he could not have&#13;
      conversed with Egyptian priests or have read records in their&#13;
      temples. The truth is that the introduction is a mosaic work of&#13;
      small touches which, partly by their minuteness, and also by&#13;
      their seeming probability, win the confidence of the reader. Who&#13;
      would desire better evidence than that of Critias, who had heard&#13;
      the narrative in youth when the memory is strongest at the age of&#13;
      ten from his grandfather Critias, an old man of ninety, who in&#13;
      turn had heard it from Solon himself? Is not the famous&#13;
      expression—‘You Hellenes are ever children and there is no&#13;
      knowledge among you hoary with age,’ really a compliment to the&#13;
      Athenians who are described in these words as ‘ever young’? And&#13;
      is the thought expressed in them to be attributed to the learning&#13;
      of the Egyptian priest, and not rather to the genius of Plato? Or&#13;
      when the Egyptian says—‘Hereafter at our leisure we will take up&#13;
      the written documents and examine in detail the exact truth about&#13;
      these things’—what is this but a literary trick by which Plato&#13;
      sets off his narrative? Could any war between Athens and the&#13;
      Island of Atlantis have really coincided with the struggle&#13;
      between the Greeks and Persians, as is sufficiently hinted though&#13;
      not expressly stated in the narrative of Plato? And whence came&#13;
      the tradition to Egypt? or in what does the story consist except&#13;
      in the war between the two rival powers and the submersion of&#13;
      both of them? And how was the tale transferred to the poem of&#13;
      Solon? ‘It is not improbable,’ says Mr. Grote, ‘that Solon did&#13;
      leave an unfinished Egyptian poem’ (Plato). But are probabilities&#13;
      for which there is not a tittle of evidence, and which are&#13;
      without any parallel, to be deemed worthy of attention by the&#13;
      critic? How came the poem of Solon to disappear in antiquity? or&#13;
      why did Plato, if the whole narrative was known to him, break off&#13;
      almost at the beginning of it?</p><p>While therefore admiring the diligence and erudition of M.&#13;
      Martin, we cannot for a moment suppose that the tale was told to&#13;
      Solon by an Egyptian priest, nor can we believe that Solon wrote&#13;
      a poem upon the theme which was thus suggested to him—a poem&#13;
      which disappeared in antiquity; or that the Island of Atlantis or&#13;
      the antediluvian Athens ever had any existence except in the&#13;
      imagination of Plato. Martin is of opinion that Plato would have&#13;
      been terrified if he could have foreseen the endless fancies to&#13;
      which his Island of Atlantis has given occasion. Rather he would&#13;
      have been infinitely amused if he could have known that his gift&#13;
      of invention would have deceived M. Martin himself into the&#13;
      belief that the tradition was brought from Egypt by Solon and&#13;
      made the subject of a poem by him. M. Martin may also be gently&#13;
      censured for citing without sufficient discrimination ancient&#13;
      authors having very different degrees of authority and value.</p><p>2. It is an interesting and not unimportant question which is&#13;
      touched upon by Martin, whether the Atlantis of Plato in any&#13;
      degree held out a guiding light to the early navigators. He is&#13;
      inclined to think that there is no real connexion between them.&#13;
      But surely the discovery of the New World was preceded by a&#13;
      prophetic anticipation of it, which, like the hope of a Messiah,&#13;
      was entering into the hearts of men? And this hope was nursed by&#13;
      ancient tradition, which had found expression from time to time&#13;
      in the celebrated lines of Seneca and in many other places. This&#13;
      tradition was sustained by the great authority of Plato, and&#13;
      therefore the legend of the Island of Atlantis, though not&#13;
      closely connected with the voyages of the early navigators, may&#13;
      be truly said to have contributed indirectly to the great&#13;
      discovery.</p><p>The Timaeus of Plato, like the Protagoras and several portions of&#13;
      the Phaedrus and Republic, was translated by Cicero into Latin.&#13;
      About a fourth, comprehending with lacunae the first portion of&#13;
      the dialogue, is preserved in several MSS. These generally agree,&#13;
      and therefore may be supposed to be derived from a single&#13;
      original. The version is very faithful, and is a remarkable&#13;
      monument of Cicero’s skill in managing the difficult and&#13;
      intractable Greek. In his treatise De Natura Deorum, he also&#13;
      refers to the Timaeus, which, speaking in the person of Velleius&#13;
      the Epicurean, he severely criticises.</p><p>The commentary of Proclus on the Timaeus is a wonderful monument&#13;
      of the silliness and prolixity of the Alexandrian Age. It extends&#13;
      to about thirty pages of the book, and is thirty times the length&#13;
      of the original. It is surprising that this voluminous work&#13;
      should have found a translator (Thomas Taylor, a kindred spirit,&#13;
      who was himself a Neo-Platonist, after the fashion, not of the&#13;
      fifth or sixteenth, but of the nineteenth century A.D.). The&#13;
      commentary is of little or no value, either in a philosophical or&#13;
      philological point of view. The writer is unable to explain&#13;
      particular passages in any precise manner, and he is equally&#13;
      incapable of grasping the whole. He does not take words in their&#13;
      simple meaning or sentences in their natural connexion. He is&#13;
      thinking, not of the context in Plato, but of the contemporary&#13;
      Pythagorean philosophers and their wordy strife. He finds nothing&#13;
      in the text which he does not bring to it. He is full of&#13;
      Porphyry, Iamblichus and Plotinus, of misapplied logic, of&#13;
      misunderstood grammar, and of the Orphic theology.</p><p>Although such a work can contribute little or nothing to the&#13;
      understanding of Plato, it throws an interesting light on the&#13;
      Alexandrian times; it realizes how a philosophy made up of words&#13;
      only may create a deep and widespread enthusiasm, how the forms&#13;
      of logic and rhetoric may usurp the place of reason and truth,&#13;
      how all philosophies grow faded and discoloured, and are patched&#13;
      and made up again like worn-out garments, and retain only a&#13;
      second-hand existence. He who would study this degeneracy of&#13;
      philosophy and of the Greek mind in the original cannot do better&#13;
      than devote a few of his days and nights to the commentary of&#13;
      Proclus on the Timaeus.</p><p>A very different account must be given of the short work entitled&#13;
      ‘Timaeus Locrus,’ which is a brief but clear analysis of the&#13;
      Timaeus of Plato, omitting the introduction or dialogue and&#13;
      making a few small additions. It does not allude to the original&#13;
      from which it is taken; it is quite free from mysticism and&#13;
      Neo-Platonism. In length it does not exceed a fifth part of the&#13;
      Timaeus. It is written in the Doric dialect, and contains several&#13;
      words which do not occur in classical Greek. No other indication&#13;
      of its date, except this uncertain one of language, appears in&#13;
      it. In several places the writer has simplified the language of&#13;
      Plato, in a few others he has embellished and exaggerated it. He&#13;
      generally preserves the thought of the original, but does not&#13;
      copy the words. On the whole this little tract faithfully&#13;
      reflects the meaning and spirit of the Timaeus.</p><p>From the garden of the Timaeus, as from the other dialogues of&#13;
      Plato, we may still gather a few flowers and present them at&#13;
      parting to the reader. There is nothing in Plato grander and&#13;
      simpler than the conversation between Solon and the Egyptian&#13;
      priest, in which the youthfulness of Hellas is contrasted with&#13;
      the antiquity of Egypt. Here are to be found the famous words, ‘O&#13;
      Solon, Solon, you Hellenes are ever young, and there is not an&#13;
      old man among you’—which may be compared to the lively saying of&#13;
      Hegel, that ‘Greek history began with the youth Achilles and left&#13;
      off with the youth Alexander.’ The numerous arts of&#13;
      verisimilitude by which Plato insinuates into the mind of the&#13;
      reader the truth of his narrative have been already referred to.&#13;
      Here occur a sentence or two not wanting in Platonic irony&#13;
      (Greek—a word to the wise). ‘To know or tell the origin of the&#13;
      other divinities is beyond us, and we must accept the traditions&#13;
      of the men of old time who affirm themselves to be the offspring&#13;
      of the Gods—that is what they say—and they must surely have known&#13;
      their own ancestors. How can we doubt the word of the children of&#13;
      the Gods? Although they give no probable or certain proofs,&#13;
      still, as they declare that they are speaking of what took place&#13;
      in their own family, we must conform to custom and believe them.’&#13;
      ‘Our creators well knew that women and other animals would some&#13;
      day be framed out of men, and they further knew that many animals&#13;
      would require the use of nails for many purposes; wherefore they&#13;
      fashioned in men at their first creation the rudiments of nails.’&#13;
      Or once more, let us reflect on two serious passages in which the&#13;
      order of the world is supposed to find a place in the human soul&#13;
      and to infuse harmony into it. ‘The soul, when touching anything&#13;
      that has essence, whether dispersed in parts or undivided, is&#13;
      stirred through all her powers to declare the sameness or&#13;
      difference of that thing and some other; and to what individuals&#13;
      are related, and by what affected, and in what way and how and&#13;
      when, both in the world of generation and in the world of&#13;
      immutable being. And when reason, which works with equal truth,&#13;
      whether she be in the circle of the diverse or of the same,—in&#13;
      voiceless silence holding her onward course in the sphere of the&#13;
      self-moved,—when reason, I say, is hovering around the sensible&#13;
      world, and when the circle of the diverse also moving truly&#13;
      imparts the intimations of sense to the whole soul, then arise&#13;
      opinions and beliefs sure and certain. But when reason is&#13;
      concerned with the rational, and the circle of the same moving&#13;
      smoothly declares it, then intelligence and knowledge are&#13;
      necessarily perfected;’ where, proceeding in a similar path of&#13;
      contemplation, he supposes the inward and the outer world&#13;
      mutually to imply each other. ‘God invented and gave us sight to&#13;
      the end that we might behold the courses of intelligence in the&#13;
      heaven, and apply them to the courses of our own intelligence&#13;
      which are akin to them, the unperturbed to the perturbed; and&#13;
      that we, learning them and partaking of the natural truth of&#13;
      reason, might imitate the absolutely unerring courses of God and&#13;
      regulate our own vagaries.’ Or let us weigh carefully some other&#13;
      profound thoughts, such as the following. ‘He who neglects&#13;
      education walks lame to the end of his life, and returns&#13;
      imperfect and good for nothing to the world below.’ ‘The father&#13;
      and maker of all this universe is past finding out; and even if&#13;
      we found him, to tell of him to all men would be impossible.’&#13;
      ‘Let me tell you then why the Creator made this world of&#13;
      generation. He was good, and the good can never have jealousy of&#13;
      anything. And being free from jealousy, he desired that all&#13;
      things should be as like himself as they could be. This is in the&#13;
      truest sense the origin of creation and of the world, as we shall&#13;
      do well in believing on the testimony of wise men: God desired&#13;
      that all things should be good and nothing bad, so far as this&#13;
      was attainable.’ This is the leading thought in the Timaeus, just&#13;
      as the IDEA of Good is the leading thought of the Republic, the&#13;
      one expression describing the personal, the other the impersonal&#13;
      Good or God, differing in form rather than in substance, and both&#13;
      equally implying to the mind of Plato a divine reality. The&#13;
      slight touch, perhaps ironical, contained in the words, ‘as we&#13;
      shall do well in believing on the testimony of wise men,’ is very&#13;
      characteristic of Plato.</p><p>TIMAEUS.</p><p>PERSONS OF THE DIALOGUE: Socrates, Critias, Timaeus, Hermocrates.</p><p>SOCRATES: One, two, three; but where, my dear Timaeus, is the&#13;
      fourth of those who were yesterday my guests and are to be my&#13;
      entertainers to-day?</p><p>TIMAEUS: He has been taken ill, Socrates; for he would not&#13;
      willingly have been absent from this gathering.</p><p>SOCRATES: Then, if he is not coming, you and the two others must&#13;
      supply his place.</p><p>TIMAEUS: Certainly, and we will do all that we can; having been&#13;
      handsomely entertained by you yesterday, those of us who remain&#13;
      should be only too glad to return your hospitality.</p><p>SOCRATES: Do you remember what were the points of which I&#13;
      required you to speak?</p><p>TIMAEUS: We remember some of them, and you will be here to remind&#13;
      us of anything which we have forgotten: or rather, if we are not&#13;
      troubling you, will you briefly recapitulate the whole, and then&#13;
      the particulars will be more firmly fixed in our memories?</p><p>SOCRATES: To be sure I will: the chief theme of my yesterday’s&#13;
      discourse was the State—how constituted and of what citizens&#13;
      composed it would seem likely to be most perfect.</p><p>TIMAEUS: Yes, Socrates; and what you said of it was very much to&#13;
      our mind.</p><p>SOCRATES: Did we not begin by separating the husbandmen and the&#13;
      artisans from the class of defenders of the State?</p><p>TIMAEUS: Yes.</p><p>SOCRATES: And when we had given to each one that single&#13;
      employment and particular art which was suited to his nature, we&#13;
      spoke of those who were intended to be our warriors, and said&#13;
      that they were to be guardians of the city against attacks from&#13;
      within as well as from without, and to have no other employment;&#13;
      they were to be merciful in judging their subjects, of whom they&#13;
      were by nature friends, but fierce to their enemies, when they&#13;
      came across them in battle.</p><p>TIMAEUS: Exactly.</p><p>SOCRATES: We said, if I am not mistaken, that the guardians&#13;
      should be gifted with a temperament in a high degree both&#13;
      passionate and philosophical; and that then they would be as they&#13;
      ought to be, gentle to their friends and fierce with their&#13;
      enemies.</p><p>TIMAEUS: Certainly.</p><p>SOCRATES: And what did we say of their education? Were they not&#13;
      to be trained in gymnastic, and music, and all other sorts of&#13;
      knowledge which were proper for them?</p><p>TIMAEUS: Very true.</p><p>SOCRATES: And being thus trained they were not to consider gold&#13;
      or silver or anything else to be their own private property; they&#13;
      were to be like hired troops, receiving pay for keeping guard&#13;
      from those who were protected by them—the pay was to be no more&#13;
      than would suffice for men of simple life; and they were to spend&#13;
      in common, and to live together in the continual practice of&#13;
      virtue, which was to be their sole pursuit.</p><p>TIMAEUS: That was also said.</p><p>SOCRATES: Neither did we forget the women; of whom we declared,&#13;
      that their natures should be assimilated and brought into harmony&#13;
      with those of the men, and that common pursuits should be&#13;
      assigned to them both in time of war and in their ordinary life.</p><p>TIMAEUS: That, again, was as you say.</p><p>SOCRATES: And what about the procreation of children? Or rather&#13;
      was not the proposal too singular to be forgotten? for all wives&#13;
      and children were to be in common, to the intent that no one&#13;
      should ever know his own child, but they were to imagine that&#13;
      they were all one family; those who were within a suitable limit&#13;
      of age were to be brothers and sisters, those who were of an&#13;
      elder generation parents and grandparents, and those of a&#13;
      younger, children and grandchildren.</p><p>TIMAEUS: Yes, and the proposal is easy to remember, as you say.</p><p>SOCRATES: And do you also remember how, with a view of securing&#13;
      as far as we could the best breed, we said that the chief&#13;
      magistrates, male and female, should contrive secretly, by the&#13;
      use of certain lots, so to arrange the nuptial meeting, that the&#13;
      bad of either sex and the good of either sex might pair with&#13;
      their like; and there was to be no quarrelling on this account,&#13;
      for they would imagine that the union was a mere accident, and&#13;
      was to be attributed to the lot?</p><p>TIMAEUS: I remember.</p><p>SOCRATES: And you remember how we said that the children of the&#13;
      good parents were to be educated, and the children of the bad&#13;
      secretly dispersed among the inferior citizens; and while they&#13;
      were all growing up the rulers were to be on the look-out, and to&#13;
      bring up from below in their turn those who were worthy, and&#13;
      those among themselves who were unworthy were to take the places&#13;
      of those who came up?</p><p>TIMAEUS: True.</p><p>SOCRATES: Then have I now given you all the heads of our&#13;
      yesterday’s discussion? Or is there anything more, my dear&#13;
      Timaeus, which has been omitted?</p><p>TIMAEUS: Nothing, Socrates; it was just as you have said.</p><p>SOCRATES: I should like, before proceeding further, to tell you&#13;
      how I feel about the State which we have described. I might&#13;
      compare myself to a person who, on beholding beautiful animals&#13;
      either created by the painter’s art, or, better still, alive but&#13;
      at rest, is seized with a desire of seeing them in motion or&#13;
      engaged in some struggle or conflict to which their forms appear&#13;
      suited; this is my feeling about the State which we have been&#13;
      describing. There are conflicts which all cities undergo, and I&#13;
      should like to hear some one tell of our own city carrying on a&#13;
      struggle against her neighbours, and how she went out to war in a&#13;
      becoming manner, and when at war showed by the greatness of her&#13;
      actions and the magnanimity of her words in dealing with other&#13;
      cities a result worthy of her training and education. Now I,&#13;
      Critias and Hermocrates, am conscious that I myself should never&#13;
      be able to celebrate the city and her citizens in a befitting&#13;
      manner, and I am not surprised at my own incapacity; to me the&#13;
      wonder is rather that the poets present as well as past are no&#13;
      better—not that I mean to depreciate them; but every one can see&#13;
      that they are a tribe of imitators, and will imitate best and&#13;
      most easily the life in which they have been brought up; while&#13;
      that which is beyond the range of a man’s education he finds hard&#13;
      to carry out in action, and still harder adequately to represent&#13;
      in language. I am aware that the Sophists have plenty of brave&#13;
      words and fair conceits, but I am afraid that being only&#13;
      wanderers from one city to another, and having never had&#13;
      habitations of their own, they may fail in their conception of&#13;
      philosophers and statesmen, and may not know what they do and say&#13;
      in time of war, when they are fighting or holding parley with&#13;
      their enemies. And thus people of your class are the only ones&#13;
      remaining who are fitted by nature and education to take part at&#13;
      once both in politics and philosophy. Here is Timaeus, of Locris&#13;
      in Italy, a city which has admirable laws, and who is himself in&#13;
      wealth and rank the equal of any of his fellow-citizens; he has&#13;
      held the most important and honourable offices in his own state,&#13;
      and, as I believe, has scaled the heights of all philosophy; and&#13;
      here is Critias, whom every Athenian knows to be no novice in the&#13;
      matters of which we are speaking; and as to Hermocrates, I am&#13;
      assured by many witnesses that his genius and education qualify&#13;
      him to take part in any speculation of the kind. And therefore&#13;
      yesterday when I saw that you wanted me to describe the formation&#13;
      of the State, I readily assented, being very well aware, that, if&#13;
      you only would, none were better qualified to carry the&#13;
      discussion further, and that when you had engaged our city in a&#13;
      suitable war, you of all men living could best exhibit her&#13;
      playing a fitting part. When I had completed my task, I in return&#13;
      imposed this other task upon you. You conferred together and&#13;
      agreed to entertain me to-day, as I had entertained you, with a&#13;
      feast of discourse. Here am I in festive array, and no man can be&#13;
      more ready for the promised banquet.</p><p>HERMOCRATES: And we too, Socrates, as Timaeus says, will not be&#13;
      wanting in enthusiasm; and there is no excuse for not complying&#13;
      with your request. As soon as we arrived yesterday at the&#13;
      guest-chamber of Critias, with whom we are staying, or rather on&#13;
      our way thither, we talked the matter over, and he told us an&#13;
      ancient tradition, which I wish, Critias, that you would repeat&#13;
      to Socrates, so that he may help us to judge whether it will&#13;
      satisfy his requirements or not.</p><p>CRITIAS: I will, if Timaeus, who is our other partner, approves.</p><p>TIMAEUS: I quite approve.</p><p>CRITIAS: Then listen, Socrates, to a tale which, though strange,&#13;
      is certainly true, having been attested by Solon, who was the&#13;
      wisest of the seven sages. He was a relative and a dear friend of&#13;
      my great-grandfather, Dropides, as he himself says in many&#13;
      passages of his poems; and he told the story to Critias, my&#13;
      grandfather, who remembered and repeated it to us. There were of&#13;
      old, he said, great and marvellous actions of the Athenian city,&#13;
      which have passed into oblivion through lapse of time and the&#13;
      destruction of mankind, and one in particular, greater than all&#13;
      the rest. This we will now rehearse. It will be a fitting&#13;
      monument of our gratitude to you, and a hymn of praise true and&#13;
      worthy of the goddess, on this her day of festival.</p><p>SOCRATES: Very good. And what is this ancient famous action of&#13;
      the Athenians, which Critias declared, on the authority of Solon,&#13;
      to be not a mere legend, but an actual fact?</p><p>CRITIAS: I will tell an old-world story which I heard from an&#13;
      aged man; for Critias, at the time of telling it, was, as he&#13;
      said, nearly ninety years of age, and I was about ten. Now the&#13;
      day was that day of the Apaturia which is called the Registration&#13;
      of Youth, at which, according to custom, our parents gave prizes&#13;
      for recitations, and the poems of several poets were recited by&#13;
      us boys, and many of us sang the poems of Solon, which at that&#13;
      time had not gone out of fashion. One of our tribe, either&#13;
      because he thought so or to please Critias, said that in his&#13;
      judgment Solon was not only the wisest of men, but also the&#13;
      noblest of poets. The old man, as I very well remember,&#13;
      brightened up at hearing this and said, smiling: Yes, Amynander,&#13;
      if Solon had only, like other poets, made poetry the business of&#13;
      his life, and had completed the tale which he brought with him&#13;
      from Egypt, and had not been compelled, by reason of the factions&#13;
      and troubles which he found stirring in his own country when he&#13;
      came home, to attend to other matters, in my opinion he would&#13;
      have been as famous as Homer or Hesiod, or any poet.</p><p>And what was the tale about, Critias? said Amynander.</p><p>About the greatest action which the Athenians ever did, and which&#13;
      ought to have been the most famous, but, through the lapse of&#13;
      time and the destruction of the actors, it has not come down to&#13;
      us.</p><p>Tell us, said the other, the whole story, and how and from whom&#13;
      Solon heard this veritable tradition.</p><p>He replied:—In the Egyptian Delta, at the head of which the river&#13;
      Nile divides, there is a certain district which is called the&#13;
      district of Sais, and the great city of the district is also&#13;
      called Sais, and is the city from which King Amasis came. The&#13;
      citizens have a deity for their foundress; she is called in the&#13;
      Egyptian tongue Neith, and is asserted by them to be the same&#13;
      whom the Hellenes call Athene; they are great lovers of the&#13;
      Athenians, and say that they are in some way related to them. To&#13;
      this city came Solon, and was received there with great honour;&#13;
      he asked the priests who were most skilful in such matters, about&#13;
      antiquity, and made the discovery that neither he nor any other&#13;
      Hellene knew anything worth mentioning about the times of old. On&#13;
      one occasion, wishing to draw them on to speak of antiquity, he&#13;
      began to tell about the most ancient things in our part of the&#13;
      world—about Phoroneus, who is called ‘the first man,’ and about&#13;
      Niobe; and after the Deluge, of the survival of Deucalion and&#13;
      Pyrrha; and he traced the genealogy of their descendants, and&#13;
      reckoning up the dates, tried to compute how many years ago the&#13;
      events of which he was speaking happened. Thereupon one of the&#13;
      priests, who was of a very great age, said: O Solon, Solon, you&#13;
      Hellenes are never anything but children, and there is not an old&#13;
      man among you. Solon in return asked him what he meant. I mean to&#13;
      say, he replied, that in mind you are all young; there is no old&#13;
      opinion handed down among you by ancient tradition, nor any&#13;
      science which is hoary with age. And I will tell you why. There&#13;
      have been, and will be again, many destructions of mankind&#13;
      arising out of many causes; the greatest have been brought about&#13;
      by the agencies of fire and water, and other lesser ones by&#13;
      innumerable other causes. There is a story, which even you have&#13;
      preserved, that once upon a time Paethon, the son of Helios,&#13;
      having yoked the steeds in his father’s chariot, because he was&#13;
      not able to drive them in the path of his father, burnt up all&#13;
      that was upon the earth, and was himself destroyed by a&#13;
      thunderbolt. Now this has the form of a myth, but really&#13;
      signifies a declination of the bodies moving in the heavens&#13;
      around the earth, and a great conflagration of things upon the&#13;
      earth, which recurs after long intervals; at such times those who&#13;
      live upon the mountains and in dry and lofty places are more&#13;
      liable to destruction than those who dwell by rivers or on the&#13;
      seashore. And from this calamity the Nile, who is our&#13;
      never-failing saviour, delivers and preserves us. When, on the&#13;
      other hand, the gods purge the earth with a deluge of water, the&#13;
      survivors in your country are herdsmen and shepherds who dwell on&#13;
      the mountains, but those who, like you, live in cities are&#13;
      carried by the rivers into the sea. Whereas in this land, neither&#13;
      then nor at any other time, does the water come down from above&#13;
      on the fields, having always a tendency to come up from below;&#13;
      for which reason the traditions preserved here are the most&#13;
      ancient. The fact is, that wherever the extremity of winter frost&#13;
      or of summer sun does not prevent, mankind exist, sometimes in&#13;
      greater, sometimes in lesser numbers. And whatever happened&#13;
      either in your country or in ours, or in any other region of&#13;
      which we are informed—if there were any actions noble or great or&#13;
      in any other way remarkable, they have all been written down by&#13;
      us of old, and are preserved in our temples. Whereas just when&#13;
      you and other nations are beginning to be provided with letters&#13;
      and the other requisites of civilized life, after the usual&#13;
      interval, the stream from heaven, like a pestilence, comes&#13;
      pouring down, and leaves only those of you who are destitute of&#13;
      letters and education; and so you have to begin all over again&#13;
      like children, and know nothing of what happened in ancient&#13;
      times, either among us or among yourselves. As for those&#13;
      genealogies of yours which you just now recounted to us, Solon,&#13;
      they are no better than the tales of children. In the first place&#13;
      you remember a single deluge only, but there were many previous&#13;
      ones; in the next place, you do not know that there formerly&#13;
      dwelt in your land the fairest and noblest race of men which ever&#13;
      lived, and that you and your whole city are descended from a&#13;
      small seed or remnant of them which survived. And this was&#13;
      unknown to you, because, for many generations, the survivors of&#13;
      that destruction died, leaving no written word. For there was a&#13;
      time, Solon, before the great deluge of all, when the city which&#13;
      now is Athens was first in war and in every way the best governed&#13;
      of all cities, is said to have performed the noblest deeds and to&#13;
      have had the fairest constitution of any of which tradition&#13;
      tells, under the face of heaven. Solon marvelled at his words,&#13;
      and earnestly requested the priests to inform him exactly and in&#13;
      order about these former citizens. You are welcome to hear about&#13;
      them, Solon, said the priest, both for your own sake and for that&#13;
      of your city, and above all, for the sake of the goddess who is&#13;
      the common patron and parent and educator of both our cities. She&#13;
      founded your city a thousand years before ours (Observe that&#13;
      Plato gives the same date (9000 years ago) for the foundation of&#13;
      Athens and for the repulse of the invasion from Atlantis&#13;
      (Crit.).), receiving from the Earth and Hephaestus the seed of&#13;
      your race, and afterwards she founded ours, of which the&#13;
      constitution is recorded in our sacred registers to be 8000 years&#13;
      old. As touching your citizens of 9000 years ago, I will briefly&#13;
      inform you of their laws and of their most famous action; the&#13;
      exact particulars of the whole we will hereafter go through at&#13;
      our leisure in the sacred registers themselves. If you compare&#13;
      these very laws with ours you will find that many of ours are the&#13;
      counterpart of yours as they were in the olden time. In the first&#13;
      place, there is the caste of priests, which is separated from all&#13;
      the others; next, there are the artificers, who ply their several&#13;
      crafts by themselves and do not intermix; and also there is the&#13;
      class of shepherds and of hunters, as well as that of husbandmen;&#13;
      and you will observe, too, that the warriors in Egypt are&#13;
      distinct from all the other classes, and are commanded by the law&#13;
      to devote themselves solely to military pursuits; moreover, the&#13;
      weapons which they carry are shields and spears, a style of&#13;
      equipment which the goddess taught of Asiatics first to us, as in&#13;
      your part of the world first to you. Then as to wisdom, do you&#13;
      observe how our law from the very first made a study of the whole&#13;
      order of things, extending even to prophecy and medicine which&#13;
      gives health, out of these divine elements deriving what was&#13;
      needful for human life, and adding every sort of knowledge which&#13;
      was akin to them. All this order and arrangement the goddess&#13;
      first imparted to you when establishing your city; and she chose&#13;
      the spot of earth in which you were born, because she saw that&#13;
      the happy temperament of the seasons in that land would produce&#13;
      the wisest of men. Wherefore the goddess, who was a lover both of&#13;
      war and of wisdom, selected and first of all settled that spot&#13;
      which was the most likely to produce men likest herself. And&#13;
      there you dwelt, having such laws as these and still better ones,&#13;
      and excelled all mankind in all virtue, as became the children&#13;
      and disciples of the gods.</p><p>Many great and wonderful deeds are recorded of your state in our&#13;
      histories. But one of them exceeds all the rest in greatness and&#13;
      valour. For these histories tell of a mighty power which&#13;
      unprovoked made an expedition against the whole of Europe and&#13;
      Asia, and to which your city put an end. This power came forth&#13;
      out of the Atlantic Ocean, for in those days the Atlantic was&#13;
      navigable; and there was an island situated in front of the&#13;
      straits which are by you called the Pillars of Heracles; the&#13;
      island was larger than Libya and Asia put together, and was the&#13;
      way to other islands, and from these you might pass to the whole&#13;
      of the opposite continent which surrounded the true ocean; for&#13;
      this sea which is within the Straits of Heracles is only a&#13;
      harbour, having a narrow entrance, but that other is a real sea,&#13;
      and the surrounding land may be most truly called a boundless&#13;
      continent. Now in this island of Atlantis there was a great and&#13;
      wonderful empire which had rule over the whole island and several&#13;
      others, and over parts of the continent, and, furthermore, the&#13;
      men of Atlantis had subjected the parts of Libya within the&#13;
      columns of Heracles as far as Egypt, and of Europe as far as&#13;
      Tyrrhenia. This vast power, gathered into one, endeavoured to&#13;
      subdue at a blow our country and yours and the whole of the&#13;
      region within the straits; and then, Solon, your country shone&#13;
      forth, in the excellence of her virtue and strength, among all&#13;
      mankind. She was pre-eminent in courage and military skill, and&#13;
      was the leader of the Hellenes. And when the rest fell off from&#13;
      her, being compelled to stand alone, after having undergone the&#13;
      very extremity of danger, she defeated and triumphed over the&#13;
      invaders, and preserved from slavery those who were not yet&#13;
      subjugated, and generously liberated all the rest of us who dwell&#13;
      within the pillars. But afterwards there occurred violent&#13;
      earthquakes and floods; and in a single day and night of&#13;
      misfortune all your warlike men in a body sank into the earth,&#13;
      and the island of Atlantis in like manner disappeared in the&#13;
      depths of the sea. For which reason the sea in those parts is&#13;
      impassable and impenetrable, because there is a shoal of mud in&#13;
      the way; and this was caused by the subsidence of the island.</p><p>I have told you briefly, Socrates, what the aged Critias heard&#13;
      from Solon and related to us. And when you were speaking&#13;
      yesterday about your city and citizens, the tale which I have&#13;
      just been repeating to you came into my mind, and I remarked with&#13;
      astonishment how, by some mysterious coincidence, you agreed in&#13;
      almost every particular with the narrative of Solon; but I did&#13;
      not like to speak at the moment. For a long time had elapsed, and&#13;
      I had forgotten too much; I thought that I must first of all run&#13;
      over the narrative in my own mind, and then I would speak. And so&#13;
      I readily assented to your request yesterday, considering that in&#13;
      all such cases the chief difficulty is to find a tale suitable to&#13;
      our purpose, and that with such a tale we should be fairly well&#13;
      provided.</p><p>And therefore, as Hermocrates has told you, on my way home&#13;
      yesterday I at once communicated the tale to my companions as I&#13;
      remembered it; and after I left them, during the night by&#13;
      thinking I recovered nearly the whole of it. Truly, as is often&#13;
      said, the lessons of our childhood make a wonderful impression on&#13;
      our memories; for I am not sure that I could remember all the&#13;
      discourse of yesterday, but I should be much surprised if I&#13;
      forgot any of these things which I have heard very long ago. I&#13;
      listened at the time with childlike interest to the old man’s&#13;
      narrative; he was very ready to teach me, and I asked him again&#13;
      and again to repeat his words, so that like an indelible picture&#13;
      they were branded into my mind. As soon as the day broke, I&#13;
      rehearsed them as he spoke them to my companions, that they, as&#13;
      well as myself, might have something to say. And now, Socrates,&#13;
      to make an end of my preface, I am ready to tell you the whole&#13;
      tale. I will give you not only the general heads, but the&#13;
      particulars, as they were told to me. The city and citizens,&#13;
      which you yesterday described to us in fiction, we will now&#13;
      transfer to the world of reality. It shall be the ancient city of&#13;
      Athens, and we will suppose that the citizens whom you imagined,&#13;
      were our veritable ancestors, of whom the priest spoke; they will&#13;
      perfectly harmonize, and there will be no inconsistency in saying&#13;
      that the citizens of your republic are these ancient Athenians.&#13;
      Let us divide the subject among us, and all endeavour according&#13;
      to our ability gracefully to execute the task which you have&#13;
      imposed upon us. Consider then, Socrates, if this narrative is&#13;
      suited to the purpose, or whether we should seek for some other&#13;
      instead.</p><p>SOCRATES: And what other, Critias, can we find that will be&#13;
      better than this, which is natural and suitable to the festival&#13;
      of the goddess, and has the very great advantage of being a fact&#13;
      and not a fiction? How or where shall we find another if we&#13;
      abandon this? We cannot, and therefore you must tell the tale,&#13;
      and good luck to you; and I in return for my yesterday’s&#13;
      discourse will now rest and be a listener.</p><p>CRITIAS: Let me proceed to explain to you, Socrates, the order in&#13;
      which we have arranged our entertainment. Our intention is, that&#13;
      Timaeus, who is the most of an astronomer amongst us, and has&#13;
      made the nature of the universe his special study, should speak&#13;
      first, beginning with the generation of the world and going down&#13;
      to the creation of man; next, I am to receive the men whom he has&#13;
      created, and of whom some will have profited by the excellent&#13;
      education which you have given them; and then, in accordance with&#13;
      the tale of Solon, and equally with his law, we will bring them&#13;
      into court and make them citizens, as if they were those very&#13;
      Athenians whom the sacred Egyptian record has recovered from&#13;
      oblivion, and thenceforward we will speak of them as Athenians&#13;
      and fellow-citizens.</p><p>SOCRATES: I see that I shall receive in my turn a perfect and&#13;
      splendid feast of reason. And now, Timaeus, you, I suppose,&#13;
      should speak next, after duly calling upon the Gods.</p><p>TIMAEUS: All men, Socrates, who have any degree of right feeling,&#13;
      at the beginning of every enterprise, whether small or great,&#13;
      always call upon God. And we, too, who are going to discourse of&#13;
      the nature of the universe, how created or how existing without&#13;
      creation, if we be not altogether out of our wits, must invoke&#13;
      the aid of Gods and Goddesses and pray that our words may be&#13;
      acceptable to them and consistent with themselves. Let this,&#13;
      then, be our invocation of the Gods, to which I add an&#13;
      exhortation of myself to speak in such manner as will be most&#13;
      intelligible to you, and will most accord with my own intent.</p><p>First then, in my judgment, we must make a distinction and ask,&#13;
      What is that which always is and has no becoming; and what is&#13;
      that which is always becoming and never is? That which is&#13;
      apprehended by intelligence and reason is always in the same&#13;
      state; but that which is conceived by opinion with the help of&#13;
      sensation and without reason, is always in a process of becoming&#13;
      and perishing and never really is. Now everything that becomes or&#13;
      is created must of necessity be created by some cause, for&#13;
      without a cause nothing can be created. The work of the creator,&#13;
      whenever he looks to the unchangeable and fashions the form and&#13;
      nature of his work after an unchangeable pattern, must&#13;
      necessarily be made fair and perfect; but when he looks to the&#13;
      created only, and uses a created pattern, it is not fair or&#13;
      perfect. Was the heaven then or the world, whether called by this&#13;
      or by any other more appropriate name—assuming the name, I am&#13;
      asking a question which has to be asked at the beginning of an&#13;
      enquiry about anything—was the world, I say, always in existence&#13;
      and without beginning? or created, and had it a beginning?&#13;
      Created, I reply, being visible and tangible and having a body,&#13;
      and therefore sensible; and all sensible things are apprehended&#13;
      by opinion and sense and are in a process of creation and&#13;
      created. Now that which is created must, as we affirm, of&#13;
      necessity be created by a cause. But the father and maker of all&#13;
      this universe is past finding out; and even if we found him, to&#13;
      tell of him to all men would be impossible. And there is still a&#13;
      question to be asked about him: Which of the patterns had the&#13;
      artificer in view when he made the world—the pattern of the&#13;
      unchangeable, or of that which is created? If the world be indeed&#13;
      fair and the artificer good, it is manifest that he must have&#13;
      looked to that which is eternal; but if what cannot be said&#13;
      without blasphemy is true, then to the created pattern. Every one&#13;
      will see that he must have looked to the eternal; for the world&#13;
      is the fairest of creations and he is the best of causes. And&#13;
      having been created in this way, the world has been framed in the&#13;
      likeness of that which is apprehended by reason and mind and is&#13;
      unchangeable, and must therefore of necessity, if this is&#13;
      admitted, be a copy of something. Now it is all-important that&#13;
      the beginning of everything should be according to nature. And in&#13;
      speaking of the copy and the original we may assume that words&#13;
      are akin to the matter which they describe; when they relate to&#13;
      the lasting and permanent and intelligible, they ought to be&#13;
      lasting and unalterable, and, as far as their nature allows,&#13;
      irrefutable and immovable—nothing less. But when they express&#13;
      only the copy or likeness and not the eternal things themselves,&#13;
      they need only be likely and analogous to the real words. As&#13;
      being is to becoming, so is truth to belief. If then, Socrates,&#13;
      amid the many opinions about the gods and the generation of the&#13;
      universe, we are not able to give notions which are altogether&#13;
      and in every respect exact and consistent with one another, do&#13;
      not be surprised. Enough, if we adduce probabilities as likely as&#13;
      any others; for we must remember that I who am the speaker, and&#13;
      you who are the judges, are only mortal men, and we ought to&#13;
      accept the tale which is probable and enquire no further.</p><p>SOCRATES: Excellent, Timaeus; and we will do precisely as you bid&#13;
      us. The prelude is charming, and is already accepted by us—may we&#13;
      beg of you to proceed to the strain?</p><p>TIMAEUS: Let me tell you then why the creator made this world of&#13;
      generation. He was good, and the good can never have any jealousy&#13;
      of anything. And being free from jealousy, he desired that all&#13;
      things should be as like himself as they could be. This is in the&#13;
      truest sense the origin of creation and of the world, as we shall&#13;
      do well in believing on the testimony of wise men: God desired&#13;
      that all things should be good and nothing bad, so far as this&#13;
      was attainable. Wherefore also finding the whole visible sphere&#13;
      not at rest, but moving in an irregular and disorderly fashion,&#13;
      out of disorder he brought order, considering that this was in&#13;
      every way better than the other. Now the deeds of the best could&#13;
      never be or have been other than the fairest; and the creator,&#13;
      reflecting on the things which are by nature visible, found that&#13;
      no unintelligent creature taken as a whole was fairer than the&#13;
      intelligent taken as a whole; and that intelligence could not be&#13;
      present in anything which was devoid of soul. For which reason,&#13;
      when he was framing the universe, he put intelligence in soul,&#13;
      and soul in body, that he might be the creator of a work which&#13;
      was by nature fairest and best. Wherefore, using the language of&#13;
      probability, we may say that the world became a living creature&#13;
      truly endowed with soul and intelligence by the providence of&#13;
      God.</p><p>This being supposed, let us proceed to the next stage: In the&#13;
      likeness of what animal did the Creator make the world? It would&#13;
      be an unworthy thing to liken it to any nature which exists as a&#13;
      part only; for nothing can be beautiful which is like any&#13;
      imperfect thing; but let us suppose the world to be the very&#13;
      image of that whole of which all other animals both individually&#13;
      and in their tribes are portions. For the original of the&#13;
      universe contains in itself all intelligible beings, just as this&#13;
      world comprehends us and all other visible creatures. For the&#13;
      Deity, intending to make this world like the fairest and most&#13;
      perfect of intelligible beings, framed one visible animal&#13;
      comprehending within itself all other animals of a kindred&#13;
      nature. Are we right in saying that there is one world, or that&#13;
      they are many and infinite? There must be one only, if the&#13;
      created copy is to accord with the original. For that which&#13;
      includes all other intelligible creatures cannot have a second or&#13;
      companion; in that case there would be need of another living&#13;
      being which would include both, and of which they would be parts,&#13;
      and the likeness would be more truly said to resemble not them,&#13;
      but that other which included them. In order then that the world&#13;
      might be solitary, like the perfect animal, the creator made not&#13;
      two worlds or an infinite number of them; but there is and ever&#13;
      will be one only-begotten and created heaven.</p><p>Now that which is created is of necessity corporeal, and also&#13;
      visible and tangible. And nothing is visible where there is no&#13;
      fire, or tangible which has no solidity, and nothing is solid&#13;
      without earth. Wherefore also God in the beginning of creation&#13;
      made the body of the universe to consist of fire and earth. But&#13;
      two things cannot be rightly put together without a third; there&#13;
      must be some bond of union between them. And the fairest bond is&#13;
      that which makes the most complete fusion of itself and the&#13;
      things which it combines; and proportion is best adapted to&#13;
      effect such a union. For whenever in any three numbers, whether&#13;
      cube or square, there is a mean, which is to the last term what&#13;
      the first term is to it; and again, when the mean is to the first&#13;
      term as the last term is to the mean—then the mean becoming first&#13;
      and last, and the first and last both becoming means, they will&#13;
      all of them of necessity come to be the same, and having become&#13;
      the same with one another will be all one. If the universal frame&#13;
      had been created a surface only and having no depth, a single&#13;
      mean would have sufficed to bind together itself and the other&#13;
      terms; but now, as the world must be solid, and solid bodies are&#13;
      always compacted not by one mean but by two, God placed water and&#13;
      air in the mean between fire and earth, and made them to have the&#13;
      same proportion so far as was possible (as fire is to air so is&#13;
      air to water, and as air is to water so is water to earth); and&#13;
      thus he bound and put together a visible and tangible heaven. And&#13;
      for these reasons, and out of such elements which are in number&#13;
      four, the body of the world was created, and it was harmonized by&#13;
      proportion, and therefore has the spirit of friendship; and&#13;
      having been reconciled to itself, it was indissoluble by the hand&#13;
      of any other than the framer.</p><p>Now the creation took up the whole of each of the four elements;&#13;
      for the Creator compounded the world out of all the fire and all&#13;
      the water and all the air and all the earth, leaving no part of&#13;
      any of them nor any power of them outside. His intention was, in&#13;
      the first place, that the animal should be as far as possible a&#13;
      perfect whole and of perfect parts: secondly, that it should be&#13;
      one, leaving no remnants out of which another such world might be&#13;
      created: and also that it should be free from old age and&#13;
      unaffected by disease. Considering that if heat and cold and&#13;
      other powerful forces which unite bodies surround and attack them&#13;
      from without when they are unprepared, they decompose them, and&#13;
      by bringing diseases and old age upon them, make them waste&#13;
      away—for this cause and on these grounds he made the world one&#13;
      whole, having every part entire, and being therefore perfect and&#13;
      not liable to old age and disease. And he gave to the world the&#13;
      figure which was suitable and also natural. Now to the animal&#13;
      which was to comprehend all animals, that figure was suitable&#13;
      which comprehends within itself all other figures. Wherefore he&#13;
      made the world in the form of a globe, round as from a lathe,&#13;
      having its extremes in every direction equidistant from the&#13;
      centre, the most perfect and the most like itself of all figures;&#13;
      for he considered that the like is infinitely fairer than the&#13;
      unlike. This he finished off, making the surface smooth all round&#13;
      for many reasons; in the first place, because the living being&#13;
      had no need of eyes when there was nothing remaining outside him&#13;
      to be seen; nor of ears when there was nothing to be heard; and&#13;
      there was no surrounding atmosphere to be breathed; nor would&#13;
      there have been any use of organs by the help of which he might&#13;
      receive his food or get rid of what he had already digested,&#13;
      since there was nothing which went from him or came into him: for&#13;
      there was nothing beside him. Of design he was created thus, his&#13;
      own waste providing his own food, and all that he did or suffered&#13;
      taking place in and by himself. For the Creator conceived that a&#13;
      being which was self-sufficient would be far more excellent than&#13;
      one which lacked anything; and, as he had no need to take&#13;
      anything or defend himself against any one, the Creator did not&#13;
      think it necessary to bestow upon him hands: nor had he any need&#13;
      of feet, nor of the whole apparatus of walking; but the movement&#13;
      suited to his spherical form was assigned to him, being of all&#13;
      the seven that which is most appropriate to mind and&#13;
      intelligence; and he was made to move in the same manner and on&#13;
      the same spot, within his own limits revolving in a circle. All&#13;
      the other six motions were taken away from him, and he was made&#13;
      not to partake of their deviations. And as this circular movement&#13;
      required no feet, the universe was created without legs and&#13;
      without feet.</p><p>Such was the whole plan of the eternal God about the god that was&#13;
      to be, to whom for this reason he gave a body, smooth and even,&#13;
      having a surface in every direction equidistant from the centre,&#13;
      a body entire and perfect, and formed out of perfect bodies. And&#13;
      in the centre he put the soul, which he diffused throughout the&#13;
      body, making it also to be the exterior environment of it; and he&#13;
      made the universe a circle moving in a circle, one and solitary,&#13;
      yet by reason of its excellence able to converse with itself, and&#13;
      needing no other friendship or acquaintance. Having these&#13;
      purposes in view he created the world a blessed god.</p><p>Now God did not make the soul after the body, although we are&#13;
      speaking of them in this order; for having brought them together&#13;
      he would never have allowed that the elder should be ruled by the&#13;
      younger; but this is a random manner of speaking which we have,&#13;
      because somehow we ourselves too are very much under the dominion&#13;
      of chance. Whereas he made the soul in origin and excellence&#13;
      prior to and older than the body, to be the ruler and mistress,&#13;
      of whom the body was to be the subject. And he made her out of&#13;
      the following elements and on this wise: Out of the indivisible&#13;
      and unchangeable, and also out of that which is divisible and has&#13;
      to do with material bodies, he compounded a third and&#13;
      intermediate kind of essence, partaking of the nature of the same&#13;
      and of the other, and this compound he placed accordingly in a&#13;
      mean between the indivisible, and the divisible and material. He&#13;
      took the three elements of the same, the other, and the essence,&#13;
      and mingled them into one form, compressing by force the&#13;
      reluctant and unsociable nature of the other into the same. When&#13;
      he had mingled them with the essence and out of three made one,&#13;
      he again divided this whole into as many portions as was fitting,&#13;
      each portion being a compound of the same, the other, and the&#13;
      essence. And he proceeded to divide after this manner:—First of&#13;
      all, he took away one part of the whole (1), and then he&#13;
      separated a second part which was double the first (2), and then&#13;
      he took away a third part which was half as much again as the&#13;
      second and three times as much as the first (3), and then he took&#13;
      a fourth part which was twice as much as the second (4), and a&#13;
      fifth part which was three times the third (9), and a sixth part&#13;
      which was eight times the first (8), and a seventh part which was&#13;
      twenty-seven times the first (27). After this he filled up the&#13;
      double intervals (i.e. between 1, 2, 4, 8) and the triple (i.e.&#13;
      between 1, 3, 9, 27) cutting off yet other portions from the&#13;
      mixture and placing them in the intervals, so that in each&#13;
      interval there were two kinds of means, the one exceeding and&#13;
      exceeded by equal parts of its extremes (as for example 1, 4/3,&#13;
      2, in which the mean 4/3 is one-third of 1 more than 1, and&#13;
      one-third of 2 less than 2), the other being that kind of mean&#13;
      which exceeds and is exceeded by an equal number (e.g.</p><p>- over 1, 4/3, 3/2, - over 2, 8/3, 3, - over 4, 16/3, 6,  - over 8: and&#13;
  - over 1, 3/2, 2,   - over 3, 9/2, 6, - over 9, 27/2, 18, - over 27.</p><p>Where there were intervals of 3/2 and of 4/3 and of 9/8, made by&#13;
      the connecting terms in the former intervals, he filled up all&#13;
      the intervals of 4/3 with the interval of 9/8, leaving a fraction&#13;
      over; and the interval which this fraction expressed was in the&#13;
      ratio of 256 to 243 (e.g.</p><p>243:256::81/64:4/3::243/128:2::81/32:8/3::243/64:4::81/16:16/3::242/32:8.</p><p>And thus the whole mixture out of which he cut these portions was&#13;
      all exhausted by him. This entire compound he divided lengthways&#13;
      into two parts, which he joined to one another at the centre like&#13;
      the letter X, and bent them into a circular form, connecting them&#13;
      with themselves and each other at the point opposite to their&#13;
      original meeting-point; and, comprehending them in a uniform&#13;
      revolution upon the same axis, he made the one the outer and the&#13;
      other the inner circle. Now the motion of the outer circle he&#13;
      called the motion of the same, and the motion of the inner circle&#13;
      the motion of the other or diverse. The motion of the same he&#13;
      carried round by the side (i.e. of the rectangular figure&#13;
      supposed to be inscribed in the circle of the Same) to the right,&#13;
      and the motion of the diverse diagonally (i.e. across the&#13;
      rectangular figure from corner to corner) to the left. And he&#13;
      gave dominion to the motion of the same and like, for that he&#13;
      left single and undivided; but the inner motion he divided in six&#13;
      places and made seven unequal circles having their intervals in&#13;
      ratios of two and three, three of each, and bade the orbits&#13;
      proceed in a direction opposite to one another; and three (Sun,&#13;
      Mercury, Venus) he made to move with equal swiftness, and the&#13;
      remaining four (Moon, Saturn, Mars, Jupiter) to move with unequal&#13;
      swiftness to the three and to one another, but in due proportion.</p><p>Now when the Creator had framed the soul according to his will,&#13;
      he formed within her the corporeal universe, and brought the two&#13;
      together, and united them centre to centre. The soul, interfused&#13;
      everywhere from the centre to the circumference of heaven, of&#13;
      which also she is the external envelopment, herself turning in&#13;
      herself, began a divine beginning of never-ceasing and rational&#13;
      life enduring throughout all time. The body of heaven is visible,&#13;
      but the soul is invisible, and partakes of reason and harmony,&#13;
      and being made by the best of intellectual and everlasting&#13;
      natures, is the best of things created. And because she is&#13;
      composed of the same and of the other and of the essence, these&#13;
      three, and is divided and united in due proportion, and in her&#13;
      revolutions returns upon herself, the soul, when touching&#13;
      anything which has essence, whether dispersed in parts or&#13;
      undivided, is stirred through all her powers, to declare the&#13;
      sameness or difference of that thing and some other; and to what&#13;
      individuals are related, and by what affected, and in what way&#13;
      and how and when, both in the world of generation and in the&#13;
      world of immutable being. And when reason, which works with equal&#13;
      truth, whether she be in the circle of the diverse or of the&#13;
      same—in voiceless silence holding her onward course in the sphere&#13;
      of the self-moved—when reason, I say, is hovering around the&#13;
      sensible world and when the circle of the diverse also moving&#13;
      truly imparts the intimations of sense to the whole soul, then&#13;
      arise opinions and beliefs sure and certain. But when reason is&#13;
      concerned with the rational, and the circle of the same moving&#13;
      smoothly declares it, then intelligence and knowledge are&#13;
      necessarily perfected. And if any one affirms that in which these&#13;
      two are found to be other than the soul, he will say the very&#13;
      opposite of the truth.</p><p>When the father and creator saw the creature which he had made&#13;
      moving and living, the created image of the eternal gods, he&#13;
      rejoiced, and in his joy determined to make the copy still more&#13;
      like the original; and as this was eternal, he sought to make the&#13;
      universe eternal, so far as might be. Now the nature of the ideal&#13;
      being was everlasting, but to bestow this attribute in its&#13;
      fulness upon a creature was impossible. Wherefore he resolved to&#13;
      have a moving image of eternity, and when he set in order the&#13;
      heaven, he made this image eternal but moving according to&#13;
      number, while eternity itself rests in unity; and this image we&#13;
      call time. For there were no days and nights and months and years&#13;
      before the heaven was created, but when he constructed the heaven&#13;
      he created them also. They are all parts of time, and the past&#13;
      and future are created species of time, which we unconsciously&#13;
      but wrongly transfer to the eternal essence; for we say that he&#13;
      ‘was,’ he ‘is,’ he ‘will be,’ but the truth is that ‘is’ alone is&#13;
      properly attributed to him, and that ‘was’ and ‘will be’ are only&#13;
      to be spoken of becoming in time, for they are motions, but that&#13;
      which is immovably the same cannot become older or younger by&#13;
      time, nor ever did or has become, or hereafter will be, older or&#13;
      younger, nor is subject at all to any of those states which&#13;
      affect moving and sensible things and of which generation is the&#13;
      cause. These are the forms of time, which imitates eternity and&#13;
      revolves according to a law of number. Moreover, when we say that&#13;
      what has become IS become and what becomes IS becoming, and that&#13;
      what will become IS about to become and that the non-existent IS&#13;
      non-existent—all these are inaccurate modes of expression&#13;
      (compare Parmen.). But perhaps this whole subject will be more&#13;
      suitably discussed on some other occasion.</p><p>Time, then, and the heaven came into being at the same instant in&#13;
      order that, having been created together, if ever there was to be&#13;
      a dissolution of them, they might be dissolved together. It was&#13;
      framed after the pattern of the eternal nature, that it might&#13;
      resemble this as far as was possible; for the pattern exists from&#13;
      eternity, and the created heaven has been, and is, and will be,&#13;
      in all time. Such was the mind and thought of God in the creation&#13;
      of time. The sun and moon and five other stars, which are called&#13;
      the planets, were created by him in order to distinguish and&#13;
      preserve the numbers of time; and when he had made their several&#13;
      bodies, he placed them in the orbits in which the circle of the&#13;
      other was revolving,—in seven orbits seven stars. First, there&#13;
      was the moon in the orbit nearest the earth, and next the sun, in&#13;
      the second orbit above the earth; then came the morning star and&#13;
      the star sacred to Hermes, moving in orbits which have an equal&#13;
      swiftness with the sun, but in an opposite direction; and this is&#13;
      the reason why the sun and Hermes and Lucifer overtake and are&#13;
      overtaken by each other. To enumerate the places which he&#13;
      assigned to the other stars, and to give all the reasons why he&#13;
      assigned them, although a secondary matter, would give more&#13;
      trouble than the primary. These things at some future time, when&#13;
      we are at leisure, may have the consideration which they deserve,&#13;
      but not at present.</p><p>Now, when all the stars which were necessary to the creation of&#13;
      time had attained a motion suitable to them, and had become&#13;
      living creatures having bodies fastened by vital chains, and&#13;
      learnt their appointed task, moving in the motion of the diverse,&#13;
      which is diagonal, and passes through and is governed by the&#13;
      motion of the same, they revolved, some in a larger and some in a&#13;
      lesser orbit—those which had the lesser orbit revolving faster,&#13;
      and those which had the larger more slowly. Now by reason of the&#13;
      motion of the same, those which revolved fastest appeared to be&#13;
      overtaken by those which moved slower although they really&#13;
      overtook them; for the motion of the same made them all turn in a&#13;
      spiral, and, because some went one way and some another, that&#13;
      which receded most slowly from the sphere of the same, which was&#13;
      the swiftest, appeared to follow it most nearly. That there might&#13;
      be some visible measure of their relative swiftness and slowness&#13;
      as they proceeded in their eight courses, God lighted a fire,&#13;
      which we now call the sun, in the second from the earth of these&#13;
      orbits, that it might give light to the whole of heaven, and that&#13;
      the animals, as many as nature intended, might participate in&#13;
      number, learning arithmetic from the revolution of the same and&#13;
      the like. Thus then, and for this reason the night and the day&#13;
      were created, being the period of the one most intelligent&#13;
      revolution. And the month is accomplished when the moon has&#13;
      completed her orbit and overtaken the sun, and the year when the&#13;
      sun has completed his own orbit. Mankind, with hardly an&#13;
      exception, have not remarked the periods of the other stars, and&#13;
      they have no name for them, and do not measure them against one&#13;
      another by the help of number, and hence they can scarcely be&#13;
      said to know that their wanderings, being infinite in number and&#13;
      admirable for their variety, make up time. And yet there is no&#13;
      difficulty in seeing that the perfect number of time fulfils the&#13;
      perfect year when all the eight revolutions, having their&#13;
      relative degrees of swiftness, are accomplished together and&#13;
      attain their completion at the same time, measured by the&#13;
      rotation of the same and equally moving. After this manner, and&#13;
      for these reasons, came into being such of the stars as in their&#13;
      heavenly progress received reversals of motion, to the end that&#13;
      the created heaven might imitate the eternal nature, and be as&#13;
      like as possible to the perfect and intelligible animal.</p><p>Thus far and until the birth of time the created universe was&#13;
      made in the likeness of the original, but inasmuch as all animals&#13;
      were not yet comprehended therein, it was still unlike. What&#13;
      remained, the creator then proceeded to fashion after the nature&#13;
      of the pattern. Now as in the ideal animal the mind perceives&#13;
      ideas or species of a certain nature and number, he thought that&#13;
      this created animal ought to have species of a like nature and&#13;
      number. There are four such; one of them is the heavenly race of&#13;
      the gods; another, the race of birds whose way is in the air; the&#13;
      third, the watery species; and the fourth, the pedestrian and&#13;
      land creatures. Of the heavenly and divine, he created the&#13;
      greater part out of fire, that they might be the brightest of all&#13;
      things and fairest to behold, and he fashioned them after the&#13;
      likeness of the universe in the figure of a circle, and made them&#13;
      follow the intelligent motion of the supreme, distributing them&#13;
      over the whole circumference of heaven, which was to be a true&#13;
      cosmos or glorious world spangled with them all over. And he gave&#13;
      to each of them two movements: the first, a movement on the same&#13;
      spot after the same manner, whereby they ever continue to think&#13;
      consistently the same thoughts about the same things; the second,&#13;
      a forward movement, in which they are controlled by the&#13;
      revolution of the same and the like; but by the other five&#13;
      motions they were unaffected, in order that each of them might&#13;
      attain the highest perfection. And for this reason the fixed&#13;
      stars were created, to be divine and eternal animals,&#13;
      ever-abiding and revolving after the same manner and on the same&#13;
      spot; and the other stars which reverse their motion and are&#13;
      subject to deviations of this kind, were created in the manner&#13;
      already described. The earth, which is our nurse, clinging (or&#13;
      ‘circling’) around the pole which is extended through the&#13;
      universe, he framed to be the guardian and artificer of night and&#13;
      day, first and eldest of gods that are in the interior of heaven.&#13;
      Vain would be the attempt to tell all the figures of them&#13;
      circling as in dance, and their juxtapositions, and the return of&#13;
      them in their revolutions upon themselves, and their&#13;
      approximations, and to say which of these deities in their&#13;
      conjunctions meet, and which of them are in opposition, and in&#13;
      what order they get behind and before one another, and when they&#13;
      are severally eclipsed to our sight and again reappear, sending&#13;
      terrors and intimations of the future to those who cannot&#13;
      calculate their movements—to attempt to tell of all this without&#13;
      a visible representation of the heavenly system would be labour&#13;
      in vain. Enough on this head; and now let what we have said about&#13;
      the nature of the created and visible gods have an end.</p><p>To know or tell the origin of the other divinities is beyond us,&#13;
      and we must accept the traditions of the men of old time who&#13;
      affirm themselves to be the offspring of the gods—that is what&#13;
      they say—and they must surely have known their own ancestors. How&#13;
      can we doubt the word of the children of the gods? Although they&#13;
      give no probable or certain proofs, still, as they declare that&#13;
      they are speaking of what took place in their own family, we must&#13;
      conform to custom and believe them. In this manner, then,&#13;
      according to them, the genealogy of these gods is to be received&#13;
      and set forth.</p><p>Oceanus and Tethys were the children of Earth and Heaven, and&#13;
      from these sprang Phorcys and Cronos and Rhea, and all that&#13;
      generation; and from Cronos and Rhea sprang Zeus and Here, and&#13;
      all those who are said to be their brethren, and others who were&#13;
      the children of these.</p><p>Now, when all of them, both those who visibly appear in their&#13;
      revolutions as well as those other gods who are of a more&#13;
      retiring nature, had come into being, the creator of the universe&#13;
      addressed them in these words: ‘Gods, children of gods, who are&#13;
      my works, and of whom I am the artificer and father, my creations&#13;
      are indissoluble, if so I will. All that is bound may be undone,&#13;
      but only an evil being would wish to undo that which is&#13;
      harmonious and happy. Wherefore, since ye are but creatures, ye&#13;
      are not altogether immortal and indissoluble, but ye shall&#13;
      certainly not be dissolved, nor be liable to the fate of death,&#13;
      having in my will a greater and mightier bond than those with&#13;
      which ye were bound at the time of your birth. And now listen to&#13;
      my instructions:—Three tribes of mortal beings remain to be&#13;
      created—without them the universe will be incomplete, for it will&#13;
      not contain every kind of animal which it ought to contain, if it&#13;
      is to be perfect. On the other hand, if they were created by me&#13;
      and received life at my hands, they would be on an equality with&#13;
      the gods. In order then that they may be mortal, and that this&#13;
      universe may be truly universal, do ye, according to your&#13;
      natures, betake yourselves to the formation of animals, imitating&#13;
      the power which was shown by me in creating you. The part of them&#13;
      worthy of the name immortal, which is called divine and is the&#13;
      guiding principle of those who are willing to follow justice and&#13;
      you—of that divine part I will myself sow the seed, and having&#13;
      made a beginning, I will hand the work over to you. And do ye&#13;
      then interweave the mortal with the immortal, and make and beget&#13;
      living creatures, and give them food, and make them to grow, and&#13;
      receive them again in death.’</p><p>Thus he spake, and once more into the cup in which he had&#13;
      previously mingled the soul of the universe he poured the remains&#13;
      of the elements, and mingled them in much the same manner; they&#13;
      were not, however, pure as before, but diluted to the second and&#13;
      third degree. And having made it he divided the whole mixture&#13;
      into souls equal in number to the stars, and assigned each soul&#13;
      to a star; and having there placed them as in a chariot, he&#13;
      showed them the nature of the universe, and declared to them the&#13;
      laws of destiny, according to which their first birth would be&#13;
      one and the same for all,—no one should suffer a disadvantage at&#13;
      his hands; they were to be sown in the instruments of time&#13;
      severally adapted to them, and to come forth the most religious&#13;
      of animals; and as human nature was of two kinds, the superior&#13;
      race would hereafter be called man. Now, when they should be&#13;
      implanted in bodies by necessity, and be always gaining or losing&#13;
      some part of their bodily substance, then in the first place it&#13;
      would be necessary that they should all have in them one and the&#13;
      same faculty of sensation, arising out of irresistible&#13;
      impressions; in the second place, they must have love, in which&#13;
      pleasure and pain mingle; also fear and anger, and the feelings&#13;
      which are akin or opposite to them; if they conquered these they&#13;
      would live righteously, and if they were conquered by them,&#13;
      unrighteously. He who lived well during his appointed time was to&#13;
      return and dwell in his native star, and there he would have a&#13;
      blessed and congenial existence. But if he failed in attaining&#13;
      this, at the second birth he would pass into a woman, and if,&#13;
      when in that state of being, he did not desist from evil, he&#13;
      would continually be changed into some brute who resembled him in&#13;
      the evil nature which he had acquired, and would not cease from&#13;
      his toils and transformations until he followed the revolution of&#13;
      the same and the like within him, and overcame by the help of&#13;
      reason the turbulent and irrational mob of later accretions, made&#13;
      up of fire and air and water and earth, and returned to the form&#13;
      of his first and better state. Having given all these laws to his&#13;
      creatures, that he might be guiltless of future evil in any of&#13;
      them, the creator sowed some of them in the earth, and some in&#13;
      the moon, and some in the other instruments of time; and when he&#13;
      had sown them he committed to the younger gods the fashioning of&#13;
      their mortal bodies, and desired them to furnish what was still&#13;
      lacking to the human soul, and having made all the suitable&#13;
      additions, to rule over them, and to pilot the mortal animal in&#13;
      the best and wisest manner which they could, and avert from him&#13;
      all but self-inflicted evils.</p><p>When the creator had made all these ordinances he remained in his&#13;
      own accustomed nature, and his children heard and were obedient&#13;
      to their father’s word, and receiving from him the immortal&#13;
      principle of a mortal creature, in imitation of their own creator&#13;
      they borrowed portions of fire, and earth, and water, and air&#13;
      from the world, which were hereafter to be restored—these they&#13;
      took and welded them together, not with the indissoluble chains&#13;
      by which they were themselves bound, but with little pegs too&#13;
      small to be visible, making up out of all the four elements each&#13;
      separate body, and fastening the courses of the immortal soul in&#13;
      a body which was in a state of perpetual influx and efflux. Now&#13;
      these courses, detained as in a vast river, neither overcame nor&#13;
      were overcome; but were hurrying and hurried to and fro, so that&#13;
      the whole animal was moved and progressed, irregularly however&#13;
      and irrationally and anyhow, in all the six directions of motion,&#13;
      wandering backwards and forwards, and right and left, and up and&#13;
      down, and in all the six directions. For great as was the&#13;
      advancing and retiring flood which provided nourishment, the&#13;
      affections produced by external contact caused still greater&#13;
      tumult—when the body of any one met and came into collision with&#13;
      some external fire, or with the solid earth or the gliding&#13;
      waters, or was caught in the tempest borne on the air, and the&#13;
      motions produced by any of these impulses were carried through&#13;
      the body to the soul. All such motions have consequently received&#13;
      the general name of ‘sensations,’ which they still retain. And&#13;
      they did in fact at that time create a very great and mighty&#13;
      movement; uniting with the ever-flowing stream in stirring up and&#13;
      violently shaking the courses of the soul, they completely&#13;
      stopped the revolution of the same by their opposing current, and&#13;
      hindered it from predominating and advancing; and they so&#13;
      disturbed the nature of the other or diverse, that the three&#13;
      double intervals (i.e. between 1, 2, 4, 8), and the three triple&#13;
      intervals (i.e. between 1, 3, 9, 27), together with the mean&#13;
      terms and connecting links which are expressed by the ratios of&#13;
      3:2, and 4:3, and of 9:8—these, although they cannot be wholly&#13;
      undone except by him who united them, were twisted by them in all&#13;
      sorts of ways, and the circles were broken and disordered in&#13;
      every possible manner, so that when they moved they were tumbling&#13;
      to pieces, and moved irrationally, at one time in a reverse&#13;
      direction, and then again obliquely, and then upside down, as you&#13;
      might imagine a person who is upside down and has his head&#13;
      leaning upon the ground and his feet up against something in the&#13;
      air; and when he is in such a position, both he and the spectator&#13;
      fancy that the right of either is his left, and the left right.&#13;
      If, when powerfully experiencing these and similar effects, the&#13;
      revolutions of the soul come in contact with some external thing,&#13;
      either of the class of the same or of the other, they speak of&#13;
      the same or of the other in a manner the very opposite of the&#13;
      truth; and they become false and foolish, and there is no course&#13;
      or revolution in them which has a guiding or directing power; and&#13;
      if again any sensations enter in violently from without and drag&#13;
      after them the whole vessel of the soul, then the courses of the&#13;
      soul, though they seem to conquer, are really conquered.</p><p>And by reason of all these affections, the soul, when encased in&#13;
      a mortal body, now, as in the beginning, is at first without&#13;
      intelligence; but when the flood of growth and nutriment abates,&#13;
      and the courses of the soul, calming down, go their own way and&#13;
      become steadier as time goes on, then the several circles return&#13;
      to their natural form, and their revolutions are corrected, and&#13;
      they call the same and the other by their right names, and make&#13;
      the possessor of them to become a rational being. And if these&#13;
      combine in him with any true nurture or education, he attains the&#13;
      fulness and health of the perfect man, and escapes the worst&#13;
      disease of all; but if he neglects education he walks lame to the&#13;
      end of his life, and returns imperfect and good for nothing to&#13;
      the world below. This, however, is a later stage; at present we&#13;
      must treat more exactly the subject before us, which involves a&#13;
      preliminary enquiry into the generation of the body and its&#13;
      members, and as to how the soul was created—for what reason and&#13;
      by what providence of the gods; and holding fast to probability,&#13;
      we must pursue our way.</p><p>First, then, the gods, imitating the spherical shape of the&#13;
      universe, enclosed the two divine courses in a spherical body,&#13;
      that, namely, which we now term the head, being the most divine&#13;
      part of us and the lord of all that is in us: to this the gods,&#13;
      when they put together the body, gave all the other members to be&#13;
      servants, considering that it partook of every sort of motion. In&#13;
      order then that it might not tumble about among the high and deep&#13;
      places of the earth, but might be able to get over the one and&#13;
      out of the other, they provided the body to be its vehicle and&#13;
      means of locomotion; which consequently had length and was&#13;
      furnished with four limbs extended and flexible; these God&#13;
      contrived to be instruments of locomotion with which it might&#13;
      take hold and find support, and so be able to pass through all&#13;
      places, carrying on high the dwelling-place of the most sacred&#13;
      and divine part of us. Such was the origin of legs and hands,&#13;
      which for this reason were attached to every man; and the gods,&#13;
      deeming the front part of man to be more honourable and more fit&#13;
      to command than the hinder part, made us to move mostly in a&#13;
      forward direction. Wherefore man must needs have his front part&#13;
      unlike and distinguished from the rest of his body.</p><p>And so in the vessel of the head, they first of all put a face in&#13;
      which they inserted organs to minister in all things to the&#13;
      providence of the soul, and they appointed this part, which has&#13;
      authority, to be by nature the part which is in front. And of the&#13;
      organs they first contrived the eyes to give light, and the&#13;
      principle according to which they were inserted was as follows:&#13;
      So much of fire as would not burn, but gave a gentle light, they&#13;
      formed into a substance akin to the light of every-day life; and&#13;
      the pure fire which is within us and related thereto they made to&#13;
      flow through the eyes in a stream smooth and dense, compressing&#13;
      the whole eye, and especially the centre part, so that it kept&#13;
      out everything of a coarser nature, and allowed to pass only this&#13;
      pure element. When the light of day surrounds the stream of&#13;
      vision, then like falls upon like, and they coalesce, and one&#13;
      body is formed by natural affinity in the line of vision,&#13;
      wherever the light that falls from within meets with an external&#13;
      object. And the whole stream of vision, being similarly affected&#13;
      in virtue of similarity, diffuses the motions of what it touches&#13;
      or what touches it over the whole body, until they reach the&#13;
      soul, causing that perception which we call sight. But when night&#13;
      comes on and the external and kindred fire departs, then the&#13;
      stream of vision is cut off; for going forth to an unlike element&#13;
      it is changed and extinguished, being no longer of one nature&#13;
      with the surrounding atmosphere which is now deprived of fire:&#13;
      and so the eye no longer sees, and we feel disposed to sleep. For&#13;
      when the eyelids, which the gods invented for the preservation of&#13;
      sight, are closed, they keep in the internal fire; and the power&#13;
      of the fire diffuses and equalizes the inward motions; when they&#13;
      are equalized, there is rest, and when the rest is profound,&#13;
      sleep comes over us scarce disturbed by dreams; but where the&#13;
      greater motions still remain, of whatever nature and in whatever&#13;
      locality, they engender corresponding visions in dreams, which&#13;
      are remembered by us when we are awake and in the external world.&#13;
      And now there is no longer any difficulty in understanding the&#13;
      creation of images in mirrors and all smooth and bright surfaces.&#13;
      For from the communion of the internal and external fires, and&#13;
      again from the union of them and their numerous transformations&#13;
      when they meet in the mirror, all these appearances of necessity&#13;
      arise, when the fire from the face coalesces with the fire from&#13;
      the eye on the bright and smooth surface. And right appears left&#13;
      and left right, because the visual rays come into contact with&#13;
      the rays emitted by the object in a manner contrary to the usual&#13;
      mode of meeting; but the right appears right, and the left left,&#13;
      when the position of one of the two concurring lights is&#13;
      reversed; and this happens when the mirror is concave and its&#13;
      smooth surface repels the right stream of vision to the left&#13;
      side, and the left to the right (He is speaking of two kinds of&#13;
      mirrors, first the plane, secondly the concave; and the latter is&#13;
      supposed to be placed, first horizontally, and then vertically.).&#13;
      Or if the mirror be turned vertically, then the concavity makes&#13;
      the countenance appear to be all upside down, and the lower rays&#13;
      are driven upwards and the upper downwards.</p><p>All these are to be reckoned among the second and co-operative&#13;
      causes which God, carrying into execution the idea of the best as&#13;
      far as possible, uses as his ministers. They are thought by most&#13;
      men not to be the second, but the prime causes of all things,&#13;
      because they freeze and heat, and contract and dilate, and the&#13;
      like. But they are not so, for they are incapable of reason or&#13;
      intellect; the only being which can properly have mind is the&#13;
      invisible soul, whereas fire and water, and earth and air, are&#13;
      all of them visible bodies. The lover of intellect and knowledge&#13;
      ought to explore causes of intelligent nature first of all, and,&#13;
      secondly, of those things which, being moved by others, are&#13;
      compelled to move others. And this is what we too must do. Both&#13;
      kinds of causes should be acknowledged by us, but a distinction&#13;
      should be made between those which are endowed with mind and are&#13;
      the workers of things fair and good, and those which are deprived&#13;
      of intelligence and always produce chance effects without order&#13;
      or design. Of the second or co-operative causes of sight, which&#13;
      help to give to the eyes the power which they now possess, enough&#13;
      has been said. I will therefore now proceed to speak of the&#13;
      higher use and purpose for which God has given them to us. The&#13;
      sight in my opinion is the source of the greatest benefit to us,&#13;
      for had we never seen the stars, and the sun, and the heaven,&#13;
      none of the words which we have spoken about the universe would&#13;
      ever have been uttered. But now the sight of day and night, and&#13;
      the months and the revolutions of the years, have created number,&#13;
      and have given us a conception of time, and the power of&#13;
      enquiring about the nature of the universe; and from this source&#13;
      we have derived philosophy, than which no greater good ever was&#13;
      or will be given by the gods to mortal man. This is the greatest&#13;
      boon of sight: and of the lesser benefits why should I speak?&#13;
      even the ordinary man if he were deprived of them would bewail&#13;
      his loss, but in vain. Thus much let me say however: God invented&#13;
      and gave us sight to the end that we might behold the courses of&#13;
      intelligence in the heaven, and apply them to the courses of our&#13;
      own intelligence which are akin to them, the unperturbed to the&#13;
      perturbed; and that we, learning them and partaking of the&#13;
      natural truth of reason, might imitate the absolutely unerring&#13;
      courses of God and regulate our own vagaries. The same may be&#13;
      affirmed of speech and hearing: they have been given by the gods&#13;
      to the same end and for a like reason. For this is the principal&#13;
      end of speech, whereto it most contributes. Moreover, so much of&#13;
      music as is adapted to the sound of the voice and to the sense of&#13;
      hearing is granted to us for the sake of harmony; and harmony,&#13;
      which has motions akin to the revolutions of our souls, is not&#13;
      regarded by the intelligent votary of the Muses as given by them&#13;
      with a view to irrational pleasure, which is deemed to be the&#13;
      purpose of it in our day, but as meant to correct any discord&#13;
      which may have arisen in the courses of the soul, and to be our&#13;
      ally in bringing her into harmony and agreement with herself; and&#13;
      rhythm too was given by them for the same reason, on account of&#13;
      the irregular and graceless ways which prevail among mankind&#13;
      generally, and to help us against them.</p><p>Thus far in what we have been saying, with small exception, the&#13;
      works of intelligence have been set forth; and now we must place&#13;
      by the side of them in our discourse the things which come into&#13;
      being through necessity—for the creation is mixed, being made up&#13;
      of necessity and mind. Mind, the ruling power, persuaded&#13;
      necessity to bring the greater part of created things to&#13;
      perfection, and thus and after this manner in the beginning, when&#13;
      the influence of reason got the better of necessity, the universe&#13;
      was created. But if a person will truly tell of the way in which&#13;
      the work was accomplished, he must include the other influence of&#13;
      the variable cause as well. Wherefore, we must return again and&#13;
      find another suitable beginning, as about the former matters, so&#13;
      also about these. To which end we must consider the nature of&#13;
      fire, and water, and air, and earth, such as they were prior to&#13;
      the creation of the heaven, and what was happening to them in&#13;
      this previous state; for no one has as yet explained the manner&#13;
      of their generation, but we speak of fire and the rest of them,&#13;
      whatever they mean, as though men knew their natures, and we&#13;
      maintain them to be the first principles and letters or elements&#13;
      of the whole, when they cannot reasonably be compared by a man of&#13;
      any sense even to syllables or first compounds. And let me say&#13;
      thus much: I will not now speak of the first principle or&#13;
      principles of all things, or by whatever name they are to be&#13;
      called, for this reason—because it is difficult to set forth my&#13;
      opinion according to the method of discussion which we are at&#13;
      present employing. Do not imagine, any more than I can bring&#13;
      myself to imagine, that I should be right in undertaking so great&#13;
      and difficult a task. Remembering what I said at first about&#13;
      probability, I will do my best to give as probable an explanation&#13;
      as any other—or rather, more probable; and I will first go back&#13;
      to the beginning and try to speak of each thing and of all. Once&#13;
      more, then, at the commencement of my discourse, I call upon God,&#13;
      and beg him to be our saviour out of a strange and unwonted&#13;
      enquiry, and to bring us to the haven of probability. So now let&#13;
      us begin again.</p><p>This new beginning of our discussion of the universe requires a&#13;
      fuller division than the former; for then we made two classes,&#13;
      now a third must be revealed. The two sufficed for the former&#13;
      discussion: one, which we assumed, was a pattern intelligible and&#13;
      always the same; and the second was only the imitation of the&#13;
      pattern, generated and visible. There is also a third kind which&#13;
      we did not distinguish at the time, conceiving that the two would&#13;
      be enough. But now the argument seems to require that we should&#13;
      set forth in words another kind, which is difficult of&#13;
      explanation and dimly seen. What nature are we to attribute to&#13;
      this new kind of being? We reply, that it is the receptacle, and&#13;
      in a manner the nurse, of all generation. I have spoken the&#13;
      truth; but I must express myself in clearer language, and this&#13;
      will be an arduous task for many reasons, and in particular&#13;
      because I must first raise questions concerning fire and the&#13;
      other elements, and determine what each of them is; for to say,&#13;
      with any probability or certitude, which of them should be called&#13;
      water rather than fire, and which should be called any of them&#13;
      rather than all or some one of them, is a difficult matter. How,&#13;
      then, shall we settle this point, and what questions about the&#13;
      elements may be fairly raised?</p><p>In the first place, we see that what we just now called water, by&#13;
      condensation, I suppose, becomes stone and earth; and this same&#13;
      element, when melted and dispersed, passes into vapour and air.&#13;
      Air, again, when inflamed, becomes fire; and again fire, when&#13;
      condensed and extinguished, passes once more into the form of&#13;
      air; and once more, air, when collected and condensed, produces&#13;
      cloud and mist; and from these, when still more compressed, comes&#13;
      flowing water, and from water comes earth and stones once more;&#13;
      and thus generation appears to be transmitted from one to the&#13;
      other in a circle. Thus, then, as the several elements never&#13;
      present themselves in the same form, how can any one have the&#13;
      assurance to assert positively that any of them, whatever it may&#13;
      be, is one thing rather than another? No one can. But much the&#13;
      safest plan is to speak of them as follows:—Anything which we see&#13;
      to be continually changing, as, for example, fire, we must not&#13;
      call ‘this’ or ‘that,’ but rather say that it is ‘of such a&#13;
      nature’; nor let us speak of water as ‘this’; but always as&#13;
      ‘such’; nor must we imply that there is any stability in any of&#13;
      those things which we indicate by the use of the words ‘this’ and&#13;
      ‘that,’ supposing ourselves to signify something thereby; for&#13;
      they are too volatile to be detained in any such expressions as&#13;
      ‘this,’ or ‘that,’ or ‘relative to this,’ or any other mode of&#13;
      speaking which represents them as permanent. We ought not to&#13;
      apply ‘this’ to any of them, but rather the word ‘such’; which&#13;
      expresses the similar principle circulating in each and all of&#13;
      them; for example, that should be called ‘fire’ which is of such&#13;
      a nature always, and so of everything that has generation. That&#13;
      in which the elements severally grow up, and appear, and decay,&#13;
      is alone to be called by the name ‘this’ or ‘that’; but that&#13;
      which is of a certain nature, hot or white, or anything which&#13;
      admits of opposite qualities, and all things that are compounded&#13;
      of them, ought not to be so denominated. Let me make another&#13;
      attempt to explain my meaning more clearly. Suppose a person to&#13;
      make all kinds of figures of gold and to be always transmuting&#13;
      one form into all the rest;—somebody points to one of them and&#13;
      asks what it is. By far the safest and truest answer is, That is&#13;
      gold; and not to call the triangle or any other figures which are&#13;
      formed in the gold ‘these,’ as though they had existence, since&#13;
      they are in process of change while he is making the assertion;&#13;
      but if the questioner be willing to take the safe and indefinite&#13;
      expression, ‘such,’ we should be satisfied. And the same argument&#13;
      applies to the universal nature which receives all bodies—that&#13;
      must be always called the same; for, while receiving all things,&#13;
      she never departs at all from her own nature, and never in any&#13;
      way, or at any time, assumes a form like that of any of the&#13;
      things which enter into her; she is the natural recipient of all&#13;
      impressions, and is stirred and informed by them, and appears&#13;
      different from time to time by reason of them. But the forms&#13;
      which enter into and go out of her are the likenesses of real&#13;
      existences modelled after their patterns in a wonderful and&#13;
      inexplicable manner, which we will hereafter investigate. For the&#13;
      present we have only to conceive of three natures: first, that&#13;
      which is in process of generation; secondly, that in which the&#13;
      generation takes place; and thirdly, that of which the thing&#13;
      generated is a resemblance. And we may liken the receiving&#13;
      principle to a mother, and the source or spring to a father, and&#13;
      the intermediate nature to a child; and may remark further, that&#13;
      if the model is to take every variety of form, then the matter in&#13;
      which the model is fashioned will not be duly prepared, unless it&#13;
      is formless, and free from the impress of any of those shapes&#13;
      which it is hereafter to receive from without. For if the matter&#13;
      were like any of the supervening forms, then whenever any&#13;
      opposite or entirely different nature was stamped upon its&#13;
      surface, it would take the impression badly, because it would&#13;
      intrude its own shape. Wherefore, that which is to receive all&#13;
      forms should have no form; as in making perfumes they first&#13;
      contrive that the liquid substance which is to receive the scent&#13;
      shall be as inodorous as possible; or as those who wish to&#13;
      impress figures on soft substances do not allow any previous&#13;
      impression to remain, but begin by making the surface as even and&#13;
      smooth as possible. In the same way that which is to receive&#13;
      perpetually and through its whole extent the resemblances of all&#13;
      eternal beings ought to be devoid of any particular form.&#13;
      Wherefore, the mother and receptacle of all created and visible&#13;
      and in any way sensible things, is not to be termed earth, or&#13;
      air, or fire, or water, or any of their compounds or any of the&#13;
      elements from which these are derived, but is an invisible and&#13;
      formless being which receives all things and in some mysterious&#13;
      way partakes of the intelligible, and is most incomprehensible.&#13;
      In saying this we shall not be far wrong; as far, however, as we&#13;
      can attain to a knowledge of her from the previous&#13;
      considerations, we may truly say that fire is that part of her&#13;
      nature which from time to time is inflamed, and water that which&#13;
      is moistened, and that the mother substance becomes earth and&#13;
      air, in so far as she receives the impressions of them.</p><p>Let us consider this question more precisely. Is there any&#13;
      self-existent fire? and do all those things which we call&#13;
      self-existent exist? or are only those things which we see, or in&#13;
      some way perceive through the bodily organs, truly existent, and&#13;
      nothing whatever besides them? And is all that which we call an&#13;
      intelligible essence nothing at all, and only a name? Here is a&#13;
      question which we must not leave unexamined or undetermined, nor&#13;
      must we affirm too confidently that there can be no decision;&#13;
      neither must we interpolate in our present long discourse a&#13;
      digression equally long, but if it is possible to set forth a&#13;
      great principle in a few words, that is just what we want.</p><p>Thus I state my view:—If mind and true opinion are two distinct&#13;
      classes, then I say that there certainly are these self-existent&#13;
      ideas unperceived by sense, and apprehended only by the mind; if,&#13;
      however, as some say, true opinion differs in no respect from&#13;
      mind, then everything that we perceive through the body is to be&#13;
      regarded as most real and certain. But we must affirm them to be&#13;
      distinct, for they have a distinct origin and are of a different&#13;
      nature; the one is implanted in us by instruction, the other by&#13;
      persuasion; the one is always accompanied by true reason, the&#13;
      other is without reason; the one cannot be overcome by&#13;
      persuasion, but the other can: and lastly, every man may be said&#13;
      to share in true opinion, but mind is the attribute of the gods&#13;
      and of very few men. Wherefore also we must acknowledge that&#13;
      there is one kind of being which is always the same, uncreated&#13;
      and indestructible, never receiving anything into itself from&#13;
      without, nor itself going out to any other, but invisible and&#13;
      imperceptible by any sense, and of which the contemplation is&#13;
      granted to intelligence only. And there is another nature of the&#13;
      same name with it, and like to it, perceived by sense, created,&#13;
      always in motion, becoming in place and again vanishing out of&#13;
      place, which is apprehended by opinion and sense. And there is a&#13;
      third nature, which is space, and is eternal, and admits not of&#13;
      destruction and provides a home for all created things, and is&#13;
      apprehended without the help of sense, by a kind of spurious&#13;
      reason, and is hardly real; which we beholding as in a dream, say&#13;
      of all existence that it must of necessity be in some place and&#13;
      occupy a space, but that what is neither in heaven nor in earth&#13;
      has no existence. Of these and other things of the same kind,&#13;
      relating to the true and waking reality of nature, we have only&#13;
      this dreamlike sense, and we are unable to cast off sleep and&#13;
      determine the truth about them. For an image, since the reality,&#13;
      after which it is modelled, does not belong to it, and it exists&#13;
      ever as the fleeting shadow of some other, must be inferred to be&#13;
      in another (i.e. in space), grasping existence in some way or&#13;
      other, or it could not be at all. But true and exact reason,&#13;
      vindicating the nature of true being, maintains that while two&#13;
      things (i.e. the image and space) are different they cannot exist&#13;
      one of them in the other and so be one and also two at the same&#13;
      time.</p><p>Thus have I concisely given the result of my thoughts; and my&#13;
      verdict is that being and space and generation, these three,&#13;
      existed in their three ways before the heaven; and that the nurse&#13;
      of generation, moistened by water and inflamed by fire, and&#13;
      receiving the forms of earth and air, and experiencing all the&#13;
      affections which accompany these, presented a strange variety of&#13;
      appearances; and being full of powers which were neither similar&#13;
      nor equally balanced, was never in any part in a state of&#13;
      equipoise, but swaying unevenly hither and thither, was shaken by&#13;
      them, and by its motion again shook them; and the elements when&#13;
      moved were separated and carried continually, some one way, some&#13;
      another; as, when grain is shaken and winnowed by fans and other&#13;
      instruments used in the threshing of corn, the close and heavy&#13;
      particles are borne away and settle in one direction, and the&#13;
      loose and light particles in another. In this manner, the four&#13;
      kinds or elements were then shaken by the receiving vessel,&#13;
      which, moving like a winnowing machine, scattered far away from&#13;
      one another the elements most unlike, and forced the most similar&#13;
      elements into close contact. Wherefore also the various elements&#13;
      had different places before they were arranged so as to form the&#13;
      universe. At first, they were all without reason and measure. But&#13;
      when the world began to get into order, fire and water and earth&#13;
      and air had only certain faint traces of themselves, and were&#13;
      altogether such as everything might be expected to be in the&#13;
      absence of God; this, I say, was their nature at that time, and&#13;
      God fashioned them by form and number. Let it be consistently&#13;
      maintained by us in all that we say that God made them as far as&#13;
      possible the fairest and best, out of things which were not fair&#13;
      and good. And now I will endeavour to show you the disposition&#13;
      and generation of them by an unaccustomed argument, which I am&#13;
      compelled to use; but I believe that you will be able to follow&#13;
      me, for your education has made you familiar with the methods of&#13;
      science.</p><p>In the first place, then, as is evident to all, fire and earth&#13;
      and water and air are bodies. And every sort of body possesses&#13;
      solidity, and every solid must necessarily be contained in&#13;
      planes; and every plane rectilinear figure is composed of&#13;
      triangles; and all triangles are originally of two kinds, both of&#13;
      which are made up of one right and two acute angles; one of them&#13;
      has at either end of the base the half of a divided right angle,&#13;
      having equal sides, while in the other the right angle is divided&#13;
      into unequal parts, having unequal sides. These, then, proceeding&#13;
      by a combination of probability with demonstration, we assume to&#13;
      be the original elements of fire and the other bodies; but the&#13;
      principles which are prior to these God only knows, and he of men&#13;
      who is the friend of God. And next we have to determine what are&#13;
      the four most beautiful bodies which are unlike one another, and&#13;
      of which some are capable of resolution into one another; for&#13;
      having discovered thus much, we shall know the true origin of&#13;
      earth and fire and of the proportionate and intermediate&#13;
      elements. And then we shall not be willing to allow that there&#13;
      are any distinct kinds of visible bodies fairer than these.&#13;
      Wherefore we must endeavour to construct the four forms of bodies&#13;
      which excel in beauty, and then we shall be able to say that we&#13;
      have sufficiently apprehended their nature. Now of the two&#13;
      triangles, the isosceles has one form only; the scalene or&#13;
      unequal-sided has an infinite number. Of the infinite forms we&#13;
      must select the most beautiful, if we are to proceed in due&#13;
      order, and any one who can point out a more beautiful form than&#13;
      ours for the construction of these bodies, shall carry off the&#13;
      palm, not as an enemy, but as a friend. Now, the one which we&#13;
      maintain to be the most beautiful of all the many triangles (and&#13;
      we need not speak of the others) is that of which the double&#13;
      forms a third triangle which is equilateral; the reason of this&#13;
      would be long to tell; he who disproves what we are saying, and&#13;
      shows that we are mistaken, may claim a friendly victory. Then&#13;
      let us choose two triangles, out of which fire and the other&#13;
      elements have been constructed, one isosceles, the other having&#13;
      the square of the longer side equal to three times the square of&#13;
      the lesser side.</p><p>Now is the time to explain what was before obscurely said: there&#13;
      was an error in imagining that all the four elements might be&#13;
      generated by and into one another; this, I say, was an erroneous&#13;
      supposition, for there are generated from the triangles which we&#13;
      have selected four kinds—three from the one which has the sides&#13;
      unequal; the fourth alone is framed out of the isosceles&#13;
      triangle. Hence they cannot all be resolved into one another, a&#13;
      great number of small bodies being combined into a few large&#13;
      ones, or the converse. But three of them can be thus resolved and&#13;
      compounded, for they all spring from one, and when the greater&#13;
      bodies are broken up, many small bodies will spring up out of&#13;
      them and take their own proper figures; or, again, when many&#13;
      small bodies are dissolved into their triangles, if they become&#13;
      one, they will form one large mass of another kind. So much for&#13;
      their passage into one another. I have now to speak of their&#13;
      several kinds, and show out of what combinations of numbers each&#13;
      of them was formed. The first will be the simplest and smallest&#13;
      construction, and its element is that triangle which has its&#13;
      hypotenuse twice the lesser side. When two such triangles are&#13;
      joined at the diagonal, and this is repeated three times, and the&#13;
      triangles rest their diagonals and shorter sides on the same&#13;
      point as a centre, a single equilateral triangle is formed out of&#13;
      six triangles; and four equilateral triangles, if put together,&#13;
      make out of every three plane angles one solid angle, being that&#13;
      which is nearest to the most obtuse of plane angles; and out of&#13;
      the combination of these four angles arises the first solid form&#13;
      which distributes into equal and similar parts the whole circle&#13;
      in which it is inscribed. The second species of solid is formed&#13;
      out of the same triangles, which unite as eight equilateral&#13;
      triangles and form one solid angle out of four plane angles, and&#13;
      out of six such angles the second body is completed. And the&#13;
      third body is made up of 120 triangular elements, forming twelve&#13;
      solid angles, each of them included in five plane equilateral&#13;
      triangles, having altogether twenty bases, each of which is an&#13;
      equilateral triangle. The one element (that is, the triangle&#13;
      which has its hypotenuse twice the lesser side) having generated&#13;
      these figures, generated no more; but the isosceles triangle&#13;
      produced the fourth elementary figure, which is compounded of&#13;
      four such triangles, joining their right angles in a centre, and&#13;
      forming one equilateral quadrangle. Six of these united form&#13;
      eight solid angles, each of which is made by the combination of&#13;
      three plane right angles; the figure of the body thus composed is&#13;
      a cube, having six plane quadrangular equilateral bases. There&#13;
      was yet a fifth combination which God used in the delineation of&#13;
      the universe.</p><p>Now, he who, duly reflecting on all this, enquires whether the&#13;
      worlds are to be regarded as indefinite or definite in number,&#13;
      will be of opinion that the notion of their indefiniteness is&#13;
      characteristic of a sadly indefinite and ignorant mind. He,&#13;
      however, who raises the question whether they are to be truly&#13;
      regarded as one or five, takes up a more reasonable position.&#13;
      Arguing from probabilities, I am of opinion that they are one;&#13;
      another, regarding the question from another point of view, will&#13;
      be of another mind. But, leaving this enquiry, let us proceed to&#13;
      distribute the elementary forms, which have now been created in&#13;
      idea, among the four elements.</p><p>To earth, then, let us assign the cubical form; for earth is the&#13;
      most immoveable of the four and the most plastic of all bodies,&#13;
      and that which has the most stable bases must of necessity be of&#13;
      such a nature. Now, of the triangles which we assumed at first,&#13;
      that which has two equal sides is by nature more firmly based&#13;
      than that which has unequal sides; and of the compound figures&#13;
      which are formed out of either, the plane equilateral quadrangle&#13;
      has necessarily a more stable basis than the equilateral&#13;
      triangle, both in the whole and in the parts. Wherefore, in&#13;
      assigning this figure to earth, we adhere to probability; and to&#13;
      water we assign that one of the remaining forms which is the&#13;
      least moveable; and the most moveable of them to fire; and to air&#13;
      that which is intermediate. Also we assign the smallest body to&#13;
      fire, and the greatest to water, and the intermediate in size to&#13;
      air; and, again, the acutest body to fire, and the next in&#13;
      acuteness to air, and the third to water. Of all these elements,&#13;
      that which has the fewest bases must necessarily be the most&#13;
      moveable, for it must be the acutest and most penetrating in&#13;
      every way, and also the lightest as being composed of the&#13;
      smallest number of similar particles: and the second body has&#13;
      similar properties in a second degree, and the third body in the&#13;
      third degree. Let it be agreed, then, both according to strict&#13;
      reason and according to probability, that the pyramid is the&#13;
      solid which is the original element and seed of fire; and let us&#13;
      assign the element which was next in the order of generation to&#13;
      air, and the third to water. We must imagine all these to be so&#13;
      small that no single particle of any of the four kinds is seen by&#13;
      us on account of their smallness: but when many of them are&#13;
      collected together their aggregates are seen. And the ratios of&#13;
      their numbers, motions, and other properties, everywhere God, as&#13;
      far as necessity allowed or gave consent, has exactly perfected,&#13;
      and harmonized in due proportion.</p><p>From all that we have just been saying about the elements or&#13;
      kinds, the most probable conclusion is as follows:—earth, when&#13;
      meeting with fire and dissolved by its sharpness, whether the&#13;
      dissolution take place in the fire itself or perhaps in some mass&#13;
      of air or water, is borne hither and thither, until its parts,&#13;
      meeting together and mutually harmonising, again become earth;&#13;
      for they can never take any other form. But water, when divided&#13;
      by fire or by air, on re-forming, may become one part fire and&#13;
      two parts air; and a single volume of air divided becomes two of&#13;
      fire. Again, when a small body of fire is contained in a larger&#13;
      body of air or water or earth, and both are moving, and the fire&#13;
      struggling is overcome and broken up, then two volumes of fire&#13;
      form one volume of air; and when air is overcome and cut up into&#13;
      small pieces, two and a half parts of air are condensed into one&#13;
      part of water. Let us consider the matter in another way. When&#13;
      one of the other elements is fastened upon by fire, and is cut by&#13;
      the sharpness of its angles and sides, it coalesces with the&#13;
      fire, and then ceases to be cut by them any longer. For no&#13;
      element which is one and the same with itself can be changed by&#13;
      or change another of the same kind and in the same state. But so&#13;
      long as in the process of transition the weaker is fighting&#13;
      against the stronger, the dissolution continues. Again, when a&#13;
      few small particles, enclosed in many larger ones, are in process&#13;
      of decomposition and extinction, they only cease from their&#13;
      tendency to extinction when they consent to pass into the&#13;
      conquering nature, and fire becomes air and air water. But if&#13;
      bodies of another kind go and attack them (i.e. the small&#13;
      particles), the latter continue to be dissolved until, being&#13;
      completely forced back and dispersed, they make their escape to&#13;
      their own kindred, or else, being overcome and assimilated to the&#13;
      conquering power, they remain where they are and dwell with their&#13;
      victors, and from being many become one. And owing to these&#13;
      affections, all things are changing their place, for by the&#13;
      motion of the receiving vessel the bulk of each class is&#13;
      distributed into its proper place; but those things which become&#13;
      unlike themselves and like other things, are hurried by the&#13;
      shaking into the place of the things to which they grow like.</p><p>Now all unmixed and primary bodies are produced by such causes as&#13;
      these. As to the subordinate species which are included in the&#13;
      greater kinds, they are to be attributed to the varieties in the&#13;
      structure of the two original triangles. For either structure did&#13;
      not originally produce the triangle of one size only, but some&#13;
      larger and some smaller, and there are as many sizes as there are&#13;
      species of the four elements. Hence when they are mingled with&#13;
      themselves and with one another there is an endless variety of&#13;
      them, which those who would arrive at the probable truth of&#13;
      nature ought duly to consider.</p><p>Unless a person comes to an understanding about the nature and&#13;
      conditions of rest and motion, he will meet with many&#13;
      difficulties in the discussion which follows. Something has been&#13;
      said of this matter already, and something more remains to be&#13;
      said, which is, that motion never exists in what is uniform. For&#13;
      to conceive that anything can be moved without a mover is hard or&#13;
      indeed impossible, and equally impossible to conceive that there&#13;
      can be a mover unless there be something which can be&#13;
      moved—motion cannot exist where either of these are wanting, and&#13;
      for these to be uniform is impossible; wherefore we must assign&#13;
      rest to uniformity and motion to the want of uniformity. Now&#13;
      inequality is the cause of the nature which is wanting in&#13;
      uniformity; and of this we have already described the origin. But&#13;
      there still remains the further point—why things when divided&#13;
      after their kinds do not cease to pass through one another and to&#13;
      change their place—which we will now proceed to explain. In the&#13;
      revolution of the universe are comprehended all the four&#13;
      elements, and this being circular and having a tendency to come&#13;
      together, compresses everything and will not allow any place to&#13;
      be left void. Wherefore, also, fire above all things penetrates&#13;
      everywhere, and air next, as being next in rarity of the&#13;
      elements; and the two other elements in like manner penetrate&#13;
      according to their degrees of rarity. For those things which are&#13;
      composed of the largest particles have the largest void left in&#13;
      their compositions, and those which are composed of the smallest&#13;
      particles have the least. And the contraction caused by the&#13;
      compression thrusts the smaller particles into the interstices of&#13;
      the larger. And thus, when the small parts are placed side by&#13;
      side with the larger, and the lesser divide the greater and the&#13;
      greater unite the lesser, all the elements are borne up and down&#13;
      and hither and thither towards their own places; for the change&#13;
      in the size of each changes its position in space. And these&#13;
      causes generate an inequality which is always maintained, and is&#13;
      continually creating a perpetual motion of the elements in all&#13;
      time.</p><p>In the next place we have to consider that there are divers kinds&#13;
      of fire. There are, for example, first, flame; and secondly,&#13;
      those emanations of flame which do not burn but only give light&#13;
      to the eyes; thirdly, the remains of fire, which are seen in&#13;
      red-hot embers after the flame has been extinguished. There are&#13;
      similar differences in the air; of which the brightest part is&#13;
      called the aether, and the most turbid sort mist and darkness;&#13;
      and there are various other nameless kinds which arise from the&#13;
      inequality of the triangles. Water, again, admits in the first&#13;
      place of a division into two kinds; the one liquid and the other&#13;
      fusile. The liquid kind is composed of the small and unequal&#13;
      particles of water; and moves itself and is moved by other bodies&#13;
      owing to the want of uniformity and the shape of its particles;&#13;
      whereas the fusile kind, being formed of large and uniform&#13;
      particles, is more stable than the other, and is heavy and&#13;
      compact by reason of its uniformity. But when fire gets in and&#13;
      dissolves the particles and destroys the uniformity, it has&#13;
      greater mobility, and becoming fluid is thrust forth by the&#13;
      neighbouring air and spreads upon the earth; and this dissolution&#13;
      of the solid masses is called melting, and their spreading out&#13;
      upon the earth flowing. Again, when the fire goes out of the&#13;
      fusile substance, it does not pass into a vacuum, but into the&#13;
      neighbouring air; and the air which is displaced forces together&#13;
      the liquid and still moveable mass into the place which was&#13;
      occupied by the fire, and unites it with itself. Thus compressed&#13;
      the mass resumes its equability, and is again at unity with&#13;
      itself, because the fire which was the author of the inequality&#13;
      has retreated; and this departure of the fire is called cooling,&#13;
      and the coming together which follows upon it is termed&#13;
      congealment. Of all the kinds termed fusile, that which is the&#13;
      densest and is formed out of the finest and most uniform parts is&#13;
      that most precious possession called gold, which is hardened by&#13;
      filtration through rock; this is unique in kind, and has both a&#13;
      glittering and a yellow colour. A shoot of gold, which is so&#13;
      dense as to be very hard, and takes a black colour, is termed&#13;
      adamant. There is also another kind which has parts nearly like&#13;
      gold, and of which there are several species; it is denser than&#13;
      gold, and it contains a small and fine portion of earth, and is&#13;
      therefore harder, yet also lighter because of the great&#13;
      interstices which it has within itself; and this substance, which&#13;
      is one of the bright and denser kinds of water, when solidified&#13;
      is called copper. There is an alloy of earth mingled with it,&#13;
      which, when the two parts grow old and are disunited, shows&#13;
      itself separately and is called rust. The remaining phenomena of&#13;
      the same kind there will be no difficulty in reasoning out by the&#13;
      method of probabilities. A man may sometimes set aside&#13;
      meditations about eternal things, and for recreation turn to&#13;
      consider the truths of generation which are probable only; he&#13;
      will thus gain a pleasure not to be repented of, and secure for&#13;
      himself while he lives a wise and moderate pastime. Let us grant&#13;
      ourselves this indulgence, and go through the probabilities&#13;
      relating to the same subjects which follow next in order.</p><p>Water which is mingled with fire, so much as is fine and liquid&#13;
      (being so called by reason of its motion and the way in which it&#13;
      rolls along the ground), and soft, because its bases give way and&#13;
      are less stable than those of earth, when separated from fire and&#13;
      air and isolated, becomes more uniform, and by their retirement&#13;
      is compressed into itself; and if the condensation be very great,&#13;
      the water above the earth becomes hail, but on the earth, ice;&#13;
      and that which is congealed in a less degree and is only half&#13;
      solid, when above the earth is called snow, and when upon the&#13;
      earth, and condensed from dew, hoar-frost. Then, again, there are&#13;
      the numerous kinds of water which have been mingled with one&#13;
      another, and are distilled through plants which grow in the&#13;
      earth; and this whole class is called by the name of juices or&#13;
      saps. The unequal admixture of these fluids creates a variety of&#13;
      species; most of them are nameless, but four which are of a fiery&#13;
      nature are clearly distinguished and have names. First, there is&#13;
      wine, which warms the soul as well as the body: secondly, there&#13;
      is the oily nature, which is smooth and divides the visual ray,&#13;
      and for this reason is bright and shining and of a glistening&#13;
      appearance, including pitch, the juice of the castor berry, oil&#13;
      itself, and other things of a like kind: thirdly, there is the&#13;
      class of substances which expand the contracted parts of the&#13;
      mouth, until they return to their natural state, and by reason of&#13;
      this property create sweetness;—these are included under the&#13;
      general name of honey: and, lastly, there is a frothy nature,&#13;
      which differs from all juices, having a burning quality which&#13;
      dissolves the flesh; it is called opos (a vegetable acid).</p><p>As to the kinds of earth, that which is filtered through water&#13;
      passes into stone in the following manner:—The water which mixes&#13;
      with the earth and is broken up in the process changes into air,&#13;
      and taking this form mounts into its own place. But as there is&#13;
      no surrounding vacuum it thrusts away the neighbouring air, and&#13;
      this being rendered heavy, and, when it is displaced, having been&#13;
      poured around the mass of earth, forcibly compresses it and&#13;
      drives it into the vacant space whence the new air had come up;&#13;
      and the earth when compressed by the air into an indissoluble&#13;
      union with water becomes rock. The fairer sort is that which is&#13;
      made up of equal and similar parts and is transparent; that which&#13;
      has the opposite qualities is inferior. But when all the watery&#13;
      part is suddenly drawn out by fire, a more brittle substance is&#13;
      formed, to which we give the name of pottery. Sometimes also&#13;
      moisture may remain, and the earth which has been fused by fire&#13;
      becomes, when cool, a certain stone of a black colour. A like&#13;
      separation of the water which had been copiously mingled with&#13;
      them may occur in two substances composed of finer particles of&#13;
      earth and of a briny nature; out of either of them a&#13;
      half-solid-body is then formed, soluble in water—the one, soda,&#13;
      which is used for purging away oil and earth, the other, salt,&#13;
      which harmonizes so well in combinations pleasing to the palate,&#13;
      and is, as the law testifies, a substance dear to the gods. The&#13;
      compounds of earth and water are not soluble by water, but by&#13;
      fire only, and for this reason:—Neither fire nor air melt masses&#13;
      of earth; for their particles, being smaller than the interstices&#13;
      in its structure, have plenty of room to move without forcing&#13;
      their way, and so they leave the earth unmelted and undissolved;&#13;
      but particles of water, which are larger, force a passage, and&#13;
      dissolve and melt the earth. Wherefore earth when not&#13;
      consolidated by force is dissolved by water only; when&#13;
      consolidated, by nothing but fire; for this is the only body&#13;
      which can find an entrance. The cohesion of water again, when&#13;
      very strong, is dissolved by fire only—when weaker, then either&#13;
      by air or fire—the former entering the interstices, and the&#13;
      latter penetrating even the triangles. But nothing can dissolve&#13;
      air, when strongly condensed, which does not reach the elements&#13;
      or triangles; or if not strongly condensed, then only fire can&#13;
      dissolve it. As to bodies composed of earth and water, while the&#13;
      water occupies the vacant interstices of the earth in them which&#13;
      are compressed by force, the particles of water which approach&#13;
      them from without, finding no entrance, flow around the entire&#13;
      mass and leave it undissolved; but the particles of fire,&#13;
      entering into the interstices of the water, do to the water what&#13;
      water does to earth and fire to air (The text seems to be&#13;
      corrupt.), and are the sole causes of the compound body of earth&#13;
      and water liquefying and becoming fluid. Now these bodies are of&#13;
      two kinds; some of them, such as glass and the fusible sort of&#13;
      stones, have less water than they have earth; on the other hand,&#13;
      substances of the nature of wax and incense have more of water&#13;
      entering into their composition.</p><p>I have thus shown the various classes of bodies as they are&#13;
      diversified by their forms and combinations and changes into one&#13;
      another, and now I must endeavour to set forth their affections&#13;
      and the causes of them. In the first place, the bodies which I&#13;
      have been describing are necessarily objects of sense. But we&#13;
      have not yet considered the origin of flesh, or what belongs to&#13;
      flesh, or of that part of the soul which is mortal. And these&#13;
      things cannot be adequately explained without also explaining the&#13;
      affections which are concerned with sensation, nor the latter&#13;
      without the former: and yet to explain them together is hardly&#13;
      possible; for which reason we must assume first one or the other&#13;
      and afterwards examine the nature of our hypothesis. In order,&#13;
      then, that the affections may follow regularly after the&#13;
      elements, let us presuppose the existence of body and soul.</p><p>First, let us enquire what we mean by saying that fire is hot;&#13;
      and about this we may reason from the dividing or cutting power&#13;
      which it exercises on our bodies. We all of us feel that fire is&#13;
      sharp; and we may further consider the fineness of the sides, and&#13;
      the sharpness of the angles, and the smallness of the particles,&#13;
      and the swiftness of the motion—all this makes the action of fire&#13;
      violent and sharp, so that it cuts whatever it meets. And we must&#13;
      not forget that the original figure of fire (i.e. the pyramid),&#13;
      more than any other form, has a dividing power which cuts our&#13;
      bodies into small pieces (Kepmatizei), and thus naturally&#13;
      produces that affection which we call heat; and hence the origin&#13;
      of the name (thepmos, Kepma). Now, the opposite of this is&#13;
      sufficiently manifest; nevertheless we will not fail to describe&#13;
      it. For the larger particles of moisture which surround the body,&#13;
      entering in and driving out the lesser, but not being able to&#13;
      take their places, compress the moist principle in us; and this&#13;
      from being unequal and disturbed, is forced by them into a state&#13;
      of rest, which is due to equability and compression. But things&#13;
      which are contracted contrary to nature are by nature at war, and&#13;
      force themselves apart; and to this war and convulsion the name&#13;
      of shivering and trembling is given; and the whole affection and&#13;
      the cause of the affection are both termed cold. That is called&#13;
      hard to which our flesh yields, and soft which yields to our&#13;
      flesh; and things are also termed hard and soft relatively to one&#13;
      another. That which yields has a small base; but that which rests&#13;
      on quadrangular bases is firmly posed and belongs to the class&#13;
      which offers the greatest resistance; so too does that which is&#13;
      the most compact and therefore most repellent. The nature of the&#13;
      light and the heavy will be best understood when examined in&#13;
      connexion with our notions of above and below; for it is quite a&#13;
      mistake to suppose that the universe is parted into two regions,&#13;
      separate from and opposite to each other, the one a lower to&#13;
      which all things tend which have any bulk, and an upper to which&#13;
      things only ascend against their will. For as the universe is in&#13;
      the form of a sphere, all the extremities, being equidistant from&#13;
      the centre, are equally extremities, and the centre, which is&#13;
      equidistant from them, is equally to be regarded as the opposite&#13;
      of them all. Such being the nature of the world, when a person&#13;
      says that any of these points is above or below, may he not be&#13;
      justly charged with using an improper expression? For the centre&#13;
      of the world cannot be rightly called either above or below, but&#13;
      is the centre and nothing else; and the circumference is not the&#13;
      centre, and has in no one part of itself a different relation to&#13;
      the centre from what it has in any of the opposite parts. Indeed,&#13;
      when it is in every direction similar, how can one rightly give&#13;
      to it names which imply opposition? For if there were any solid&#13;
      body in equipoise at the centre of the universe, there would be&#13;
      nothing to draw it to this extreme rather than to that, for they&#13;
      are all perfectly similar; and if a person were to go round the&#13;
      world in a circle, he would often, when standing at the antipodes&#13;
      of his former position, speak of the same point as above and&#13;
      below; for, as I was saying just now, to speak of the whole which&#13;
      is in the form of a globe as having one part above and another&#13;
      below is not like a sensible man. The reason why these names are&#13;
      used, and the circumstances under which they are ordinarily&#13;
      applied by us to the division of the heavens, may be elucidated&#13;
      by the following supposition:—if a person were to stand in that&#13;
      part of the universe which is the appointed place of fire, and&#13;
      where there is the great mass of fire to which fiery bodies&#13;
      gather—if, I say, he were to ascend thither, and, having the&#13;
      power to do this, were to abstract particles of fire and put them&#13;
      in scales and weigh them, and then, raising the balance, were to&#13;
      draw the fire by force towards the uncongenial element of the&#13;
      air, it would be very evident that he could compel the smaller&#13;
      mass more readily than the larger; for when two things are&#13;
      simultaneously raised by one and the same power, the smaller body&#13;
      must necessarily yield to the superior power with less reluctance&#13;
      than the larger; and the larger body is called heavy and said to&#13;
      tend downwards, and the smaller body is called light and said to&#13;
      tend upwards. And we may detect ourselves who are upon the earth&#13;
      doing precisely the same thing. For we often separate earthy&#13;
      natures, and sometimes earth itself, and draw them into the&#13;
      uncongenial element of air by force and contrary to nature, both&#13;
      clinging to their kindred elements. But that which is smaller&#13;
      yields to the impulse given by us towards the dissimilar element&#13;
      more easily than the larger; and so we call the former light, and&#13;
      the place towards which it is impelled we call above, and the&#13;
      contrary state and place we call heavy and below respectively.&#13;
      Now the relations of these must necessarily vary, because the&#13;
      principal masses of the different elements hold opposite&#13;
      positions; for that which is light, heavy, below or above in one&#13;
      place will be found to be and become contrary and transverse and&#13;
      every way diverse in relation to that which is light, heavy,&#13;
      below or above in an opposite place. And about all of them this&#13;
      has to be considered:—that the tendency of each towards its&#13;
      kindred element makes the body which is moved heavy, and the&#13;
      place towards which the motion tends below, but things which have&#13;
      an opposite tendency we call by an opposite name. Such are the&#13;
      causes which we assign to these phenomena. As to the smooth and&#13;
      the rough, any one who sees them can explain the reason of them&#13;
      to another. For roughness is hardness mingled with irregularity,&#13;
      and smoothness is produced by the joint effect of uniformity and&#13;
      density.</p><p>The most important of the affections which concern the whole body&#13;
      remains to be considered—that is, the cause of pleasure and pain&#13;
      in the perceptions of which I have been speaking, and in all&#13;
      other things which are perceived by sense through the parts of&#13;
      the body, and have both pains and pleasures attendant on them.&#13;
      Let us imagine the causes of every affection, whether of sense or&#13;
      not, to be of the following nature, remembering that we have&#13;
      already distinguished between the nature which is easy and which&#13;
      is hard to move; for this is the direction in which we must hunt&#13;
      the prey which we mean to take. A body which is of a nature to be&#13;
      easily moved, on receiving an impression however slight, spreads&#13;
      abroad the motion in a circle, the parts communicating with each&#13;
      other, until at last, reaching the principle of mind, they&#13;
      announce the quality of the agent. But a body of the opposite&#13;
      kind, being immobile, and not extending to the surrounding&#13;
      region, merely receives the impression, and does not stir any of&#13;
      the neighbouring parts; and since the parts do not distribute the&#13;
      original impression to other parts, it has no effect of motion on&#13;
      the whole animal, and therefore produces no effect on the&#13;
      patient. This is true of the bones and hair and other more earthy&#13;
      parts of the human body; whereas what was said above relates&#13;
      mainly to sight and hearing, because they have in them the&#13;
      greatest amount of fire and air. Now we must conceive of pleasure&#13;
      and pain in this way. An impression produced in us contrary to&#13;
      nature and violent, if sudden, is painful; and, again, the sudden&#13;
      return to nature is pleasant; but a gentle and gradual return is&#13;
      imperceptible and vice versa. On the other hand the impression of&#13;
      sense which is most easily produced is most readily felt, but is&#13;
      not accompanied by pleasure or pain; such, for example, are the&#13;
      affections of the sight, which, as we said above, is a body&#13;
      naturally uniting with our body in the day-time; for cuttings and&#13;
      burnings and other affections which happen to the sight do not&#13;
      give pain, nor is there pleasure when the sight returns to its&#13;
      natural state; but the sensations are clearest and strongest&#13;
      according to the manner in which the eye is affected by the&#13;
      object, and itself strikes and touches it; there is no violence&#13;
      either in the contraction or dilation of the eye. But bodies&#13;
      formed of larger particles yield to the agent only with a&#13;
      struggle; and then they impart their motions to the whole and&#13;
      cause pleasure and pain—pain when alienated from their natural&#13;
      conditions, and pleasure when restored to them. Things which&#13;
      experience gradual withdrawings and emptyings of their nature,&#13;
      and great and sudden replenishments, fail to perceive the&#13;
      emptying, but are sensible of the replenishment; and so they&#13;
      occasion no pain, but the greatest pleasure, to the mortal part&#13;
      of the soul, as is manifest in the case of perfumes. But things&#13;
      which are changed all of a sudden, and only gradually and with&#13;
      difficulty return to their own nature, have effects in every way&#13;
      opposite to the former, as is evident in the case of burnings and&#13;
      cuttings of the body.</p><p>Thus have we discussed the general affections of the whole body,&#13;
      and the names of the agents which produce them. And now I will&#13;
      endeavour to speak of the affections of particular parts, and the&#13;
      causes and agents of them, as far as I am able. In the first&#13;
      place let us set forth what was omitted when we were speaking of&#13;
      juices, concerning the affections peculiar to the tongue. These&#13;
      too, like most of the other affections, appear to be caused by&#13;
      certain contractions and dilations, but they have besides more of&#13;
      roughness and smoothness than is found in other affections; for&#13;
      whenever earthy particles enter into the small veins which are&#13;
      the testing instruments of the tongue, reaching to the heart, and&#13;
      fall upon the moist, delicate portions of flesh—when, as they are&#13;
      dissolved, they contract and dry up the little veins, they are&#13;
      astringent if they are rougher, but if not so rough, then only&#13;
      harsh. Those of them which are of an abstergent nature, and purge&#13;
      the whole surface of the tongue, if they do it in excess, and so&#13;
      encroach as to consume some part of the flesh itself, like potash&#13;
      and soda, are all termed bitter. But the particles which are&#13;
      deficient in the alkaline quality, and which cleanse only&#13;
      moderately, are called salt, and having no bitterness or&#13;
      roughness, are regarded as rather agreeable than otherwise.&#13;
      Bodies which share in and are made smooth by the heat of the&#13;
      mouth, and which are inflamed, and again in turn inflame that&#13;
      which heats them, and which are so light that they are carried&#13;
      upwards to the sensations of the head, and cut all that comes in&#13;
      their way, by reason of these qualities in them, are all termed&#13;
      pungent. But when these same particles, refined by putrefaction,&#13;
      enter into the narrow veins, and are duly proportioned to the&#13;
      particles of earth and air which are there, they set them&#13;
      whirling about one another, and while they are in a whirl cause&#13;
      them to dash against and enter into one another, and so form&#13;
      hollows surrounding the particles that enter—which watery vessels&#13;
      of air (for a film of moisture, sometimes earthy, sometimes pure,&#13;
      is spread around the air) are hollow spheres of water; and those&#13;
      of them which are pure, are transparent, and are called bubbles,&#13;
      while those composed of the earthy liquid, which is in a state of&#13;
      general agitation and effervescence, are said to boil or&#13;
      ferment—of all these affections the cause is termed acid. And&#13;
      there is the opposite affection arising from an opposite cause,&#13;
      when the mass of entering particles, immersed in the moisture of&#13;
      the mouth, is congenial to the tongue, and smooths and oils over&#13;
      the roughness, and relaxes the parts which are unnaturally&#13;
      contracted, and contracts the parts which are relaxed, and&#13;
      disposes them all according to their nature;—that sort of remedy&#13;
      of violent affections is pleasant and agreeable to every man, and&#13;
      has the name sweet. But enough of this.</p><p>The faculty of smell does not admit of differences of kind; for&#13;
      all smells are of a half-formed nature, and no element is so&#13;
      proportioned as to have any smell. The veins about the nose are&#13;
      too narrow to admit earth and water, and too wide to detain fire&#13;
      and air; and for this reason no one ever perceives the smell of&#13;
      any of them; but smells always proceed from bodies that are damp,&#13;
      or putrefying, or liquefying, or evaporating, and are perceptible&#13;
      only in the intermediate state, when water is changing into air&#13;
      and air into water; and all of them are either vapour or mist.&#13;
      That which is passing out of air into water is mist, and that&#13;
      which is passing from water into air is vapour; and hence all&#13;
      smells are thinner than water and thicker than air. The proof of&#13;
      this is, that when there is any obstruction to the respiration,&#13;
      and a man draws in his breath by force, then no smell filters&#13;
      through, but the air without the smell alone penetrates.&#13;
      Wherefore the varieties of smell have no name, and they have not&#13;
      many, or definite and simple kinds; but they are distinguished&#13;
      only as painful and pleasant, the one sort irritating and&#13;
      disturbing the whole cavity which is situated between the head&#13;
      and the navel, the other having a soothing influence, and&#13;
      restoring this same region to an agreeable and natural condition.</p><p>In considering the third kind of sense, hearing, we must speak of&#13;
      the causes in which it originates. We may in general assume sound&#13;
      to be a blow which passes through the ears, and is transmitted by&#13;
      means of the air, the brain, and the blood, to the soul, and that&#13;
      hearing is the vibration of this blow, which begins in the head&#13;
      and ends in the region of the liver. The sound which moves&#13;
      swiftly is acute, and the sound which moves slowly is grave, and&#13;
      that which is regular is equable and smooth, and the reverse is&#13;
      harsh. A great body of sound is loud, and a small body of sound&#13;
      the reverse. Respecting the harmonies of sound I must hereafter&#13;
      speak.</p><p>There is a fourth class of sensible things, having many intricate&#13;
      varieties, which must now be distinguished. They are called by&#13;
      the general name of colours, and are a flame which emanates from&#13;
      every sort of body, and has particles corresponding to the sense&#13;
      of sight. I have spoken already, in what has preceded, of the&#13;
      causes which generate sight, and in this place it will be natural&#13;
      and suitable to give a rational theory of colours.</p><p>Of the particles coming from other bodies which fall upon the&#13;
      sight, some are smaller and some are larger, and some are equal&#13;
      to the parts of the sight itself. Those which are equal are&#13;
      imperceptible, and we call them transparent. The larger produce&#13;
      contraction, the smaller dilation, in the sight, exercising a&#13;
      power akin to that of hot and cold bodies on the flesh, or of&#13;
      astringent bodies on the tongue, or of those heating bodies which&#13;
      we termed pungent. White and black are similar effects of&#13;
      contraction and dilation in another sphere, and for this reason&#13;
      have a different appearance. Wherefore, we ought to term white&#13;
      that which dilates the visual ray, and the opposite of this is&#13;
      black. There is also a swifter motion of a different sort of fire&#13;
      which strikes and dilates the ray of sight until it reaches the&#13;
      eyes, forcing a way through their passages and melting them, and&#13;
      eliciting from them a union of fire and water which we call&#13;
      tears, being itself an opposite fire which comes to them from an&#13;
      opposite direction—the inner fire flashes forth like lightning,&#13;
      and the outer finds a way in and is extinguished in the moisture,&#13;
      and all sorts of colours are generated by the mixture. This&#13;
      affection is termed dazzling, and the object which produces it is&#13;
      called bright and flashing. There is another sort of fire which&#13;
      is intermediate, and which reaches and mingles with the moisture&#13;
      of the eye without flashing; and in this, the fire mingling with&#13;
      the ray of the moisture, produces a colour like blood, to which&#13;
      we give the name of red. A bright hue mingled with red and white&#13;
      gives the colour called auburn (Greek). The law of proportion,&#13;
      however, according to which the several colours are formed, even&#13;
      if a man knew he would be foolish in telling, for he could not&#13;
      give any necessary reason, nor indeed any tolerable or probable&#13;
      explanation of them. Again, red, when mingled with black and&#13;
      white, becomes purple, but it becomes umber (Greek) when the&#13;
      colours are burnt as well as mingled and the black is more&#13;
      thoroughly mixed with them. Flame-colour (Greek) is produced by a&#13;
      union of auburn and dun (Greek), and dun by an admixture of black&#13;
      and white; pale yellow (Greek), by an admixture of white and&#13;
      auburn. White and bright meeting, and falling upon a full black,&#13;
      become dark blue (Greek), and when dark blue mingles with white,&#13;
      a light blue (Greek) colour is formed, as flame-colour with black&#13;
      makes leek green (Greek). There will be no difficulty in seeing&#13;
      how and by what mixtures the colours derived from these are made&#13;
      according to the rules of probability. He, however, who should&#13;
      attempt to verify all this by experiment, would forget the&#13;
      difference of the human and divine nature. For God only has the&#13;
      knowledge and also the power which are able to combine many&#13;
      things into one and again resolve the one into many. But no man&#13;
      either is or ever will be able to accomplish either the one or&#13;
      the other operation.</p><p>These are the elements, thus of necessity then subsisting, which&#13;
      the creator of the fairest and best of created things associated&#13;
      with himself, when he made the self-sufficing and most perfect&#13;
      God, using the necessary causes as his ministers in the&#13;
      accomplishment of his work, but himself contriving the good in&#13;
      all his creations. Wherefore we may distinguish two sorts of&#13;
      causes, the one divine and the other necessary, and may seek for&#13;
      the divine in all things, as far as our nature admits, with a&#13;
      view to the blessed life; but the necessary kind only for the&#13;
      sake of the divine, considering that without them and when&#13;
      isolated from them, these higher things for which we look cannot&#13;
      be apprehended or received or in any way shared by us.</p><p>Seeing, then, that we have now prepared for our use the various&#13;
      classes of causes which are the material out of which the&#13;
      remainder of our discourse must be woven, just as wood is the&#13;
      material of the carpenter, let us revert in a few words to the&#13;
      point at which we began, and then endeavour to add on a suitable&#13;
      ending to the beginning of our tale.</p><p>As I said at first, when all things were in disorder God created&#13;
      in each thing in relation to itself, and in all things in&#13;
      relation to each other, all the measures and harmonies which they&#13;
      could possibly receive. For in those days nothing had any&#13;
      proportion except by accident; nor did any of the things which&#13;
      now have names deserve to be named at all—as, for example, fire,&#13;
      water, and the rest of the elements. All these the creator first&#13;
      set in order, and out of them he constructed the universe, which&#13;
      was a single animal comprehending in itself all other animals,&#13;
      mortal and immortal. Now of the divine, he himself was the&#13;
      creator, but the creation of the mortal he committed to his&#13;
      offspring. And they, imitating him, received from him the&#13;
      immortal principle of the soul; and around this they proceeded to&#13;
      fashion a mortal body, and made it to be the vehicle of the soul,&#13;
      and constructed within the body a soul of another nature which&#13;
      was mortal, subject to terrible and irresistible&#13;
      affections,—first of all, pleasure, the greatest incitement to&#13;
      evil; then, pain, which deters from good; also rashness and fear,&#13;
      two foolish counsellors, anger hard to be appeased, and hope&#13;
      easily led astray;—these they mingled with irrational sense and&#13;
      with all-daring love according to necessary laws, and so framed&#13;
      man. Wherefore, fearing to pollute the divine any more than was&#13;
      absolutely unavoidable, they gave to the mortal nature a separate&#13;
      habitation in another part of the body, placing the neck between&#13;
      them to be the isthmus and boundary, which they constructed&#13;
      between the head and breast, to keep them apart. And in the&#13;
      breast, and in what is termed the thorax, they encased the mortal&#13;
      soul; and as the one part of this was superior and the other&#13;
      inferior they divided the cavity of the thorax into two parts, as&#13;
      the women’s and men’s apartments are divided in houses, and&#13;
      placed the midriff to be a wall of partition between them. That&#13;
      part of the inferior soul which is endowed with courage and&#13;
      passion and loves contention they settled nearer the head, midway&#13;
      between the midriff and the neck, in order that it might be under&#13;
      the rule of reason and might join with it in controlling and&#13;
      restraining the desires when they are no longer willing of their&#13;
      own accord to obey the word of command issuing from the citadel.</p><p>The heart, the knot of the veins and the fountain of the blood&#13;
      which races through all the limbs, was set in the place of guard,&#13;
      that when the might of passion was roused by reason making&#13;
      proclamation of any wrong assailing them from without or being&#13;
      perpetrated by the desires within, quickly the whole power of&#13;
      feeling in the body, perceiving these commands and threats, might&#13;
      obey and follow through every turn and alley, and thus allow the&#13;
      principle of the best to have the command in all of them. But the&#13;
      gods, foreknowing that the palpitation of the heart in the&#13;
      expectation of danger and the swelling and excitement of passion&#13;
      was caused by fire, formed and implanted as a supporter to the&#13;
      heart the lung, which was, in the first place, soft and&#13;
      bloodless, and also had within hollows like the pores of a&#13;
      sponge, in order that by receiving the breath and the drink, it&#13;
      might give coolness and the power of respiration and alleviate&#13;
      the heat. Wherefore they cut the air-channels leading to the&#13;
      lung, and placed the lung about the heart as a soft spring, that,&#13;
      when passion was rife within, the heart, beating against a&#13;
      yielding body, might be cooled and suffer less, and might thus&#13;
      become more ready to join with passion in the service of reason.</p><p>The part of the soul which desires meats and drinks and the other&#13;
      things of which it has need by reason of the bodily nature, they&#13;
      placed between the midriff and the boundary of the navel,&#13;
      contriving in all this region a sort of manger for the food of&#13;
      the body; and there they bound it down like a wild animal which&#13;
      was chained up with man, and must be nourished if man was to&#13;
      exist. They appointed this lower creation his place here in order&#13;
      that he might be always feeding at the manger, and have his&#13;
      dwelling as far as might be from the council-chamber, making as&#13;
      little noise and disturbance as possible, and permitting the best&#13;
      part to advise quietly for the good of the whole. And knowing&#13;
      that this lower principle in man would not comprehend reason, and&#13;
      even if attaining to some degree of perception would never&#13;
      naturally care for rational notions, but that it would be led&#13;
      away by phantoms and visions night and day,—to be a remedy for&#13;
      this, God combined with it the liver, and placed it in the house&#13;
      of the lower nature, contriving that it should be solid and&#13;
      smooth, and bright and sweet, and should also have a bitter&#13;
      quality, in order that the power of thought, which proceeds from&#13;
      the mind, might be reflected as in a mirror which receives&#13;
      likenesses of objects and gives back images of them to the sight;&#13;
      and so might strike terror into the desires, when, making use of&#13;
      the bitter part of the liver, to which it is akin, it comes&#13;
      threatening and invading, and diffusing this bitter element&#13;
      swiftly through the whole liver produces colours like bile, and&#13;
      contracting every part makes it wrinkled and rough; and twisting&#13;
      out of its right place and contorting the lobe and closing and&#13;
      shutting up the vessels and gates, causes pain and loathing. And&#13;
      the converse happens when some gentle inspiration of the&#13;
      understanding pictures images of an opposite character, and&#13;
      allays the bile and bitterness by refusing to stir or touch the&#13;
      nature opposed to itself, but by making use of the natural&#13;
      sweetness of the liver, corrects all things and makes them to be&#13;
      right and smooth and free, and renders the portion of the soul&#13;
      which resides about the liver happy and joyful, enabling it to&#13;
      pass the night in peace, and to practise divination in sleep,&#13;
      inasmuch as it has no share in mind and reason. For the authors&#13;
      of our being, remembering the command of their father when he&#13;
      bade them create the human race as good as they could, that they&#13;
      might correct our inferior parts and make them to attain a&#13;
      measure of truth, placed in the liver the seat of divination. And&#13;
      herein is a proof that God has given the art of divination not to&#13;
      the wisdom, but to the foolishness of man. No man, when in his&#13;
      wits, attains prophetic truth and inspiration; but when he&#13;
      receives the inspired word, either his intelligence is enthralled&#13;
      in sleep, or he is demented by some distemper or possession. And&#13;
      he who would understand what he remembers to have been said,&#13;
      whether in a dream or when he was awake, by the prophetic and&#13;
      inspired nature, or would determine by reason the meaning of the&#13;
      apparitions which he has seen, and what indications they afford&#13;
      to this man or that, of past, present or future good and evil,&#13;
      must first recover his wits. But, while he continues demented, he&#13;
      cannot judge of the visions which he sees or the words which he&#13;
      utters; the ancient saying is very true, that ‘only a man who has&#13;
      his wits can act or judge about himself and his own affairs.’ And&#13;
      for this reason it is customary to appoint interpreters to be&#13;
      judges of the true inspiration. Some persons call them prophets;&#13;
      they are quite unaware that they are only the expositors of dark&#13;
      sayings and visions, and are not to be called prophets at all,&#13;
      but only interpreters of prophecy.</p><p>Such is the nature of the liver, which is placed as we have&#13;
      described in order that it may give prophetic intimations. During&#13;
      the life of each individual these intimations are plainer, but&#13;
      after his death the liver becomes blind, and delivers oracles too&#13;
      obscure to be intelligible. The neighbouring organ (the spleen)&#13;
      is situated on the left-hand side, and is constructed with a view&#13;
      of keeping the liver bright and pure,—like a napkin, always ready&#13;
      prepared and at hand to clean the mirror. And hence, when any&#13;
      impurities arise in the region of the liver by reason of&#13;
      disorders of the body, the loose nature of the spleen, which is&#13;
      composed of a hollow and bloodless tissue, receives them all and&#13;
      clears them away, and when filled with the unclean matter, swells&#13;
      and festers, but, again, when the body is purged, settles down&#13;
      into the same place as before, and is humbled.</p><p>Concerning the soul, as to which part is mortal and which divine,&#13;
      and how and why they are separated, and where located, if God&#13;
      acknowledges that we have spoken the truth, then, and then only,&#13;
      can we be confident; still, we may venture to assert that what&#13;
      has been said by us is probable, and will be rendered more&#13;
      probable by investigation. Let us assume thus much.</p><p>The creation of the rest of the body follows next in order, and&#13;
      this we may investigate in a similar manner. And it appears to be&#13;
      very meet that the body should be framed on the following&#13;
      principles:—</p><p>The authors of our race were aware that we should be intemperate&#13;
      in eating and drinking, and take a good deal more than was&#13;
      necessary or proper, by reason of gluttony. In order then that&#13;
      disease might not quickly destroy us, and lest our mortal race&#13;
      should perish without fulfilling its end—intending to provide&#13;
      against this, the gods made what is called the lower belly, to be&#13;
      a receptacle for the superfluous meat and drink, and formed the&#13;
      convolution of the bowels, so that the food might be prevented&#13;
      from passing quickly through and compelling the body to require&#13;
      more food, thus producing insatiable gluttony, and making the&#13;
      whole race an enemy to philosophy and music, and rebellious&#13;
      against the divinest element within us.</p><p>The bones and flesh, and other similar parts of us, were made as&#13;
      follows. The first principle of all of them was the generation of&#13;
      the marrow. For the bonds of life which unite the soul with the&#13;
      body are made fast there, and they are the root and foundation of&#13;
      the human race. The marrow itself is created out of other&#13;
      materials: God took such of the primary triangles as were&#13;
      straight and smooth, and were adapted by their perfection to&#13;
      produce fire and water, and air and earth—these, I say, he&#13;
      separated from their kinds, and mingling them in due proportions&#13;
      with one another, made the marrow out of them to be a universal&#13;
      seed of the whole race of mankind; and in this seed he then&#13;
      planted and enclosed the souls, and in the original distribution&#13;
      gave to the marrow as many and various forms as the different&#13;
      kinds of souls were hereafter to receive. That which, like a&#13;
      field, was to receive the divine seed, he made round every way,&#13;
      and called that portion of the marrow, brain, intending that,&#13;
      when an animal was perfected, the vessel containing this&#13;
      substance should be the head; but that which was intended to&#13;
      contain the remaining and mortal part of the soul he distributed&#13;
      into figures at once round and elongated, and he called them all&#13;
      by the name ‘marrow’; and to these, as to anchors, fastening the&#13;
      bonds of the whole soul, he proceeded to fashion around them the&#13;
      entire framework of our body, constructing for the marrow, first&#13;
      of all a complete covering of bone.</p><p>Bone was composed by him in the following manner. Having sifted&#13;
      pure and smooth earth he kneaded it and wetted it with marrow,&#13;
      and after that he put it into fire and then into water, and once&#13;
      more into fire and again into water—in this way by frequent&#13;
      transfers from one to the other he made it insoluble by either.&#13;
      Out of this he fashioned, as in a lathe, a globe made of bone,&#13;
      which he placed around the brain, and in this he left a narrow&#13;
      opening; and around the marrow of the neck and back he formed&#13;
      vertebrae which he placed under one another like pivots,&#13;
      beginning at the head and extending through the whole of the&#13;
      trunk. Thus wishing to preserve the entire seed, he enclosed it&#13;
      in a stone-like casing, inserting joints, and using in the&#13;
      formation of them the power of the other or diverse as an&#13;
      intermediate nature, that they might have motion and flexure.&#13;
      Then again, considering that the bone would be too brittle and&#13;
      inflexible, and when heated and again cooled would soon mortify&#13;
      and destroy the seed within—having this in view, he contrived the&#13;
      sinews and the flesh, that so binding all the members together by&#13;
      the sinews, which admitted of being stretched and relaxed about&#13;
      the vertebrae, he might thus make the body capable of flexion and&#13;
      extension, while the flesh would serve as a protection against&#13;
      the summer heat and against the winter cold, and also against&#13;
      falls, softly and easily yielding to external bodies, like&#13;
      articles made of felt; and containing in itself a warm moisture&#13;
      which in summer exudes and makes the surface damp, would impart a&#13;
      natural coolness to the whole body; and again in winter by the&#13;
      help of this internal warmth would form a very tolerable defence&#13;
      against the frost which surrounds it and attacks it from without.&#13;
      He who modelled us, considering these things, mixed earth with&#13;
      fire and water and blended them; and making a ferment of acid and&#13;
      salt, he mingled it with them and formed soft and succulent&#13;
      flesh. As for the sinews, he made them of a mixture of bone and&#13;
      unfermented flesh, attempered so as to be in a mean, and gave&#13;
      them a yellow colour; wherefore the sinews have a firmer and more&#13;
      glutinous nature than flesh, but a softer and moister nature than&#13;
      the bones. With these God covered the bones and marrow, binding&#13;
      them together by sinews, and then enshrouded them all in an upper&#13;
      covering of flesh. The more living and sensitive of the bones he&#13;
      enclosed in the thinnest film of flesh, and those which had the&#13;
      least life within them in the thickest and most solid flesh. So&#13;
      again on the joints of the bones, where reason indicated that no&#13;
      more was required, he placed only a thin covering of flesh, that&#13;
      it might not interfere with the flexion of our bodies and make&#13;
      them unwieldy because difficult to move; and also that it might&#13;
      not, by being crowded and pressed and matted together, destroy&#13;
      sensation by reason of its hardness, and impair the memory and&#13;
      dull the edge of intelligence. Wherefore also the thighs and the&#13;
      shanks and the hips, and the bones of the arms and the forearms,&#13;
      and other parts which have no joints, and the inner bones, which&#13;
      on account of the rarity of the soul in the marrow are destitute&#13;
      of reason—all these are abundantly provided with flesh; but such&#13;
      as have mind in them are in general less fleshy, except where the&#13;
      creator has made some part solely of flesh in order to give&#13;
      sensation,—as, for example, the tongue. But commonly this is not&#13;
      the case. For the nature which comes into being and grows up in&#13;
      us by a law of necessity, does not admit of the combination of&#13;
      solid bone and much flesh with acute perceptions. More than any&#13;
      other part the framework of the head would have had them, if they&#13;
      could have co-existed, and the human race, having a strong and&#13;
      fleshy and sinewy head, would have had a life twice or many times&#13;
      as long as it now has, and also more healthy and free from pain.&#13;
      But our creators, considering whether they should make a&#13;
      longer-lived race which was worse, or a shorter-lived race which&#13;
      was better, came to the conclusion that every one ought to prefer&#13;
      a shorter span of life, which was better, to a longer one, which&#13;
      was worse; and therefore they covered the head with thin bone,&#13;
      but not with flesh and sinews, since it had no joints; and thus&#13;
      the head was added, having more wisdom and sensation than the&#13;
      rest of the body, but also being in every man far weaker. For&#13;
      these reasons and after this manner God placed the sinews at the&#13;
      extremity of the head, in a circle round the neck, and glued them&#13;
      together by the principle of likeness and fastened the&#13;
      extremities of the jawbones to them below the face, and the other&#13;
      sinews he dispersed throughout the body, fastening limb to limb.&#13;
      The framers of us framed the mouth, as now arranged, having teeth&#13;
      and tongue and lips, with a view to the necessary and the good&#13;
      contriving the way in for necessary purposes, the way out for the&#13;
      best purposes; for that is necessary which enters in and gives&#13;
      food to the body; but the river of speech, which flows out of a&#13;
      man and ministers to the intelligence, is the fairest and noblest&#13;
      of all streams. Still the head could neither be left a bare frame&#13;
      of bones, on account of the extremes of heat and cold in the&#13;
      different seasons, nor yet be allowed to be wholly covered, and&#13;
      so become dull and senseless by reason of an overgrowth of flesh.&#13;
      The fleshy nature was not therefore wholly dried up, but a large&#13;
      sort of peel was parted off and remained over, which is now&#13;
      called the skin. This met and grew by the help of the cerebral&#13;
      moisture, and became the circular envelopment of the head. And&#13;
      the moisture, rising up under the sutures, watered and closed in&#13;
      the skin upon the crown, forming a sort of knot. The diversity of&#13;
      the sutures was caused by the power of the courses of the soul&#13;
      and of the food, and the more these struggled against one another&#13;
      the more numerous they became, and fewer if the struggle were&#13;
      less violent. This skin the divine power pierced all round with&#13;
      fire, and out of the punctures which were thus made the moisture&#13;
      issued forth, and the liquid and heat which was pure came away,&#13;
      and a mixed part which was composed of the same material as the&#13;
      skin, and had a fineness equal to the punctures, was borne up by&#13;
      its own impulse and extended far outside the head, but being too&#13;
      slow to escape, was thrust back by the external air, and rolled&#13;
      up underneath the skin, where it took root. Thus the hair sprang&#13;
      up in the skin, being akin to it because it is like threads of&#13;
      leather, but rendered harder and closer through the pressure of&#13;
      the cold, by which each hair, while in process of separation from&#13;
      the skin, is compressed and cooled. Wherefore the creator formed&#13;
      the head hairy, making use of the causes which I have mentioned,&#13;
      and reflecting also that instead of flesh the brain needed the&#13;
      hair to be a light covering or guard, which would give shade in&#13;
      summer and shelter in winter, and at the same time would not&#13;
      impede our quickness of perception. From the combination of&#13;
      sinew, skin, and bone, in the structure of the finger, there&#13;
      arises a triple compound, which, when dried up, takes the form of&#13;
      one hard skin partaking of all three natures, and was fabricated&#13;
      by these second causes, but designed by mind which is the&#13;
      principal cause with an eye to the future. For our creators well&#13;
      knew that women and other animals would some day be framed out of&#13;
      men, and they further knew that many animals would require the&#13;
      use of nails for many purposes; wherefore they fashioned in men&#13;
      at their first creation the rudiments of nails. For this purpose&#13;
      and for these reasons they caused skin, hair, and nails to grow&#13;
      at the extremities of the limbs.</p><p>And now that all the parts and members of the mortal animal had&#13;
      come together, since its life of necessity consisted of fire and&#13;
      breath, and it therefore wasted away by dissolution and&#13;
      depletion, the gods contrived the following remedy: They mingled&#13;
      a nature akin to that of man with other forms and perceptions,&#13;
      and thus created another kind of animal. These are the trees and&#13;
      plants and seeds which have been improved by cultivation and are&#13;
      now domesticated among us; anciently there were only the wild&#13;
      kinds, which are older than the cultivated. For everything that&#13;
      partakes of life may be truly called a living being, and the&#13;
      animal of which we are now speaking partakes of the third kind of&#13;
      soul, which is said to be seated between the midriff and the&#13;
      navel, having no part in opinion or reason or mind, but only in&#13;
      feelings of pleasure and pain and the desires which accompany&#13;
      them. For this nature is always in a passive state, revolving in&#13;
      and about itself, repelling the motion from without and using its&#13;
      own, and accordingly is not endowed by nature with the power of&#13;
      observing or reflecting on its own concerns. Wherefore it lives&#13;
      and does not differ from a living being, but is fixed and rooted&#13;
      in the same spot, having no power of self-motion.</p><p>Now after the superior powers had created all these natures to be&#13;
      food for us who are of the inferior nature, they cut various&#13;
      channels through the body as through a garden, that it might be&#13;
      watered as from a running stream. In the first place, they cut&#13;
      two hidden channels or veins down the back where the skin and the&#13;
      flesh join, which answered severally to the right and left side&#13;
      of the body. These they let down along the backbone, so as to&#13;
      have the marrow of generation between them, where it was most&#13;
      likely to flourish, and in order that the stream coming down from&#13;
      above might flow freely to the other parts, and equalize the&#13;
      irrigation. In the next place, they divided the veins about the&#13;
      head, and interlacing them, they sent them in opposite&#13;
      directions; those coming from the right side they sent to the&#13;
      left of the body, and those from the left they diverted towards&#13;
      the right, so that they and the skin might together form a bond&#13;
      which should fasten the head to the body, since the crown of the&#13;
      head was not encircled by sinews; and also in order that the&#13;
      sensations from both sides might be distributed over the whole&#13;
      body. And next, they ordered the water-courses of the body in a&#13;
      manner which I will describe, and which will be more easily&#13;
      understood if we begin by admitting that all things which have&#13;
      lesser parts retain the greater, but the greater cannot retain&#13;
      the lesser. Now of all natures fire has the smallest parts, and&#13;
      therefore penetrates through earth and water and air and their&#13;
      compounds, nor can anything hold it. And a similar principle&#13;
      applies to the human belly; for when meats and drinks enter it,&#13;
      it holds them, but it cannot hold air and fire, because the&#13;
      particles of which they consist are smaller than its own&#13;
      structure.</p><p>These elements, therefore, God employed for the sake of&#13;
      distributing moisture from the belly into the veins, weaving&#13;
      together a network of fire and air like a weel, having at the&#13;
      entrance two lesser weels; further he constructed one of these&#13;
      with two openings, and from the lesser weels he extended cords&#13;
      reaching all round to the extremities of the network. All the&#13;
      interior of the net he made of fire, but the lesser weels and&#13;
      their cavity, of air. The network he took and spread over the&#13;
      newly-formed animal in the following manner:—He let the lesser&#13;
      weels pass into the mouth; there were two of them, and one he let&#13;
      down by the air-pipes into the lungs, the other by the side of&#13;
      the air-pipes into the belly. The former he divided into two&#13;
      branches, both of which he made to meet at the channels of the&#13;
      nose, so that when the way through the mouth did not act, the&#13;
      streams of the mouth as well were replenished through the nose.&#13;
      With the other cavity (i.e. of the greater weel) he enveloped the&#13;
      hollow parts of the body, and at one time he made all this to&#13;
      flow into the lesser weels, quite gently, for they are composed&#13;
      of air, and at another time he caused the lesser weels to flow&#13;
      back again; and the net he made to find a way in and out through&#13;
      the pores of the body, and the rays of fire which are bound fast&#13;
      within followed the passage of the air either way, never at any&#13;
      time ceasing so long as the mortal being holds together. This&#13;
      process, as we affirm, the name-giver named inspiration and&#13;
      expiration. And all this movement, active as well as passive,&#13;
      takes place in order that the body, being watered and cooled, may&#13;
      receive nourishment and life; for when the respiration is going&#13;
      in and out, and the fire, which is fast bound within, follows it,&#13;
      and ever and anon moving to and fro, enters through the belly and&#13;
      reaches the meat and drink, it dissolves them, and dividing them&#13;
      into small portions and guiding them through the passages where&#13;
      it goes, pumps them as from a fountain into the channels of the&#13;
      veins, and makes the stream of the veins flow through the body as&#13;
      through a conduit.</p><p>Let us once more consider the phenomena of respiration, and&#13;
      enquire into the causes which have made it what it is. They are&#13;
      as follows:—Seeing that there is no such thing as a vacuum into&#13;
      which any of those things which are moved can enter, and the&#13;
      breath is carried from us into the external air, the next point&#13;
      is, as will be clear to every one, that it does not go into a&#13;
      vacant space, but pushes its neighbour out of its place, and that&#13;
      which is thrust out in turn drives out its neighbour; and in this&#13;
      way everything of necessity at last comes round to that place&#13;
      from whence the breath came forth, and enters in there, and&#13;
      following the breath, fills up the vacant space; and this goes on&#13;
      like the rotation of a wheel, because there can be no such thing&#13;
      as a vacuum. Wherefore also the breast and the lungs, when they&#13;
      emit the breath, are replenished by the air which surrounds the&#13;
      body and which enters in through the pores of the flesh and is&#13;
      driven round in a circle; and again, the air which is sent away&#13;
      and passes out through the body forces the breath inwards through&#13;
      the passage of the mouth and the nostrils. Now the origin of this&#13;
      movement may be supposed to be as follows. In the interior of&#13;
      every animal the hottest part is that which is around the blood&#13;
      and veins; it is in a manner an internal fountain of fire, which&#13;
      we compare to the network of a creel, being woven all of fire and&#13;
      extended through the centre of the body, while the outer parts&#13;
      are composed of air. Now we must admit that heat naturally&#13;
      proceeds outward to its own place and to its kindred element; and&#13;
      as there are two exits for the heat, the one out through the&#13;
      body, and the other through the mouth and nostrils, when it moves&#13;
      towards the one, it drives round the air at the other, and that&#13;
      which is driven round falls into the fire and becomes warm, and&#13;
      that which goes forth is cooled. But when the heat changes its&#13;
      place, and the particles at the other exit grow warmer, the&#13;
      hotter air inclining in that direction and carried towards its&#13;
      native element, fire, pushes round the air at the other; and this&#13;
      being affected in the same way and communicating the same&#13;
      impulse, a circular motion swaying to and fro is produced by the&#13;
      double process, which we call inspiration and expiration.</p><p>The phenomena of medical cupping-glasses and of the swallowing of&#13;
      drink and of the projection of bodies, whether discharged in the&#13;
      air or bowled along the ground, are to be investigated on a&#13;
      similar principle; and swift and slow sounds, which appear to be&#13;
      high and low, and are sometimes discordant on account of their&#13;
      inequality, and then again harmonical on account of the equality&#13;
      of the motion which they excite in us. For when the motions of&#13;
      the antecedent swifter sounds begin to pause and the two are&#13;
      equalized, the slower sounds overtake the swifter and then propel&#13;
      them. When they overtake them they do not intrude a new and&#13;
      discordant motion, but introduce the beginnings of a slower,&#13;
      which answers to the swifter as it dies away, thus producing a&#13;
      single mixed expression out of high and low, whence arises a&#13;
      pleasure which even the unwise feel, and which to the wise&#13;
      becomes a higher sort of delight, being an imitation of divine&#13;
      harmony in mortal motions. Moreover, as to the flowing of water,&#13;
      the fall of the thunderbolt, and the marvels that are observed&#13;
      about the attraction of amber and the Heraclean stones,—in none&#13;
      of these cases is there any attraction; but he who investigates&#13;
      rightly, will find that such wonderful phenomena are attributable&#13;
      to the combination of certain conditions—the non-existence of a&#13;
      vacuum, the fact that objects push one another round, and that&#13;
      they change places, passing severally into their proper positions&#13;
      as they are divided or combined.</p><p>Such as we have seen, is the nature and such are the causes of&#13;
      respiration,—the subject in which this discussion originated. For&#13;
      the fire cuts the food and following the breath surges up within,&#13;
      fire and breath rising together and filling the veins by drawing&#13;
      up out of the belly and pouring into them the cut portions of the&#13;
      food; and so the streams of food are kept flowing through the&#13;
      whole body in all animals. And fresh cuttings from kindred&#13;
      substances, whether the fruits of the earth or herb of the field,&#13;
      which God planted to be our daily food, acquire all sorts of&#13;
      colours by their inter-mixture; but red is the most pervading of&#13;
      them, being created by the cutting action of fire and by the&#13;
      impression which it makes on a moist substance; and hence the&#13;
      liquid which circulates in the body has a colour such as we have&#13;
      described. The liquid itself we call blood, which nourishes the&#13;
      flesh and the whole body, whence all parts are watered and empty&#13;
      places filled.</p><p>Now the process of repletion and evacuation is effected after the&#13;
      manner of the universal motion by which all kindred substances&#13;
      are drawn towards one another. For the external elements which&#13;
      surround us are always causing us to consume away, and&#13;
      distributing and sending off like to like; the particles of&#13;
      blood, too, which are divided and contained within the frame of&#13;
      the animal as in a sort of heaven, are compelled to imitate the&#13;
      motion of the universe. Each, therefore, of the divided parts&#13;
      within us, being carried to its kindred nature, replenishes the&#13;
      void. When more is taken away than flows in, then we decay, and&#13;
      when less, we grow and increase.</p><p>The frame of the entire creature when young has the triangles of&#13;
      each kind new, and may be compared to the keel of a vessel which&#13;
      is just off the stocks; they are locked firmly together and yet&#13;
      the whole mass is soft and delicate, being freshly formed of&#13;
      marrow and nurtured on milk. Now when the triangles out of which&#13;
      meats and drinks are composed come in from without, and are&#13;
      comprehended in the body, being older and weaker than the&#13;
      triangles already there, the frame of the body gets the better of&#13;
      them and its newer triangles cut them up, and so the animal grows&#13;
      great, being nourished by a multitude of similar particles. But&#13;
      when the roots of the triangles are loosened by having undergone&#13;
      many conflicts with many things in the course of time, they are&#13;
      no longer able to cut or assimilate the food which enters, but&#13;
      are themselves easily divided by the bodies which come in from&#13;
      without. In this way every animal is overcome and decays, and&#13;
      this affection is called old age. And at last, when the bonds by&#13;
      which the triangles of the marrow are united no longer hold, and&#13;
      are parted by the strain of existence, they in turn loosen the&#13;
      bonds of the soul, and she, obtaining a natural release, flies&#13;
      away with joy. For that which takes place according to nature is&#13;
      pleasant, but that which is contrary to nature is painful. And&#13;
      thus death, if caused by disease or produced by wounds, is&#13;
      painful and violent; but that sort of death which comes with old&#13;
      age and fulfils the debt of nature is the easiest of deaths, and&#13;
      is accompanied with pleasure rather than with pain.</p><p>Now every one can see whence diseases arise. There are four&#13;
      natures out of which the body is compacted, earth and fire and&#13;
      water and air, and the unnatural excess or defect of these, or&#13;
      the change of any of them from its own natural place into&#13;
      another, or—since there are more kinds than one of fire and of&#13;
      the other elements—the assumption by any of these of a wrong&#13;
      kind, or any similar irregularity, produces disorders and&#13;
      diseases; for when any of them is produced or changed in a manner&#13;
      contrary to nature, the parts which were previously cool grow&#13;
      warm, and those which were dry become moist, and the light become&#13;
      heavy, and the heavy light; all sorts of changes occur. For, as&#13;
      we affirm, a thing can only remain the same with itself, whole&#13;
      and sound, when the same is added to it, or subtracted from it,&#13;
      in the same respect and in the same manner and in due proportion;&#13;
      and whatever comes or goes away in violation of these laws causes&#13;
      all manner of changes and infinite diseases and corruptions. Now&#13;
      there is a second class of structures which are also natural, and&#13;
      this affords a second opportunity of observing diseases to him&#13;
      who would understand them. For whereas marrow and bone and flesh&#13;
      and sinews are composed of the four elements, and the blood,&#13;
      though after another manner, is likewise formed out of them, most&#13;
      diseases originate in the way which I have described; but the&#13;
      worst of all owe their severity to the fact that the generation&#13;
      of these substances proceeds in a wrong order; they are then&#13;
      destroyed. For the natural order is that the flesh and sinews&#13;
      should be made of blood, the sinews out of the fibres to which&#13;
      they are akin, and the flesh out of the clots which are formed&#13;
      when the fibres are separated. And the glutinous and rich matter&#13;
      which comes away from the sinews and the flesh, not only glues&#13;
      the flesh to the bones, but nourishes and imparts growth to the&#13;
      bone which surrounds the marrow; and by reason of the solidity of&#13;
      the bones, that which filters through consists of the purest and&#13;
      smoothest and oiliest sort of triangles, dropping like dew from&#13;
      the bones and watering the marrow. Now when each process takes&#13;
      place in this order, health commonly results; when in the&#13;
      opposite order, disease. For when the flesh becomes decomposed&#13;
      and sends back the wasting substance into the veins, then an&#13;
      over-supply of blood of diverse kinds, mingling with air in the&#13;
      veins, having variegated colours and bitter properties, as well&#13;
      as acid and saline qualities, contains all sorts of bile and&#13;
      serum and phlegm. For all things go the wrong way, and having&#13;
      become corrupted, first they taint the blood itself, and then&#13;
      ceasing to give nourishment to the body they are carried along&#13;
      the veins in all directions, no longer preserving the order of&#13;
      their natural courses, but at war with themselves, because they&#13;
      receive no good from one another, and are hostile to the abiding&#13;
      constitution of the body, which they corrupt and dissolve. The&#13;
      oldest part of the flesh which is corrupted, being hard to&#13;
      decompose, from long burning grows black, and from being&#13;
      everywhere corroded becomes bitter, and is injurious to every&#13;
      part of the body which is still uncorrupted. Sometimes, when the&#13;
      bitter element is refined away, the black part assumes an acidity&#13;
      which takes the place of the bitterness; at other times the&#13;
      bitterness being tinged with blood has a redder colour; and this,&#13;
      when mixed with black, takes the hue of grass; and again, an&#13;
      auburn colour mingles with the bitter matter when new flesh is&#13;
      decomposed by the fire which surrounds the internal flame;—to all&#13;
      which symptoms some physician perhaps, or rather some&#13;
      philosopher, who had the power of seeing in many dissimilar&#13;
      things one nature deserving of a name, has assigned the common&#13;
      name of bile. But the other kinds of bile are variously&#13;
      distinguished by their colours. As for serum, that sort which is&#13;
      the watery part of blood is innocent, but that which is a&#13;
      secretion of black and acid bile is malignant when mingled by the&#13;
      power of heat with any salt substance, and is then called acid&#13;
      phlegm. Again, the substance which is formed by the liquefaction&#13;
      of new and tender flesh when air is present, if inflated and&#13;
      encased in liquid so as to form bubbles, which separately are&#13;
      invisible owing to their small size, but when collected are of a&#13;
      bulk which is visible, and have a white colour arising out of the&#13;
      generation of foam—all this decomposition of tender flesh when&#13;
      intermingled with air is termed by us white phlegm. And the whey&#13;
      or sediment of newly-formed phlegm is sweat and tears, and&#13;
      includes the various daily discharges by which the body is&#13;
      purified. Now all these become causes of disease when the blood&#13;
      is not replenished in a natural manner by food and drink but&#13;
      gains bulk from opposite sources in violation of the laws of&#13;
      nature. When the several parts of the flesh are separated by&#13;
      disease, if the foundation remains, the power of the disorder is&#13;
      only half as great, and there is still a prospect of an easy&#13;
      recovery; but when that which binds the flesh to the bones is&#13;
      diseased, and no longer being separated from the muscles and&#13;
      sinews, ceases to give nourishment to the bone and to unite flesh&#13;
      and bone, and from being oily and smooth and glutinous becomes&#13;
      rough and salt and dry, owing to bad regimen, then all the&#13;
      substance thus corrupted crumbles away under the flesh and the&#13;
      sinews, and separates from the bone, and the fleshy parts fall&#13;
      away from their foundation and leave the sinews bare and full of&#13;
      brine, and the flesh again gets into the circulation of the blood&#13;
      and makes the previously-mentioned disorders still greater. And&#13;
      if these bodily affections be severe, still worse are the prior&#13;
      disorders; as when the bone itself, by reason of the density of&#13;
      the flesh, does not obtain sufficient air, but becomes mouldy and&#13;
      hot and gangrened and receives no nutriment, and the natural&#13;
      process is inverted, and the bone crumbling passes into the food,&#13;
      and the food into the flesh, and the flesh again falling into the&#13;
      blood makes all maladies that may occur more virulent than those&#13;
      already mentioned. But the worst case of all is when the marrow&#13;
      is diseased, either from excess or defect; and this is the cause&#13;
      of the very greatest and most fatal disorders, in which the whole&#13;
      course of the body is reversed.</p><p>There is a third class of diseases which may be conceived of as&#13;
      arising in three ways; for they are produced sometimes by wind,&#13;
      and sometimes by phlegm, and sometimes by bile. When the lung,&#13;
      which is the dispenser of the air to the body, is obstructed by&#13;
      rheums and its passages are not free, some of them not acting,&#13;
      while through others too much air enters, then the parts which&#13;
      are unrefreshed by air corrode, while in other parts the excess&#13;
      of air forcing its way through the veins distorts them and&#13;
      decomposing the body is enclosed in the midst of it and occupies&#13;
      the midriff; thus numberless painful diseases are produced,&#13;
      accompanied by copious sweats. And oftentimes when the flesh is&#13;
      dissolved in the body, wind, generated within and unable to&#13;
      escape, is the source of quite as much pain as the air coming in&#13;
      from without; but the greatest pain is felt when the wind gets&#13;
      about the sinews and the veins of the shoulders, and swells them&#13;
      up, and so twists back the great tendons and the sinews which are&#13;
      connected with them. These disorders are called tetanus and&#13;
      opisthotonus, by reason of the tension which accompanies them.&#13;
      The cure of them is difficult; relief is in most cases given by&#13;
      fever supervening. The white phlegm, though dangerous when&#13;
      detained within by reason of the air-bubbles, yet if it can&#13;
      communicate with the outside air, is less severe, and only&#13;
      discolours the body, generating leprous eruptions and similar&#13;
      diseases. When it is mingled with black bile and dispersed about&#13;
      the courses of the head, which are the divinest part of us, the&#13;
      attack if coming on in sleep, is not so severe; but when&#13;
      assailing those who are awake it is hard to be got rid of, and&#13;
      being an affection of a sacred part, is most justly called&#13;
      sacred. An acid and salt phlegm, again, is the source of all&#13;
      those diseases which take the form of catarrh, but they have many&#13;
      names because the places into which they flow are manifold.</p><p>Inflammations of the body come from burnings and inflamings, and&#13;
      all of them originate in bile. When bile finds a means of&#13;
      discharge, it boils up and sends forth all sorts of tumours; but&#13;
      when imprisoned within, it generates many inflammatory diseases,&#13;
      above all when mingled with pure blood; since it then displaces&#13;
      the fibres which are scattered about in the blood and are&#13;
      designed to maintain the balance of rare and dense, in order that&#13;
      the blood may not be so liquefied by heat as to exude from the&#13;
      pores of the body, nor again become too dense and thus find a&#13;
      difficulty in circulating through the veins. The fibres are so&#13;
      constituted as to maintain this balance; and if any one brings&#13;
      them all together when the blood is dead and in process of&#13;
      cooling, then the blood which remains becomes fluid, but if they&#13;
      are left alone, they soon congeal by reason of the surrounding&#13;
      cold. The fibres having this power over the blood, bile, which is&#13;
      only stale blood, and which from being flesh is dissolved again&#13;
      into blood, at the first influx coming in little by little, hot&#13;
      and liquid, is congealed by the power of the fibres; and so&#13;
      congealing and made to cool, it produces internal cold and&#13;
      shuddering. When it enters with more of a flood and overcomes the&#13;
      fibres by its heat, and boiling up throws them into disorder, if&#13;
      it have power enough to maintain its supremacy, it penetrates the&#13;
      marrow and burns up what may be termed the cables of the soul,&#13;
      and sets her free; but when there is not so much of it, and the&#13;
      body though wasted still holds out, the bile is itself mastered,&#13;
      and is either utterly banished, or is thrust through the veins&#13;
      into the lower or upper belly, and is driven out of the body like&#13;
      an exile from a state in which there has been civil war; whence&#13;
      arise diarrhoeas and dysenteries, and all such disorders. When&#13;
      the constitution is disordered by excess of fire, continuous heat&#13;
      and fever are the result; when excess of air is the cause, then&#13;
      the fever is quotidian; when of water, which is a more sluggish&#13;
      element than either fire or air, then the fever is a tertian;&#13;
      when of earth, which is the most sluggish of the four, and is&#13;
      only purged away in a four-fold period, the result is a quartan&#13;
      fever, which can with difficulty be shaken off.</p><p>Such is the manner in which diseases of the body arise; the&#13;
      disorders of the soul, which depend upon the body, originate as&#13;
      follows. We must acknowledge disease of the mind to be a want of&#13;
      intelligence; and of this there are two kinds; to wit, madness&#13;
      and ignorance. In whatever state a man experiences either of&#13;
      them, that state may be called disease; and excessive pains and&#13;
      pleasures are justly to be regarded as the greatest diseases to&#13;
      which the soul is liable. For a man who is in great joy or in&#13;
      great pain, in his unreasonable eagerness to attain the one and&#13;
      to avoid the other, is not able to see or to hear anything&#13;
      rightly; but he is mad, and is at the time utterly incapable of&#13;
      any participation in reason. He who has the seed about the spinal&#13;
      marrow too plentiful and overflowing, like a tree overladen with&#13;
      fruit, has many throes, and also obtains many pleasures in his&#13;
      desires and their offspring, and is for the most part of his life&#13;
      deranged, because his pleasures and pains are so very great; his&#13;
      soul is rendered foolish and disordered by his body; yet he is&#13;
      regarded not as one diseased, but as one who is voluntarily bad,&#13;
      which is a mistake. The truth is that the intemperance of love is&#13;
      a disease of the soul due chiefly to the moisture and fluidity&#13;
      which is produced in one of the elements by the loose consistency&#13;
      of the bones. And in general, all that which is termed the&#13;
      incontinence of pleasure and is deemed a reproach under the idea&#13;
      that the wicked voluntarily do wrong is not justly a matter for&#13;
      reproach. For no man is voluntarily bad; but the bad become bad&#13;
      by reason of an ill disposition of the body and bad education,&#13;
      things which are hateful to every man and happen to him against&#13;
      his will. And in the case of pain too in like manner the soul&#13;
      suffers much evil from the body. For where the acid and briny&#13;
      phlegm and other bitter and bilious humours wander about in the&#13;
      body, and find no exit or escape, but are pent up within and&#13;
      mingle their own vapours with the motions of the soul, and are&#13;
      blended with them, they produce all sorts of diseases, more or&#13;
      fewer, and in every degree of intensity; and being carried to the&#13;
      three places of the soul, whichever they may severally assail,&#13;
      they create infinite varieties of ill-temper and melancholy, of&#13;
      rashness and cowardice, and also of forgetfulness and stupidity.&#13;
      Further, when to this evil constitution of body evil forms of&#13;
      government are added and evil discourses are uttered in private&#13;
      as well as in public, and no sort of instruction is given in&#13;
      youth to cure these evils, then all of us who are bad become bad&#13;
      from two causes which are entirely beyond our control. In such&#13;
      cases the planters are to blame rather than the plants, the&#13;
      educators rather than the educated. But however that may be, we&#13;
      should endeavour as far as we can by education, and studies, and&#13;
      learning, to avoid vice and attain virtue; this, however, is part&#13;
      of another subject.</p><p>There is a corresponding enquiry concerning the mode of treatment&#13;
      by which the mind and the body are to be preserved, about which&#13;
      it is meet and right that I should say a word in turn; for it is&#13;
      more our duty to speak of the good than of the evil. Everything&#13;
      that is good is fair, and the fair is not without proportion, and&#13;
      the animal which is to be fair must have due proportion. Now we&#13;
      perceive lesser symmetries or proportions and reason about them,&#13;
      but of the highest and greatest we take no heed; for there is no&#13;
      proportion or disproportion more productive of health and&#13;
      disease, and virtue and vice, than that between soul and body.&#13;
      This however we do not perceive, nor do we reflect that when a&#13;
      weak or small frame is the vehicle of a great and mighty soul, or&#13;
      conversely, when a little soul is encased in a large body, then&#13;
      the whole animal is not fair, for it lacks the most important of&#13;
      all symmetries; but the due proportion of mind and body is the&#13;
      fairest and loveliest of all sights to him who has the seeing&#13;
      eye. Just as a body which has a leg too long, or which is&#13;
      unsymmetrical in some other respect, is an unpleasant sight, and&#13;
      also, when doing its share of work, is much distressed and makes&#13;
      convulsive efforts, and often stumbles through awkwardness, and&#13;
      is the cause of infinite evil to its own self—in like manner we&#13;
      should conceive of the double nature which we call the living&#13;
      being; and when in this compound there is an impassioned soul&#13;
      more powerful than the body, that soul, I say, convulses and&#13;
      fills with disorders the whole inner nature of man; and when&#13;
      eager in the pursuit of some sort of learning or study, causes&#13;
      wasting; or again, when teaching or disputing in private or in&#13;
      public, and strifes and controversies arise, inflames and&#13;
      dissolves the composite frame of man and introduces rheums; and&#13;
      the nature of this phenomenon is not understood by most&#13;
      professors of medicine, who ascribe it to the opposite of the&#13;
      real cause. And once more, when a body large and too strong for&#13;
      the soul is united to a small and weak intelligence, then&#13;
      inasmuch as there are two desires natural to man,—one of food for&#13;
      the sake of the body, and one of wisdom for the sake of the&#13;
      diviner part of us—then, I say, the motions of the stronger,&#13;
      getting the better and increasing their own power, but making the&#13;
      soul dull, and stupid, and forgetful, engender ignorance, which&#13;
      is the greatest of diseases. There is one protection against both&#13;
      kinds of disproportion:—that we should not move the body without&#13;
      the soul or the soul without the body, and thus they will be on&#13;
      their guard against each other, and be healthy and well balanced.&#13;
      And therefore the mathematician or any one else whose thoughts&#13;
      are much absorbed in some intellectual pursuit, must allow his&#13;
      body also to have due exercise, and practise gymnastic; and he&#13;
      who is careful to fashion the body, should in turn impart to the&#13;
      soul its proper motions, and should cultivate music and all&#13;
      philosophy, if he would deserve to be called truly fair and truly&#13;
      good. And the separate parts should be treated in the same&#13;
      manner, in imitation of the pattern of the universe; for as the&#13;
      body is heated and also cooled within by the elements which enter&#13;
      into it, and is again dried up and moistened by external things,&#13;
      and experiences these and the like affections from both kinds of&#13;
      motions, the result is that the body if given up to motion when&#13;
      in a state of quiescence is overmastered and perishes; but if any&#13;
      one, in imitation of that which we call the foster-mother and&#13;
      nurse of the universe, will not allow the body ever to be&#13;
      inactive, but is always producing motions and agitations through&#13;
      its whole extent, which form the natural defence against other&#13;
      motions both internal and external, and by moderate exercise&#13;
      reduces to order according to their affinities the particles and&#13;
      affections which are wandering about the body, as we have already&#13;
      said when speaking of the universe, he will not allow enemy&#13;
      placed by the side of enemy to stir up wars and disorders in the&#13;
      body, but he will place friend by the side of friend, so as to&#13;
      create health. Now of all motions that is the best which is&#13;
      produced in a thing by itself, for it is most akin to the motion&#13;
      of thought and of the universe; but that motion which is caused&#13;
      by others is not so good, and worst of all is that which moves&#13;
      the body, when at rest, in parts only and by some external&#13;
      agency. Wherefore of all modes of purifying and re-uniting the&#13;
      body the best is gymnastic; the next best is a surging motion, as&#13;
      in sailing or any other mode of conveyance which is not&#13;
      fatiguing; the third sort of motion may be of use in a case of&#13;
      extreme necessity, but in any other will be adopted by no man of&#13;
      sense: I mean the purgative treatment of physicians; for diseases&#13;
      unless they are very dangerous should not be irritated by&#13;
      medicines, since every form of disease is in a manner akin to the&#13;
      living being, whose complex frame has an appointed term of life.&#13;
      For not the whole race only, but each individual—barring&#13;
      inevitable accidents—comes into the world having a fixed span,&#13;
      and the triangles in us are originally framed with power to last&#13;
      for a certain time, beyond which no man can prolong his life. And&#13;
      this holds also of the constitution of diseases; if any one&#13;
      regardless of the appointed time tries to subdue them by&#13;
      medicine, he only aggravates and multiplies them. Wherefore we&#13;
      ought always to manage them by regimen, as far as a man can spare&#13;
      the time, and not provoke a disagreeable enemy by medicines.</p><p>Enough of the composite animal, and of the body which is a part&#13;
      of him, and of the manner in which a man may train and be trained&#13;
      by himself so as to live most according to reason: and we must&#13;
      above and before all provide that the element which is to train&#13;
      him shall be the fairest and best adapted to that purpose. A&#13;
      minute discussion of this subject would be a serious task; but&#13;
      if, as before, I am to give only an outline, the subject may not&#13;
      unfitly be summed up as follows.</p><p>I have often remarked that there are three kinds of soul located&#13;
      within us, having each of them motions, and I must now repeat in&#13;
      the fewest words possible, that one part, if remaining inactive&#13;
      and ceasing from its natural motion, must necessarily become very&#13;
      weak, but that which is trained and exercised, very strong.&#13;
      Wherefore we should take care that the movements of the different&#13;
      parts of the soul should be in due proportion.</p><p>And we should consider that God gave the sovereign part of the&#13;
      human soul to be the divinity of each one, being that part which,&#13;
      as we say, dwells at the top of the body, and inasmuch as we are&#13;
      a plant not of an earthly but of a heavenly growth, raises us&#13;
      from earth to our kindred who are in heaven. And in this we say&#13;
      truly; for the divine power suspended the head and root of us&#13;
      from that place where the generation of the soul first began, and&#13;
      thus made the whole body upright. When a man is always occupied&#13;
      with the cravings of desire and ambition, and is eagerly striving&#13;
      to satisfy them, all his thoughts must be mortal, and, as far as&#13;
      it is possible altogether to become such, he must be mortal every&#13;
      whit, because he has cherished his mortal part. But he who has&#13;
      been earnest in the love of knowledge and of true wisdom, and has&#13;
      exercised his intellect more than any other part of him, must&#13;
      have thoughts immortal and divine, if he attain truth, and in so&#13;
      far as human nature is capable of sharing in immortality, he must&#13;
      altogether be immortal; and since he is ever cherishing the&#13;
      divine power, and has the divinity within him in perfect order,&#13;
      he will be perfectly happy. Now there is only one way of taking&#13;
      care of things, and this is to give to each the food and motion&#13;
      which are natural to it. And the motions which are naturally akin&#13;
      to the divine principle within us are the thoughts and&#13;
      revolutions of the universe. These each man should follow, and&#13;
      correct the courses of the head which were corrupted at our&#13;
      birth, and by learning the harmonies and revolutions of the&#13;
      universe, should assimilate the thinking being to the thought,&#13;
      renewing his original nature, and having assimilated them should&#13;
      attain to that perfect life which the gods have set before&#13;
      mankind, both for the present and the future.</p><p>Thus our original design of discoursing about the universe down&#13;
      to the creation of man is nearly completed. A brief mention may&#13;
      be made of the generation of other animals, so far as the subject&#13;
      admits of brevity; in this manner our argument will best attain a&#13;
      due proportion. On the subject of animals, then, the following&#13;
      remarks may be offered. Of the men who came into the world, those&#13;
      who were cowards or led unrighteous lives may with reason be&#13;
      supposed to have changed into the nature of women in the second&#13;
      generation. And this was the reason why at that time the gods&#13;
      created in us the desire of sexual intercourse, contriving in man&#13;
      one animated substance, and in woman another, which they formed&#13;
      respectively in the following manner. The outlet for drink by&#13;
      which liquids pass through the lung under the kidneys and into&#13;
      the bladder, which receives and then by the pressure of the air&#13;
      emits them, was so fashioned by them as to penetrate also into&#13;
      the body of the marrow, which passes from the head along the neck&#13;
      and through the back, and which in the preceding discourse we&#13;
      have named the seed. And the seed having life, and becoming&#13;
      endowed with respiration, produces in that part in which it&#13;
      respires a lively desire of emission, and thus creates in us the&#13;
      love of procreation. Wherefore also in men the organ of&#13;
      generation becoming rebellious and masterful, like an animal&#13;
      disobedient to reason, and maddened with the sting of lust, seeks&#13;
      to gain absolute sway; and the same is the case with the&#13;
      so-called womb or matrix of women; the animal within them is&#13;
      desirous of procreating children, and when remaining unfruitful&#13;
      long beyond its proper time, gets discontented and angry, and&#13;
      wandering in every direction through the body, closes up the&#13;
      passages of the breath, and, by obstructing respiration, drives&#13;
      them to extremity, causing all varieties of disease, until at&#13;
      length the desire and love of the man and the woman, bringing&#13;
      them together and as it were plucking the fruit from the tree,&#13;
      sow in the womb, as in a field, animals unseen by reason of their&#13;
      smallness and without form; these again are separated and matured&#13;
      within; they are then finally brought out into the light, and&#13;
      thus the generation of animals is completed.</p><p>Thus were created women and the female sex in general. But the&#13;
      race of birds was created out of innocent light-minded men, who,&#13;
      although their minds were directed toward heaven, imagined, in&#13;
      their simplicity, that the clearest demonstration of the things&#13;
      above was to be obtained by sight; these were remodelled and&#13;
      transformed into birds, and they grew feathers instead of hair.&#13;
      The race of wild pedestrian animals, again, came from those who&#13;
      had no philosophy in any of their thoughts, and never considered&#13;
      at all about the nature of the heavens, because they had ceased&#13;
      to use the courses of the head, but followed the guidance of&#13;
      those parts of the soul which are in the breast. In consequence&#13;
      of these habits of theirs they had their front-legs and their&#13;
      heads resting upon the earth to which they were drawn by natural&#13;
      affinity; and the crowns of their heads were elongated and of all&#13;
      sorts of shapes, into which the courses of the soul were crushed&#13;
      by reason of disuse. And this was the reason why they were&#13;
      created quadrupeds and polypods: God gave the more senseless of&#13;
      them the more support that they might be more attracted to the&#13;
      earth. And the most foolish of them, who trail their bodies&#13;
      entirely upon the ground and have no longer any need of feet, he&#13;
      made without feet to crawl upon the earth. The fourth class were&#13;
      the inhabitants of the water: these were made out of the most&#13;
      entirely senseless and ignorant of all, whom the transformers did&#13;
      not think any longer worthy of pure respiration, because they&#13;
      possessed a soul which was made impure by all sorts of&#13;
      transgression; and instead of the subtle and pure medium of air,&#13;
      they gave them the deep and muddy sea to be their element of&#13;
      respiration; and hence arose the race of fishes and oysters, and&#13;
      other aquatic animals, which have received the most remote&#13;
      habitations as a punishment of their outlandish ignorance. These&#13;
      are the laws by which animals pass into one another, now, as&#13;
      ever, changing as they lose or gain wisdom and folly.</p><p>We may now say that our discourse about the nature of the&#13;
      universe has an end. The world has received animals, mortal and&#13;
      immortal, and is fulfilled with them, and has become a visible&#13;
      animal containing the visible—the sensible God who is the image&#13;
      of the intellectual, the greatest, best, fairest, most&#13;
      perfect—the one only-begotten heaven.</p></section></body></FictionBook>
